US20060076385A1 - Power tool control system - Google Patents
Power tool control system Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20060076385A1 US20060076385A1 US10/463,206 US46320603A US2006076385A1 US 20060076385 A1 US20060076385 A1 US 20060076385A1 US 46320603 A US46320603 A US 46320603A US 2006076385 A1 US2006076385 A1 US 2006076385A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- assembly
- laser
- screen
- user interface
- power tool
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B23—MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- B23B—TURNING; BORING
- B23B49/00—Measuring or gauging equipment on boring machines for positioning or guiding the drill; Devices for indicating failure of drills during boring; Centering devices for holes to be bored
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B23—MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- B23B—TURNING; BORING
- B23B25/00—Accessories or auxiliary equipment for turning-machines
- B23B25/06—Measuring, gauging, or adjusting equipment on turning-machines for setting-on, feeding, controlling, or monitoring the cutting tools or work
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B23—MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- B23D—PLANING; SLOTTING; SHEARING; BROACHING; SAWING; FILING; SCRAPING; LIKE OPERATIONS FOR WORKING METAL BY REMOVING MATERIAL, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- B23D59/00—Accessories specially designed for sawing machines or sawing devices
- B23D59/001—Measuring or control devices, e.g. for automatic control of work feed pressure on band saw blade
- B23D59/002—Measuring or control devices, e.g. for automatic control of work feed pressure on band saw blade for the position of the saw blade
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B23—MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- B23D—PLANING; SLOTTING; SHEARING; BROACHING; SAWING; FILING; SCRAPING; LIKE OPERATIONS FOR WORKING METAL BY REMOVING MATERIAL, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- B23D59/00—Accessories specially designed for sawing machines or sawing devices
- B23D59/001—Measuring or control devices, e.g. for automatic control of work feed pressure on band saw blade
- B23D59/002—Measuring or control devices, e.g. for automatic control of work feed pressure on band saw blade for the position of the saw blade
- B23D59/003—Indicating the cutting plane on the workpiece, e.g. by projecting a laser beam
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B23—MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- B23D—PLANING; SLOTTING; SHEARING; BROACHING; SAWING; FILING; SCRAPING; LIKE OPERATIONS FOR WORKING METAL BY REMOVING MATERIAL, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- B23D59/00—Accessories specially designed for sawing machines or sawing devices
- B23D59/008—Accessories specially designed for sawing machines or sawing devices comprising computers
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B23—MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- B23Q—DETAILS, COMPONENTS, OR ACCESSORIES FOR MACHINE TOOLS, e.g. ARRANGEMENTS FOR COPYING OR CONTROLLING; MACHINE TOOLS IN GENERAL CHARACTERISED BY THE CONSTRUCTION OF PARTICULAR DETAILS OR COMPONENTS; COMBINATIONS OR ASSOCIATIONS OF METAL-WORKING MACHINES, NOT DIRECTED TO A PARTICULAR RESULT
- B23Q17/00—Arrangements for observing, indicating or measuring on machine tools
- B23Q17/24—Arrangements for observing, indicating or measuring on machine tools using optics or electromagnetic waves
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B24—GRINDING; POLISHING
- B24B—MACHINES, DEVICES, OR PROCESSES FOR GRINDING OR POLISHING; DRESSING OR CONDITIONING OF ABRADING SURFACES; FEEDING OF GRINDING, POLISHING, OR LAPPING AGENTS
- B24B49/00—Measuring or gauging equipment for controlling the feed movement of the grinding tool or work; Arrangements of indicating or measuring equipment, e.g. for indicating the start of the grinding operation
- B24B49/12—Measuring or gauging equipment for controlling the feed movement of the grinding tool or work; Arrangements of indicating or measuring equipment, e.g. for indicating the start of the grinding operation involving optical means
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B25—HAND TOOLS; PORTABLE POWER-DRIVEN TOOLS; MANIPULATORS
- B25B—TOOLS OR BENCH DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR, FOR FASTENING, CONNECTING, DISENGAGING OR HOLDING
- B25B21/00—Portable power-driven screw or nut setting or loosening tools; Attachments for drilling apparatus serving the same purpose
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B25—HAND TOOLS; PORTABLE POWER-DRIVEN TOOLS; MANIPULATORS
- B25B—TOOLS OR BENCH DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR, FOR FASTENING, CONNECTING, DISENGAGING OR HOLDING
- B25B23/00—Details of, or accessories for, spanners, wrenches, screwdrivers
- B25B23/0064—Means for adjusting screwing depth
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B25—HAND TOOLS; PORTABLE POWER-DRIVEN TOOLS; MANIPULATORS
- B25C—HAND-HELD NAILING OR STAPLING TOOLS; MANUALLY OPERATED PORTABLE STAPLING TOOLS
- B25C7/00—Accessories for nailing or stapling tools, e.g. supports
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B25—HAND TOOLS; PORTABLE POWER-DRIVEN TOOLS; MANIPULATORS
- B25F—COMBINATION OR MULTI-PURPOSE TOOLS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; DETAILS OR COMPONENTS OF PORTABLE POWER-DRIVEN TOOLS NOT PARTICULARLY RELATED TO THE OPERATIONS PERFORMED AND NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- B25F5/00—Details or components of portable power-driven tools not particularly related to the operations performed and not otherwise provided for
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B27—WORKING OR PRESERVING WOOD OR SIMILAR MATERIAL; NAILING OR STAPLING MACHINES IN GENERAL
- B27B—SAWS FOR WOOD OR SIMILAR MATERIAL; COMPONENTS OR ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
- B27B27/00—Guide fences or stops for timber in saw mills or sawing machines; Measuring equipment thereon
- B27B27/02—Guide fences or stops for timber in saw mills or sawing machines; Measuring equipment thereon arranged laterally and parallel with respect to the plane of the saw blade
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B27—WORKING OR PRESERVING WOOD OR SIMILAR MATERIAL; NAILING OR STAPLING MACHINES IN GENERAL
- B27B—SAWS FOR WOOD OR SIMILAR MATERIAL; COMPONENTS OR ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
- B27B27/00—Guide fences or stops for timber in saw mills or sawing machines; Measuring equipment thereon
- B27B27/06—Guide fences or stops for timber in saw mills or sawing machines; Measuring equipment thereon arranged angularly with respect to the plane of the saw blade, e.g. for mitring
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01C—MEASURING DISTANCES, LEVELS OR BEARINGS; SURVEYING; NAVIGATION; GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS; PHOTOGRAMMETRY OR VIDEOGRAMMETRY
- G01C15/00—Surveying instruments or accessories not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C13/00
- G01C15/002—Active optical surveying means
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B23—MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- B23B—TURNING; BORING
- B23B2260/00—Details of constructional elements
- B23B2260/092—Lasers
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y10—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
- Y10T—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
- Y10T83/00—Cutting
- Y10T83/141—With means to monitor and control operation [e.g., self-regulating means]
Definitions
- the present invention generally relates to the field of power tools, and particularly to a power tool control system for use with a variety of power tools, such as table saws, belt sanders, lathes, disc sanders, planers, wood shapers, boring machines, jointers, drill presses, and the like.
- Power tools are used to accomplish a variety of tasks. No matter the task, the production of accurate and precise work is a high priority. Unfortunately, the precision and accuracy of work performed on these power tools is limited by human error and sub-standard equipment. Even when equipment with the latest advances, such as laser guidance technology, is employed it is often the case that the use of such technology is difficult for the equipment operator. The difficulties experienced by an operator may be due to a variety of reasons, such as inadequate instructional aids available from the manufacturer or dealer, overly complex operational requirements, or a poorly designed and organized user interface. Such difficulties have rendered many valuable advances in tool technology unpopular or obsolete due to operator dissatisfaction and frustration.
- the use of advanced technology such as the laser guidance systems often provide user interface technology which is limited in capabilities, lacks a coherent and easily understood organizational structure for the information it gathers and provides to the operator, and makes accessing the information made available by it use difficult due to low quality display mechanisms and user interaction assemblies.
- Many of the difficulties experienced by operator's when employing the user interface devices may primarily be the result of a focus on the technology and not the user.
- the user interface may provide the ability to access numerous features but have a display mechanism that is so cluttered that it becomes burdensome to decipher the relevant information. Many times, to correct for this problem, the user interface is stripped of numerous capabilities and the user is left with insufficient resources to accomplish their tasks.
- the present invention is a power tool control system that enables a user to operate a power tool through a graphical user interface communicatively coupled with a non-contact measurement and alignment device.
- the graphical user interface correlates user engageable selectors with a logically related menu of power tool setting options displayed on a display screen in a high quality and easily readable format.
- the non-contact measurement and alignment device uses one or more lasers to determine power tool settings and establish proper alignment based on user needs.
- a table saw comprising a frame coupled with a table, said table having an aperture.
- a trunion moveably and operatively connected to said frame, said trunion supporting a blade and drive assembly, said blade capable of being operatively extended from said table aperture, said blade being operatively tilted in at least one axis tangent to said table.
- a fence moveably coupled with said table and generally moveable parallel to said blade.
- a non-contact measurement and alignment device operative with said table saw, the non-contact measurement and alignment device for determining at least two of a table saw setting: (i) blade height, (ii) blade angle, and (iii) fence to blade distance.
- a nail gun including a nose casting assembly coupled with a casing housing a nail driving assembly, comprises a stud finder detector assembly coupled with the nose casting assembly, the stud finder detector assembly for detecting the presence of a stud behind a first surface.
- a laser indication assembly including a laser source for emitting a laser beam is communicatively coupled with the stud finder detector assembly, the laser indication assembly for indicating the location of the stud. Wherein the laser beam establishes a visual marker on the first surface indicating the position of the stud.
- the correlation of the position of the user engaged selectors with the on screen display options provides an easy to follow progression of power tool setting options.
- the technology is designed to be accessible within a system that a typical person can access without having to spend time learning about the system and its capabilities. This may provide a significant advantage over prior or current systems where the technology is the focus and the user is a secondary consideration.
- specific examples illustrate the use of the present invention with a table saw, belt sander, lathe, router, nail gun, drills, drill press, and the like.
- the present invention is contemplated for use with devices which require precise and accurate measurements and settings in order to accomplish a specific task and that would benefit from removing human error from the establishment of these measurements and settings.
- the user interface provides logically related menus and folders within the menus which contain various applications and functionality which are easily accessed and displayed in a clear format.
- FIG. 1 is an illustration of a laser apparatus including a computing system in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 2 is an illustration of the laser apparatus showing alternative power supply embodiments
- FIGS. 3 and 4 illustrate the computing system shown in FIG. 1 , including display screens;
- FIG. 5 is an illustration of the computing system showing alternative power supply embodiments
- FIG. 6 is an illustration of the laser apparatus coupled to a leveling assembly in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 7 is an illustration of a laser apparatus coupled to a level assembly and in communication with a remote computing system
- FIG. 8 is an isometric illustration of a table saw system including the laser apparatus shown in FIG. 1 coupled to a fence connected to a table saw emitting three laser beams;
- FIG. 9 is a top plan view of the table saw system of FIG. 8 illustrating the laser apparatus emitting three laser beams for establishing distance measurements in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 10 is a side elevation view of the table saw system of FIG. 8 illustrating the laser apparatus emitting a single laser beam for establishing a distance measurement;
- FIG. 11 is an illustration of the laser apparatus coupled with a combination belt sander and disc sander power tool
- FIG. 12 is an illustration of the laser apparatus coupled with a lathe
- FIG. 13 is an illustration of a laser light indicia and reading assembly coupled with a computing system in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 14 is an illustration of the laser light indicia and reading assembly coupled to a level assembly, the computing system being coupled to the level assembly and in communication with the laser scanning apparatus;
- FIG. 15A, 15B , and 15 C illustrate a known scanning module which may be employed in the laser light indicia and reading assembly in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 16 is a top plan view of a known scanning module employing a dithering assembly
- FIG. 17 is an illustration of a known dithering assembly employing a drive coil and drive magnet to provide mirror oscillation
- FIG. 18 is an illustration of a known dithering assembly employing travel stops to control the range of rotational travel imparted to the mirror;
- FIG. 19 is an illustration of a known dithering assembly employing pads connected to drive and feedback magnets to control the range of rotational travel imparted to the mirror;
- FIG. 20 is an illustration of the laser light indicia and reading assembly coupled with a table saw and establishing a laser light cut line;
- FIG. 21 is an illustration of the laser light indicia and reading assembly coupled with the table saw and establishing a laser light cut line on a work piece;
- FIG. 22 is an illustration of the laser light indicia and reading assembly coupled with a belt sander and establishing a laser beam line;
- FIG. 23 is an illustration of the laser light indicia and reading assembly coupled with the belt sander and establishing a laser beam line on a work piece;
- FIG. 24 is an illustration of the laser light indicia and reading assembly coupled with a wood shaper and establishing a laser beam line;
- FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating functional steps which are accomplished by the laser apparatus and the laser light indicia and reading assembly of the present invention.
- FIG. 26 is an illustration of a laser apparatus connected to a fence on a table saw, whereupon each laser source includes a dithering assembly;
- FIG. 27 is an illustration of multiple laser light indicia and reading assemblies connected to a table saw emitting a laser beam grid produced by laser sources with dithering assemblies;
- FIG. 28 is an illustration of a laser light indicia and reading assembly connected to a drill press establishing multiple laser beam drill points in a horizontal plane;
- FIG. 29 is an illustration of a laser light indicia and reading assembly establishing multiple laser beam drill points in a vertical plane
- FIG. 30 is an isometric illustration of a rotating laser apparatus including a computing system and rotation assembly in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 31 is an illustration of the rotating laser apparatus including a display menu and an angle measurement device
- FIGS. 32 and 33 illustrate the rotation assembly including the angle of measurement device and a lock and release unit operable by the user
- FIG. 34 is an illustration of the rotating laser apparatus in operation
- FIG. 35 is an illustration of the rotating laser apparatus with laser beams produced by laser sources with dithering assemblies
- FIGS. 36 and 37 are illustrations of a computing system of the laser apparatus showing display menus available
- FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating functional steps which are accomplished by the rotating laser apparatus
- FIG. 39 is an illustration of a laser apparatus with a single laser source providing a laser beam which is split to emit separate laser beams from the laser beam source assemblies located within the housing by optical splitters;
- FIG. 40 is an illustration of the laser apparatus coupled with a computing system that provides a single laser beam which is split to emit separate laser beams from the laser beam source assemblies located within the housing by optical splitters;
- FIG. 41 is an illustration of a rotating laser apparatus with a single laser source
- FIG. 42 is an illustration of a rotating laser apparatus with a first and a second laser source
- FIG. 43 is an illustration of the laser apparatus in FIG. 39 , including a plurality of photo multipliers disposed within a housing of the laser apparatus;
- FIG. 44 is an illustration of a laser apparatus including a leveling mechanism in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 45 is an illustration of a plurality of the laser apparatus, shown in FIG. 44 , coupled with one another;
- FIG. 46 is an illustration of the laser apparatus in FIG. 44 , providing leveling readings to a drop ceiling assembly
- FIG. 47 shows an exemplary home screen shown on a display of an exemplary user interface in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 48 shows an exemplary settings screen shown on a display of an exemplary user interface in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 49 shows an exemplary calibration screen shown on a display of an exemplary user interface in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 50 shows an exemplary save screen shown on a display of an exemplary user interface in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 51 shows an additional exemplary save screen shown on a display of an exemplary user interface in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 52 shows a further exemplary save screen shown on a display of an exemplary user interface in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 53 shows a still further exemplary save screen shown on a display of an exemplary user interface in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 54 shows an exemplary scheme according to which a user interface may operate in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 55 shows an exemplary user interface with different screens in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention, which user interface may execute the scheme shown in FIG. 54 ;
- FIG. 56 shows an exemplary calibration screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 57 shows an additional exemplary calibration screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 58 illustrates an exemplary home screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 59 illustrates various exemplary screens in a distance mode in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 60 illustrates various exemplary screens in an angle mode in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 61 illustrates various exemplary screens in a height mode in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 62 illustrates various exemplary screens in a settings mode in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 63 shows an exemplary distance screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 64 shows an exemplary distance fine adjustment screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 65 shows an exemplary distance relative zero screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 66 shows an exemplary default distance units screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 67 shows an exemplary distance decimal unit screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 68 shows an exemplary distance offset screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 69 shows an exemplary distance recall screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 70 shows an additional exemplary distance recall screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 71 shows a further exemplary distance recall screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 72 shows a still further exemplary distance recall screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 73 shows an exemplary distance save screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 74 shows an additional exemplary distance save screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 75 shows an exemplary angle screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 76 shows an exemplary angle fine adjustment screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 77 shows an exemplary angle zero screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 78 shows an exemplary angle relative zero screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 79 shows an exemplary angle recall screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 80 shows an additional exemplary angle recall screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 81 shows a further exemplary angle recall screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 82 shows an exemplary angle save screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 83 shows an additional exemplary angle save screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 84 shows an exemplary height screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 85 shows an exemplary height fine adjustment screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 86 shows an exemplary height absolute zero screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 87 shows an exemplary default height units screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 88 shows an exemplary height decimal unit screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 89 shows an exemplary height offset screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 90 shows an exemplary height recall screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 91 shows an additional exemplary height recall screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 92 shows a further exemplary height recall screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 93 shows an exemplary height save screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 94 shows an additional exemplary height save screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 95 shows an exemplary settings screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 96 shows an exemplary default global units screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 97 shows an exemplary global metric units screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 98 shows an exemplary system screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 99 shows an exemplary sound screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 100 shows an exemplary brightness screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 101 shows an exemplary laser time out screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 102 is an illustration of a nail gun including a stud finder laser indicator assembly in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 103 is an isometric view of the stud finder laser indicator assembly
- FIG. 104 is a perspective view of a second exemplary embodiment of a stud finder laser indicator assembly removed from a nail gun and being used by an operator to locate and identify the position of a stud behind a surface;
- FIG. 105 is an illustration of a nail gun including a laser indication assembly for establishing a visual marker on a surface in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 106 is an illustration of a stud finder detector assembly comprising an indicator coupled with a nail gun, the indicator for providing a visual identification to a user when a stud has been detected;
- FIG. 107 is an illustration of the coupling assembly used for coupling the stud finder detector assembly with a nose casing assembly of a nail gun;
- FIG. 108 is an illustration of the stud finder detector assembly including a battery cavity with a cover for receiving a battery;
- FIG. 109 is an illustration of a stud finder detector assembly including an adapter for receiving an AC power supply through and a port for coupling with a peripheral device;
- FIG. 110 is an isometric view of the stud finder detector assembly detecting a stud and identifying the detection of the stud through an indicator;
- FIG. 111 is an illustration of the coupling assembly used for coupling the laser indication assembly with a nose casing assembly of a nail gun;
- FIG. 112 is an illustration of the laser indication assembly including a battery cavity with a cover for receiving a battery;
- FIG. 113 is an illustration of a laser indication assembly including an adapter for receiving an AC power supply and a port for coupling with a peripheral device;
- FIG. 114 is an illustration of a laser indication assembly including a laser source providing a visual indicator on a surface;
- FIG. 115 is an illustration of a second exemplary embodiment of a stud finder detector assembly and a laser indication assembly including a coupling assembly allowing the two assemblies to physically and communicatively couple to form a stud finder laser indicator assembly;
- FIG. 116 is an illustration of a nail gun employing the stud finder laser indicator assembly of FIG. 115 and establishing a cross-hairs visual marker on a surface indicating the location of a stud behind the surface;
- FIG. 117 is an illustration of a nail gun employing the stud finder laser indicator assembly of FIG. 115 and establishing a pair of dashed line visual markers on a surface indicating the location and approximate width of a stud behind the surface;
- FIG. 118 is an illustration of a nail gun employing the stud finder laser indicator assembly of FIG. 115 and establishing a pair of line-dash-line visual markers on a surface indicating the location and approximate width of a stud behind the surface;
- FIG. 119 is an illustration of a nail gun employing the stud finder laser indicator assembly of FIG. 115 and establishing a pair of continuous line visual markers on a surface indicating the location and approximate width of a stud behind the surface;
- FIG. 120 is an illustration of a nail gun employing the stud finder laser indicator assembly of FIG. 115 and establishing a pair of light pointer visual markers on a surface indicating the location and approximate width of a stud behind the surface and a cross-hairs visual marker for establishing the approximate center of the stud;
- FIG. 121 is an illustration of a nail gun employing the stud finder laser indicator assembly of FIG. 115 and establishing a pair of light pointer visual markers on a surface indicating the location and approximate width of a stud behind the surface and a dashed line visual marker for establishing the approximate center of the stud;
- FIG. 122 is an illustration of a nail gun employing the stud finder laser indicator assembly of FIG. 115 and establishing a pair of dashed line visual markers on a surface indicating the location and approximate width of a stud behind the surface and a line-dash-line visual marker for establishing the approximate center of the stud;
- FIG. 123 is an illustration of a stud finder laser indicator assembly pivotally coupled with the nose casting assembly of a nail gun wherein a visual marker is established on a surface indicating the location of a stud behind the surface and is enabled to maintain the visual marker on the identified location even when the nail gun is moved out of position relative to the position of the stud;
- FIG. 124 is an illustration of a second embodiment of a stud finder laser indicator assembly pivotally coupled with the nose casting assembly of a nail gun wherein a visual marker is established on a surface indicating the location of a stud behind the surface and is enabled to maintain the visual marker on the identified location even when the nail gun is moved out of position relative to the position of the stud;
- FIG. 125 is an illustration of a horseshoe stud finder laser indicator assembly coupled with a nose casting assembly of a nail gun in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 126 is an isometric view of the horseshoe stud finder laser indicator assembly showing a stud sensor assembly and a plurality of lens disposed on a housing of the horseshoe stud finder laser indicator assembly;
- FIG. 127 is an illustration of a third exemplary embodiment of the stud finder laser indicator assembly coupled with a nose casting assembly of a nail gun establishing a pair of light pointer visual markers indicating the location and the approximate width of a stud and a dashed line visual marker indicating the approximate center of the stud;
- FIG. 128 is an isometric view illustrating a tracker assembly coupled with a nail gun, the tracker assembly comprising a user interface assembly including a stud finder laser indicator assembly in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 129 is an expanded view illustrating the tracker assembly including the user interface assembly and the stud finder laser indicator assembly, coupled with the nail gun;
- FIG. 130 is a perspective view illustrating a display screen, a first, second, third, and fourth selector, of the user interface assembly, the display screen presenting various visual marker configuration options for selection by the user;
- FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the display screen of the user interface assembly providing visual feedback to the user of the position of the nail gun relative to the position of a stud behind a surface and indicating that the nail gun is not centered on the stud;
- FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the display screen of the user interface assembly providing visual feedback to the user of the position of the nail gun relative to the position of a stud behind a surface and indicating that the nail gun is positioned at the center of the stud;
- FIG. 133 is an illustration of the nail gun coupled with the tracker assembly of the present invention detecting the location of a stud behind a surface and detecting the location of piping and electrical wiring to be avoided by the user of the nail gun when driving a nail;
- FIG. 134 is an illustration of the nail gun of FIG. 133 establishing a visual marker on the surface indicating the location of the stud behind the surface and avoiding the piping and electrical wiring located in close proximity to the stud;
- FIG. 135 is an illustration of the nail gun of FIG. 133 wherein the user interface is indicating to the user that piping and electrical wiring have been detected and that the user should not drive a nail in this location;
- FIG. 136 is a second exemplary embodiment of a tracker assembly coupled with a nail gun, the tracker assembly comprising a user interface communicatively coupled with a stud finder laser indication assembly through use of a cable;
- FIG. 137 is an expanded view of the second exemplary embodiment of the tracker assembly coupled with the nail gun, wherein a display screen of the user interface is displaying stud size and composition options for selection by the user of the nail gun;
- FIG. 138 is a third exemplary embodiment of a tracker assembly coupled with a nail gun wherein a user interface includes a laser indication assembly and the user interface is communicatively coupled with a stud finder detector assembly through use of a cable;
- FIG. 139 is an illustration of a drill coupled with a stud finder laser indicator assembly in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 140 is an illustration of a drywall gun, including a clutched motor, coupled with a second exemplary embodiment of a stud finder laser indicator assembly in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.
- the laser apparatus 100 comprises a housing 102 coupled with a computing system 104 . Further, the housing 102 is disposed with a first laser source 106 , a second laser source 108 , and a third laser source 110 . Alternatively, the housing 102 may include a greater or fewer number of laser beam sources in order to meet the needs of a manufacturer or consumer. Each of the three laser sources 106 through 110 is in communication with the computing system 104 . In the current embodiment the communicative link is a wireless system, however, alternate systems, such as serial cable, infrared, or the like may be employed.
- the laser sources 106 through 110 are enabled to emit infrared laser beams. These laser beams are invisible to the human eye, however, light emitting diodes may be linked to the laser beam in order to provide a visual indicator of the travel of the laser beam. In an alternate embodiment the laser sources may be enabled to emit various types of laser beams, such as an ultraviolet laser beam, or the like without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention.
- first mounting member 112 and a second mounting member 114 are coupled with the housing 102 .
- the number, location, and configuration of the mounting members may vary as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art.
- the mounting members are suitable for connecting the housing 102 to another device such as a power tool.
- the power tool may be a table saw, a belt sander, a planer, a disc sander, a lathe, a drill press, and the like.
- the laser apparatus 100 is shown being suitable for mounting on a fence 116 which would normally be coupled with a table saw.
- the mounting members 112 and 114 include a first latch 124 and a second latch 126 which slide through and latch the housing 102 to a mounting assembly, power tool, or other devices.
- the first and second latches 124 and 126 are compression latches.
- the current latch system may be a variety of latching mechanisms without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention.
- the latches 124 and 126 are operably coupled with a first release mechanism 120 and a second release mechanism 122 , respectively.
- the first and second release mechanisms 120 and 122 are depression buttons, operable by a user by pressing down on the buttons.
- other release mechanisms such as switches, rotation knobs, or the like, may be employed without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention.
- By depressing the buttons 120 and 122 the latches 124 and 126 are retracted into the mounting member upon which they are disposed. This allows the user to engage and remove the housing 102 , of the laser apparatus 100 , from the mounting assembly, power tool, or other device the user is currently operating.
- the location and number of release mechanisms may vary as determined by the number of mounting members and latches disposed on the laser apparatus 100 .
- the housing further provides the user a first grip 128 and a second grip 130 proximally located next to the buttons 120 and 122 .
- the two grips 128 and 130 are ergonomically shaped to provide the user a secure location with which to grip the housing 102 for depressing the first and second buttons 120 and 122 and releasing the compression latches 124 and 126 .
- the two grips may also be used in transporting the laser apparatus 100 .
- the laser apparatus 100 may include a laser source which emits an incident laser beam from either a first end 116 or a second end 118 of the housing 102 .
- a laser source which emits an incident laser beam from either a first end 116 or a second end 118 of the housing 102 .
- Such a configuration may be desirable in situations where a user needs only one laser beam to produce a finished work product, such as when working on a lathe machine as shown in FIG. 10 .
- the three laser beam sources 106 , 108 , and 110 may comprise modular laser source units.
- the modular laser source units may be capable of being removed from and inserted into the housing 102 .
- the modular laser source units may be locked in position, once inserted into the housing 102 , by use of a variety of system, such as a latch system, compression system, or the like.
- the modular laser source units may include a dithering assembly enabling the laser source to provide dithering functionality. For further discussion on dithering assemblies see FIGS. 21 through 24 below.
- the laser apparatus 100 may be comprised of a single laser source.
- the single laser source may emit an incident laser beam through the housing 102 .
- the single laser source may be attached at either the first end 116 or the second end 118 of the housing 102 .
- the single laser source may be included in the computing system 104 .
- optical splitters, optical reflectors, and photomultipliers may be employed in order to facilitate the functional capabilities of the laser apparatus 100 .
- FIGS. 36 through 40 A detailed discussion of the single laser source design, including the use of optical splitters, optical reflectors, and photomultipliers, is provided in FIGS. 36 through 40 .
- the computing system 104 controls the functioning of each of the three laser sources 106 through 110 .
- a user interacts with the computing system 104 and directs the emitting of a laser beam from each of the three laser sources. Additionally, the computing system 104 monitors the laser beams and provides a display to the user of relevant information.
- the information provided on the display may include distance measurements, blade height measurements, blade angle, and the like.
- the laser beams may provide information regarding the truing of the machine and a work piece, and the indexing of the work piece.
- the user may ensure that the angle of the sander matches the desired specifications using the laser apparatus.
- a work piece to be presented to the sander may be verified by the laser apparatus to be in the correct position for presentation to the sander.
- the laser apparatus may also provide an indexing functionality by determining the leading edge of the work piece and monitoring the distance traveled by the work piece. It is contemplated that other information relevant to a variety of power tools may also be provided by the computing system to the user.
- the housing 102 includes a first receptor port 202 suitable for receiving a portable power source 204 .
- the portable power source 204 provides power for the operation of the laser sources disposed within the housing 102 .
- the first receptor port 202 further includes a removable hatch 206 which fastens in place over the opening of the first receptor port 202 .
- the portable power source 204 may be a variety of devices, such as a rechargeable battery or the like, without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention.
- FIG. 2 Also shown in FIG. 2 is an alternate configuration of the housing 102 where power may be received via a power cord 208 which engages a second receptor port 210 . It is understood that typically only one of the above mentioned power source configurations will be employed on the laser apparatus 100 and that FIG. 2 is only an exemplary embodiment of two possible configurations. Further, the location and configuration of the first and second receptor ports 202 and 210 may be varied as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art.
- a communication port 212 is included in the housing 102 of the laser apparatus 100 .
- the communication port 212 provides a communicative link to the computing system 104 , allowing the computing system to communicate with the laser sources 106 through 110 disposed within the housing 102 .
- the location and configuration of the communication port 212 may vary as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention.
- a first coupling port 214 and a second coupling port 216 are included on the housing 102 for coupling with the computing system 104 as will be further described in FIG. 6 .
- FIGS. 3 and 4 show exemplary displays on the computing system 104 .
- the computing system 104 includes a first selector 302 , a second selector 304 , and a third selector 306 .
- the first selector 302 and the third selector 306 allow a user to scroll through choices presented on a display screen 308 of the computing system 104 .
- the second button 304 allows a user to select the desired application choice presented on the display screen 308 .
- a user may choose to turn on or turn off the lasers by using the first and third buttons 302 and 306 to select the desired function and then pressing the second button 304 to execute the function.
- FIG. 3 a user may choose to turn on or turn off the lasers by using the first and third buttons 302 and 306 to select the desired function and then pressing the second button 304 to execute the function.
- the display screen 308 is providing a user with the readouts determined during the process of truing the machine. The user may accept these dimensions by selecting the “cont.” function or reject these dimensions by selecting the “reset” function. It is understood that the displays presented on the display screen 308 are exemplary and may not be read as exclusive. A variety of displays and interactive functionalities may be presented on display screen 308 without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention.
- the display screen may be a liquid crystal display, back lit monitor, or the like, while the selector features may include rollers, ball knobs, or the like.
- buttons 310 and a second button 312 are coupled on one end of the computing system 104 .
- these buttons are depression buttons, however, other systems as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art may be employed.
- the two buttons are used in the coupling and uncoupling of the computing system 104 with the housing 102 of the laser apparatus 100 , as will be described in FIGS. 5 and 6 .
- the computing system 104 includes a first receptor port 502 suitable for receiving a portable power source 504 .
- the portable power source 504 provides power for the operation of the computing system 104 that may be coupled to the housing 102 and is in communication with the laser sources.
- the first receptor port 502 further includes a removable hatch 506 which fastens in place over the opening of the first receptor port 502 .
- the portable power source 504 may be a variety of devices, such as a rechargeable battery or the like, without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention.
- the computing system 104 may receive power from a power cord 508 which engages a second receptor port 510 .
- the location and configuration of the first and second receptor ports 502 and 510 may be varied as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art.
- the computing system 104 includes a first mounting member 512 and a second mounting member 514 . These two mounting members couple with the housing 102 of the laser apparatus 104 . It is contemplated that a latch and release mechanism is disposed within one of the two mounting members and operably connects with the two buttons 310 and 312 . Further, the computing system 104 includes a communication adapter 516 that engages with the communication port 212 , shown in FIG. 2 , disposed on the housing 102 .
- the laser apparatus 100 is shown with computing system 104 in vertical orientation over the communication port 212 and the first and second coupling ports 214 and 216 .
- the first and second mounting members 512 and 514 disposed on the computing system 104 , are positioned to engage with the first and second coupling ports 214 and 216 , respectively.
- the communication adapter 516 is positioned to engage with the communication port 212 .
- a user must supply sufficient force to couple the computing system 104 with the housing 102 .
- the first and second buttons 310 and 312 are operably engaged as part of a latch and release mechanism which locks the computing system 104 in place.
- a latch or latches may be located on the mounting members 512 and/or 514 , and as the computing system 104 is pressed into place they may engage with the inside of the coupling ports 214 and/or 216 .
- the user will depress one or both of the first and second buttons 310 and 312 , which will release the latches from the coupling ports allowing the computing system 104 to release from the housing 102 .
- Other systems may be employed to affix the computing system 104 to the housing 102 without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention.
- the laser apparatus 100 is shown engaging a mounting assembly 602 .
- the mounting assembly 602 includes a leveling device 604 .
- the mounting assembly includes a first mounting port 606 , a second mounting port 608 , and a third mounting port 610 .
- the mounting assembly 602 is mounted to a power tool or other desired device by using the mounting ports. It is contemplated that the mounting ports may be a variety of configurations as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art.
- a user may establish that the mounting assembly 602 is in a level position by checking the leveling device 604 . In this way the user may ensure that the laser apparatus 100 is level once it is connected to the mounting assembly 602 .
- the mounting assembly 602 further includes a first coupling port 612 and a second coupling port 614 which engage the mounting members 112 and 114 of the laser apparatus 100 .
- the laser apparatus 700 includes a housing member 702 in communication with a remote computing system 703 .
- the housing member 702 is disposed with a first laser source 726 , a second laser source 728 , and a third laser source 730 .
- a mounting assembly 704 capable of connecting with the housing member 702 and providing a communication link between the housing member 702 and the remote computing system 703 , is included.
- the housing member 702 is similar to that shown and described in FIGS. 1, 2 , and 6 , except that the housing member 702 further includes a communication adapter 708 and does not include the communication port shown in FIGS. 2 and 6 .
- the communicative adapter 708 communicatively couples with the remote computing system 703 by engaging the communication adapter 708 in the communicative coupling point 706 .
- This communicative linking allows a user of the laser apparatus 700 to control the laser sources 726 through 730 through the use of the remote computing system 703 .
- the housing member includes a first mounting member 732 and a second mounting member 734 .
- the first mounting member 732 is disposed with a compression latch 736 and is operably engaged with a first depression button 740 .
- the second mounting member 734 is disposed with a compression latch 738 and is operably engaged with a second depression button 742 .
- the first mounting member 732 couples with a first coupling port 744 disposed on the mounting assembly 704
- the second mounting member 734 couples with a second coupling port 746 disposed on the mounting assembly 704 .
- the first and second depression buttons allow the user to remove the housing member 702 from the mounting assembly 704 .
- the remote computing system 703 is similar to that shown and described in FIGS. 1 , and 3 through 6 except that it couples with a remote mounting member 710 .
- the remote mounting member 710 preferably, mounts to a stationary surface, such as a wall, and provides a first communication port 712 for coupling with a communication adapter 722 disposed on the remote computing system 703 .
- the remote mounting member 710 includes a first coupling port 714 and a second coupling port 716 for coupling with a first mounting member 718 and second mounting members 720 of the remote computing system 703 .
- the remote mounting member 710 includes a second communication port 724 which couples with a communication adapter 707 connected to the mounting assembly 704 .
- the mounting assembly 704 is similar to the mounting assembly shown in FIG. 6 , except that the mounting assembly 704 further includes a communicative coupling port 706 and a communication adapter 707 .
- the communication adapter 708 disposed on the housing member 702 , engages with the communication port 706 providing a communicative link.
- the communicative link from the housing member 702 to the remote computing system 703 is completed through the coupling of the communication adapter 707 with the second communication port 724 of the remote mounting member 710 .
- the mounting assembly 704 includes a first mounting port 748 , a second mounting port 750 , and a third mounting port 752 . These mounting ports allow the mounting assembly 704 to be coupled to a variety of devices such as power tools and the like.
- the laser apparatus 100 provides three laser beams.
- the laser beams may be used to establish three distance measurements indicated by d 1 , d 2 , and d 3 . These measurements are displayed to the user on the computing system 104 .
- the laser beams in communication with the computing system 104 may display a variety of information, such as circular saw blade height, circular saw blade angle, or the like.
- the table saw 802 further includes a circular saw blade 806 , a first adjustment mechanism 808 , and a second adjustment mechanism 810 .
- the first adjustment mechanism 808 enables a user of the table saw 802 to adjust the angle of the circular saw blade 806 relative to the operational field of the table saw 802 .
- the operational field may be defined as that area of the table saw 802 upon which a work piece may be placed and the circular saw blade 806 may perform a cut upon the work piece. In other embodiments where the laser apparatus 100 is mounted or connected to another power tool or device the operational field may include the area where the work piece is placed and a function is performed upon the work piece.
- the second adjustment mechanism 810 enables a user to adjust the height which the circular saw blade 806 extends above the surface of the operation field of the table saw 802 .
- the laser apparatus 100 coupled to a table saw 802 is shown.
- the laser apparatus 100 includes the housing 102 coupled with the computing system 104 .
- the housing 102 is mounted to a fence 804 connected to the table saw 802 .
- the single laser source 110 is shown, the laser source 110 is being used to measure the distance d 1 from the fence 804 to a circular saw blade 806 .
- the housing 102 includes the first laser source 106 , the second laser source 108 , and the third laser source 110 each emitting a laser beam across the operational field of the table saw 802 , from the fence 804 to the circular saw blade 806 .
- the laser apparatus 100 is shown coupled to a sander system 1100 and a lathe system 1200 .
- the sander system 1100 includes a belt sander 1102 with an operational field 1106 and a disc sander 1104 with an operational field 1108 .
- two of the laser apparatus 100 systems are employed. One is mounted upon the belt sander 1102 and the other is mounted upon the disc sander 1104 .
- the laser apparatus 100 may provide information on the angle of the sander relative to the operational field and the height the sander extends above the operational field.
- the laser apparatus 100 is coupled to the lathe 1202 and employs a single laser source configuration.
- the laser source emits a single laser beam which travels down one side of the operational field of the lathe 1202 .
- the laser source may monitor the size of the work piece coupled with the lathe and indicate to the user when the desired work piece size has been reached.
- the location and configuration of the laser apparatus 100 may vary as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art.
- the laser light indicia and reading assembly 1300 comprises a housing 1302 which includes a laser source 1304 in communication with a computing system 1306 .
- the housing 1302 is coupled with a mounting member 1308 .
- a communication adapter 1310 communicatively couples the computing system 1306 with the laser source 1304 disposed within the housing 1302 through a cable 1311 .
- the type of cable employed in the present embodiment is a standard serial cable. However, it is contemplated that a variety of connection mechanisms may be employed, such as wireless, infrared, or the like.
- the computing system 1306 is similar to the computing system 104 in that it provides a display screen 1312 , a first selector 1314 , a second selector 1316 , and a third selector 1318 . Additionally, the computing system 1306 may further include a keypad 1320 , as shown in the current embodiment. The keypad 1320 may enable increased functionality of the computing system, such as increased control over the laser source.
- the laser light indicia and reading assembly 1400 comprises a housing 1402 which includes a laser source 1404 , a computing system 1406 , and a mounting assembly 1408 .
- the housing 1402 is coupled with a mounting member 1412 for coupling with the mounting assembly 1408 .
- the mounting assembly 1408 further includes a communication adapter 1410 which couples with the laser source 1404 through the housing 1402 .
- the communication adapter 1410 is coupled with a cable 1411 which connects to the mounting assembly 1408 . It is understood that the configuration of the communication adapter 1410 and type of cable 1411 employed may vary as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art. Through the serial cable 1411 the communication adapter 1410 is further communicatively coupled with the communication port 1414 .
- the communication port 1414 is designed to couple with the computing system 1406 when it is mounted to the mounting assembly 1408 . Further, a first coupling port 1416 and a second coupling port 1418 are disposed on the mounting assembly 1408 and further engage with the computing system 1406 when the computing system 1406 is mounted to the mounting assembly 1408 .
- the computing system 1406 is similar to the computing system 104 shown and described previously, except that the computing system 1406 includes an indicator 1420 .
- the indicator 1420 is a light emitting diode (LED) which provides indication to the user of the system 1400 when the computing system 1406 is properly mounted and engaged with the mounting assembly 1408 . It is contemplated that the computing system 1406 may not include indicator 1406 . However, a variety of configurations may be employed for indicator 1420 without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention.
- a leveling device 1422 is disposed within mounting assembly 1408 . As shown and described previously in FIGS. 6 and 7 the leveling assembly ensures that the laser light indicia and reading assembly 1400 is level with the device to which it is connected.
- a first mounting port 1426 and a second mounting port 1428 are employed to connect the mounting assembly 1408 with the desired device. In the present embodiment the mounting ports allow for screws to be inserted and fastened to the device and the mounting assembly 1408 . However, it is contemplated that a variety of fastening devices and configurations may be employed.
- the mounting assembly 1408 further comprises a laser source coupling port 1424 .
- the laser source coupling port 1424 is designed to receive the mounting member 1412 which is coupled to the housing 1402 disposed with the laser source 1404 .
- the mounting member 1412 includes a release mechanism comprised of a button 1430 disposed on the housing 1402 , and a latch 1432 .
- the button 1430 is a depression button, operably engaged with the latch 1432 , which the user may depress in order to activate the latch 1432 .
- the latch 1432 is a compression latch which retracts back into the mounting member 1412 when the button 1430 is depressed.
- the latch 1432 is extended away from the mounting member 1412 and engages the inner surface of the laser source coupling point 1424 to affix the housing 1402 to the mounting assembly 1408 .
- the laser source for both FIGS. 13 and 14 is enabled as a standard single laser beam producing laser source.
- the laser source in both FIGS. 13 and 14 may be enabled as a scanning module.
- a known scanning module 1500 is shown in FIG. 15A, 15B , and 15 C.
- the scanning module 1500 comprises a laser source 1502 with a spherical lens 1504 disposed in a housing 1503 .
- the housing 1503 includes an aperture 1505 through which a laser beam, emitted from the laser source 1502 through the spherical lens 1504 , passes.
- the laser beam travels through a cylindrical lens 1506 and strikes a multifaceted polygon deflector 1510 .
- the multifaceted polygon deflector 1510 deflects the incident laser beam emitted by the laser source through the cylindrical lens 1508 and out to a surface 1512 .
- the surface 1512 is a nominal plane and the incident laser beam is provided a first focus 1514 .
- the scanning module 1500 moves the focused laser beam along the surface 1512 .
- the scanning module may further include two light emitting diode assemblies 1516 and 1518 . These assemblies emit a visible light that tracks the position of the laser beam providing an indicator for a user of the scanning module.
- the laser beam from the scanning module 1500 may appear as a continuous line defined by the angle of incidence with which the laser beam strikes the multifaceted polygon deflector 1510 .
- the light emitting diodes would provide the visual indication of the defined area to the user.
- the scanning module 1500 receives the reflected laser beams through the cylindrical lens 1508 .
- the reflected laser beams may travel directly to the photodetector 1520 or the laser beams may travel to the multifaceted polygon deflector.
- the laser beams which strike the multifaceted polygon deflector are deflected to a collecting mirror 1522 where they are reflected to the photodetector 1520 . In this manner the scanning module 1500 is enabled to read a surface it is scanning.
- the laser source(s) employed in the laser light indicia and reading assembly and the laser apparatus may include a dithering assembly.
- a typical dithering assembly 1600 known in the art, is shown in FIG. 16 .
- the dithering assembly 1600 includes a laser source 1602 and a mirror 1604 disposed within a housing 1606 and may be employed to establish a laser beam which presents as a continuous line upon a surface. Further, it is known that dithering assemblies may comprise a pair of magnets and a pair of magnetic coils. As shown in FIG. 17 a mirror 1702 is coupled to a base 1704 which is connected to a flexible support arm 1706 that is connected to a support member 1708 .
- a drive coil 1710 is positioned on one side of the flexible support arm 1706 and a feedback coil 1712 is positioned on the opposite side of the flexible support arm 1706 .
- a drive magnet 1714 is connected to the base 1704 and proximally located to the drive coil 1710 while a feedback magnet 1716 is connected to the base 1704 and proximally located to the feedback coil 1712 .
- a drive current (e.g., an oscillating drive current) is run through the drive coil 1710 and causes the mirror 1702 to rotate.
- the rotation imparted to the mirror 1702 causes a change in the angle of incidence of the laser beam striking the mirror, and thus imparts a change in the angle of reflection imparted to the incident laser beam.
- the reflected laser beam appears as a continuous line defined by the rotational range of the mirror 1702 .
- FIG. 18 shows one such assembly where a mirror 1802 is connected to a base 1804 , which is connected to a flexible support arm 1806 that is connected to a support member 1808 coupled to a surface 1810 .
- a drive coil 1812 is coupled to the support member 1808 in proximal relation to a drive magnet 1814 which is coupled with the base 1804 .
- a first travel stop 1816 and a second travel stop 1818 are disposed in a desired location relative to the mirror 1802 to provide a limited range of rotation by the mirror 1802 .
- Alternative methods for controlling the range of rotation of the mirror in a dithering assembly may include the use of pads, as shown in FIG. 19 .
- the mirror 1902 is connected to a base 1904 , which is connected to a flexible support arm 1906 that is connected to a support member 1908 coupled to a surface 1910 .
- a drive coil 1912 is coupled to the support member 1908 in proximal relation to a drive magnet 1914 which is connected to the base 1904 .
- a feedback coil 1916 is coupled to the support member 1908 in proximal relation to a feedback magnet 1918 , which is connected to the base 1904 .
- a first pad 1920 is coupled with the drive magnet 1914
- a second pad 1922 is coupled with the feedback magnet 1918 .
- a feedback sensor such as a Hall sensor, may be employed to monitor electrical potential in a dithering assembly and trigger a switching of the polarity of the drive current in the drive coil at the appropriate time in relation to the position of the mirror. This switching of polarities reverses the drive force being exerted on the drive magnet and the mirror.
- a table saw system 2000 including a laser light indicia and reading assembly 2002 is shown.
- the laser light indicia and reading assembly 2002 is similar to the laser light indicia and reading assembly 1300 and 1400 shown in FIGS. 13 and 14 , and includes a computing system 2003 similar to that shown in FIGS. 13 and 14 .
- the table saw system 200 further includes a table 2004 , a fence 2006 , and a circular saw blade 2008 .
- a first adjustment mechanism 2010 and a second adjustment mechanism 2012 are included in the table saw system 200 and operably engage with the circular saw blade 2008 to adjust blade angle and blade height relative to the operational field of the table saw system 2000 , as described previously in FIG. 8 .
- the laser light indicia and reading assembly 2002 establishes a continuous laser beam line 2014 .
- the laser beam line 2014 is laid down across the operational field of the table saw system 2000 and provides a cut line for a user of the system. It is contemplated that the laser light indicia and reading assembly 2002 will establish a laser beam line that tracks the position of the circular saw blade 2008 . For example, if the user adjusts the angle of the circular saw blade 2008 relative to the operational field of the table saw system 2000 , the laser light indicia and reading assembly 2002 will monitor that change and establish a laser beam line that tracks the position of the circular saw blade 2008 .
- the laser beam line 2014 may be established using optically activated indicators that are integrated with the table 2004 in positions proximal to the circular saw blade 2008 .
- the table 2004 may be integrated with sensors which respond by illuminating upon being struck by light from the laser light indicia and reading assembly 2002 .
- optically activated cables may be integrated into the table saw to provide a laser line. Regardless of the type of optically activated indicators, their positioning relative to the circular saw blade 2008 and the lines of cut that may be established through use of the adjustment mechanisms provides a user an easily ascertained path to guide the cutting of the work piece by.
- the table saw system 2100 comprises a laser light indicia and reading assembly 2102 , a table 2104 , a fence 2106 , and a circular saw blade 2108 .
- the laser light indicia and reading assembly 2102 is coupled to a computing system 2103 , similar to that previously described in FIGS. 13 and 14 .
- a work piece 2112 is located within the operation field of the table saw system 2100 and is being guided by the fence 2106 and an angular adjustment mechanism 2110 .
- the angular adjustment mechanism 2110 may position the work piece 2112 in a desired angular setting and then guide the work piece 2112 through the circular saw blade 2108 at the set angle.
- the laser light indicia and reading assembly establishes a laser beam light line 2114 across the work piece 2112 . This laser beam light line 2114 may be used by the user as the cut line and followed throughout the cut.
- the laser light indicia and reading assemblies 2002 and 2102 of FIGS. 20 and 21 may include an indexing and truing functionality.
- An example of the truing of a work piece may include a user attempting to make a forty five degree angled cut on the work piece. The user may enter this information into the computing system in communication with the laser light indicia and reading assembly and when the work piece is set into the operational field of the table saw system, the laser light indicia and reading assembly may emit a laser beam which identifies the angle that the work piece is set at in relation to the circular saw blade.
- An example of the indexing of a work piece may include a user attempting to make a notch cut into a work piece that does not run the length or width of the work piece.
- the laser light indicia and reading assembly may emit a laser beam which determines the position of the leading edge of the work piece.
- the laser beam enables the laser light indicia and reading assembly to monitor the rate of travel imparted to the work piece and the overall distance of travel across the circular saw by the work piece. In this manner the laser light indicia and reading assembly may communicate to the computing system when the desired length of cut has been accomplished, and have that information passed on the user.
- the laser light indicia and reading assembly may be provided with an indicator to communicate to the user that the desired specifications have been accomplished.
- a red light emitting diode may be coupled to the housing of the laser light indicia and reading assembly for indicating to the user that the desired function has not been accomplished.
- a green light emitting diode, coupled to the housing of the laser light indicia and reading assembly, may indicate to the user that the desired function has been accomplished and it is time to proceed or remove the work piece from the field of operation.
- Other indication systems as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art may be employed without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention.
- the edge sander system 2200 includes a laser light indicia and reading assembly 2202 , a work table 2204 , belt sand paper 2206 , and an adjustment mechanism 2208 .
- a computing system 2203 is coupled to the laser light indicia and reading assembly 2202 .
- the laser light indicia and reading assembly 2202 and the computing system 2203 are similar to those shown in FIGS. 13 and 14 .
- the laser light indicia and reading assembly 2202 may be enabled for truing and indexing of the edge sander and a work piece (such as work piece 2302 shown in FIG. 23 ) as previously described in FIGS. 20 and 21 .
- a user of the edge sander system 2200 may be attempting to sand off a one-quarter inch segment from a work piece.
- one end of the work piece may be receiving greater pressure than the other resulting in an uneven depth of sanding.
- the laser light indicia and reading assembly 2200 may indicate to a user that uneven pressure is being applied and identify the end where this is occurring and the corrections that need to be made to true the work piece.
- the wood shaper system 2400 includes a laser light indicia and reading assembly 2402 , a work table 2404 , a bit 2406 , an on/off mechanism 2408 , and an adjustment mechanism 2410 .
- a computing system 2403 is coupled to the laser light indicia and reading assembly 2402 .
- the laser light indicia and reading assembly 2402 may be enabled to determine the angle of presentation and the size of the bit 2406 .
- the laser light indicia and reading assembly 2402 may be enabled for truing and indexing of the wood shaper system and a work piece being operated upon by the wood shaper system as described previously.
- the first step 2510 involves the setting of the machine. This involves mounting the laser apparatus to the power tool being utilized. As discussed previously, the laser apparatus may be directly mounted to a power tool or mounted to a separate mounting assembly which is connected to the power tool. Once the laser apparatus has been properly set then in step 2520 the laser apparatus must be trued in order to provide accurate results. This may be accomplished by checking the leveling mechanism as described previously, if such a mounting assembly is being employed or using the laser beams to determine the correct alignment. If the laser apparatus determines that the mounting is untrue it notifies the user.
- step 2530 the work piece is set. Once the laser apparatus determines that the work piece has been set then in step 2540 it determines if the setting of the work piece is true. Once the work piece is trued the user begins operation of the power tool in step 2550 . When it is determined that the machining of the work piece is completed in step 2560 operation of the power tool is halted.
- an optically reflective material may be disposed upon a surface that is struck by the laser beam emitted from the laser apparatus or the laser light indicia and reading assembly. In this manner when the laser beams are emitted they will strike the optically reflective material and be reflected.
- the reflected laser beams may be received by an optical detector disposed within the housing of the laser apparatus or the laser light indicia and reading assembly. The optical detector may be in communication with the computing system and the computing system may process the laser beam information to determine measurements and other setting information.
- the reflected laser beam may be received by one or several optical detector(s) remotely located with respect to the laser apparatus or the laser light indicia and reading assembly, but in communication with the computing system.
- an optically reflective material may be circumferentially disposed about a circular saw blade of a table saw.
- the table saw may be disposed with a fence that has a laser apparatus (as described in FIG. 1 ) mounted upon it.
- the laser apparatus may emit one or more incident laser beams which strike the optically reflective material on the circular saw blade and, if the circular saw blade is perpendicular to the incident laser beams, are reflected back towards the laser apparatus.
- the laser apparatus may be disposed with one or more optical detectors to receive the reflected laser beam(s) and communicate the information gathered to the computing system for processing and display to a user.
- the type and configuration of the optically reflective material may vary as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art.
- the laser apparatus or the laser light indicia and reading assembly may establish a communicative link with their respective computing systems through a communication system disposed within the device, to which the laser apparatus or the laser light indicia and reading assembly are mounted, itself. In this manner a mounting assembly as shown in FIGS. 6, 7 , and 14 would not be necessary and the laser apparatus or the laser light indicia and reading assembly may be directly mounted to the device. Additionally, the laser apparatus or the laser light indicia and reading assembly may be enabled to accept power from the device to which they are mounted, thus, reducing the need to have a separate power source or power source connection.
- a fence mounted to a table saw system may be disposed to connect with the laser apparatus or the laser light indicia and reading assembly.
- the fence may include a communication port, as shown and described on the mounting assemblies of FIGS. 7 and 14 , which couples with a communication adapter disposed on the housing of the laser apparatus or the laser light indicia and reading assembly.
- the fence may further include a communication adapter which may be coupled with the computing system, thereby enabling the computing system to be in communication with the laser apparatus or the laser light indicia and reading assembly.
- the power source for the table saw system may include an outlet on the fence which may be engaged by the laser apparatus or the laser light indicia and reading assembly to provide power to either system.
- the laser source may be a low power and low intensity laser source to minimize the heat build up with the housing.
- Such an embodiment is suitable for situations where the use of the laser apparatus and the laser light indicia and reading assembly is sporadic and limited.
- a low power and intensity laser source may experience significant heat build up which may damage the system.
- the laser apparatus and the laser light indicia and reading assembly may include a cooling system.
- the housing of either system may include vents to allow heat to escape and cooler air to be drawn into the housing to help cool the laser sources.
- the cooling system may be comprised of a fan assembly mounted within the housing to blow air through the housing and over the laser source(s).
- the housing may include a vent located at an end opposite the fan to allow the blown air and heat to escape.
- a cooling system may comprise an inert coolant being run through the housing of the laser apparatus or the laser light indicia and reading assembly.
- the coolant system may include a tank of the inert coolant connected to the housing through tubing and then an exhaust system connected to the housing for removing and disposing of the inert coolant after it has run through the housing.
- a coolant system may be disposed within a device to which the laser apparatus and the laser light indicia and reading assembly are connected.
- the inert coolant may be presented and exhausted through the mounting connection between the device and the laser apparatus or the laser light indicia and reading assembly.
- the laser apparatus of FIG. 1 may include connection portals in the mounting members. When the mounting members are secured to a fence, such as shown in FIGS.
- tubing which is connected to a tank of the inert coolant, may be connected to one of the mounting members.
- the inert coolant may be pumped into the housing through the mounting member and then exhausted through the other mounting member. It is contemplated that a variety of coolant systems, as may be contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art, may be employed without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention.
- the table saw system 2600 including a laser apparatus 2602 , is shown.
- the table saw system 2600 further includes a work surface 2616 , a fence 2618 , a circular saw blade 2620 , and an adjustment mechanism 2622 .
- the laser apparatus 2602 is similar to the laser apparatus of FIG. 1 with a housing 2604 and a computing system 2614 .
- the laser apparatus 2602 includes four laser sources 2606 , 2608 , 2610 , and 2612 disposed within the housing 2604 and each laser source includes a dithering assembly.
- the laser sources establish multiple laser beam lines across the operational field of the table saw system 2600 .
- the laser beams provide information on distance of the fence 2618 from the circular saw blade 2620 , the angle of the circular saw blade 2620 relative to the work surface 2616 , and have the ability to sense when a work piece has entered the operational field of the table saw system 2600 . It is understood that the laser apparatus 2602 may gather a variety of other information as discussed in FIGS. 1 through 12 , without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention.
- a table saw system 2700 including a first laser light indicia and reading assembly 2702 and a second laser light indicia and reading assembly 2704 , is shown. Both the first and the second laser light indicia and reading assemblies 2702 and 2704 are coupled to a computing system 2703 .
- the computing system controls the functionality of both laser light indicia and reading assemblies. Alternatively, each laser light indicia and reading assembly may be coupled with a separate computing system.
- the table saw system 2700 further includes a work surface 2706 , a fence 2708 , a circular saw blade 2710 , and an angle adjustment mechanism 2712 .
- the angle adjustment mechanism is similar to that discussed in FIG. 21 .
- the first and second laser light indicia and reading assemblies are similar to the laser light indicia and reading assembly shown and described in FIG. 13 , except that each of the housings is disposed with a plurality of laser sources.
- the plurality of laser sources may be enabled as scanning modules or include dithering assemblies to produce a laser beam grid 2716 upon a work piece 2714 .
- the laser beam grid 2716 may be established upon a work surface 2706 of the table saw system 2700 .
- a user of the table saw system 2700 is enabled to establish multiple cut lines and grid points by intersecting the laser beam lines produced.
- the exact location of the grid points may be determined by the user and entered into the computing system which controls the laser light indicia and reading assemblies. It is contemplated that a single computing system may be enabled to control both laser light indicia and reading assemblies or that a separate and independent computing system may be used to control each laser light indicia and reading assembly. In an alternate embodiment the laser light indicia and reading assemblies may be disposed with a single laser source as described in FIG. 13 .
- a drill press system 2800 including a laser light indicia and reading assembly 2802 is shown.
- the drill press system 2800 includes a housing 2803 disposed with an engagement device 2804 and a drill bit 2806 .
- the laser light indicia and reading assembly 2802 is disposed with a laser source enabled to provide a plurality of drill points along two axes. This may be accomplished by a single laser source rotating identification points in series or multiple laser sources may be included within the laser light indicia and reading assembly 2802 to provide multiple identification points. Alternately, the laser light indicia and reading assembly 2802 , with a single laser source, may establish a single continuous identification point.
- a computing system 2803 is coupled to the laser light indicia and reading assembly 2802 and mounted on the housing 2803 . Alternatively, the computing system 2803 may be remotely located and couple with the laser light indicia and reading assembly 2802 via a wireless system.
- a laser light indicia and reading assembly 2902 included in a boring device system 2900 is shown.
- the laser light indicia and reading assembly 2902 is coupled to a computing system 2903 and may establish one or a plurality of depth indication points. This may be accomplished by a single laser source rotating identification points in series or multiple laser sources may be included within the laser light indicia and reading assembly 2902 to provide multiple identification points.
- the laser light indicia and reading assembly is enabled to monitor the progress.
- the laser light indicia and reading assembly will provide an indication to the user of the boring device system 2900 .
- the indication may be provided through light emitting diodes, or the like.
- a rotating laser apparatus 3000 including a first housing member 3002 , a second housing member 3004 , and a computing system 3006 is shown in FIGS. 30 through 37 .
- the first housing member 3002 includes a first laser source 3014 , a second laser source 3016 , a communication port 3018 , a first coupling port 3020 , a second coupling port 3022 , and a grip 3024 .
- the first housing member may include a mounting member, a latch, and a release mechanism as described previously in FIG. 1 .
- the second housing member 3004 includes a third laser source 3026 , a fourth laser source 3028 , and a grip 3030 .
- the second housing member 3004 may also include a mounting member, a latch, and a release mechanism as described previously in FIG. 1 .
- the communication port 3018 provides communicative linkage to all four laser sources disposed within the first and the second housing members.
- the computing system 3006 is coupled with the first housing member 3002 .
- the computing system 3006 is similar to the computing system 104 described previously.
- the computing system includes a first selector 3032 , a second selector 3034 , and a third selector 3036 .
- a display screen 3038 provides an interactive medium for a user who is operating the rotating laser apparatus 3000 .
- the computing system 3006 includes a communication adapter 3038 for coupling with the communication port 3018 disposed on the first housing member 3002 .
- the computing system also includes a first mounting member 3040 and a second mounting member 3042 for engaging with the first and second coupling ports 3020 and 3022 disposed on the first housing member 3002 .
- a first button 3044 and a second button 3046 operably engage with the first and second mounting members to perform a latch and release function enabling a user to secure the computing system 3006 to the first housing member 3002 and remove the computing system 3006 from the first housing member 3002 .
- An indicator 3048 is included on the computing system 3006 to provide a user feedback on whether the computing system 3006 is in communication with the four laser sources.
- the two housing members 3002 and 3004 are coupled by a rotation mechanism 3008 .
- the rotation mechanism 3008 comprises a joint 3010 coupled with an angle measurement device 3012 .
- the angle measurement device 3012 includes teeth along the outer edge, away from the joint 3010 .
- the teeth of the angle measurement device are engaged by a ratchet arm 3050 coupled on one end with a coiled compression spring mechanism 3052 and an activation mechanism 3054 on the other end.
- the ratchet arm 3050 and the coiled compression spring mechanism 3052 are disposed on the inside of the second housing member 3004 in a position proximal to the angle measurement device 3012 .
- the activation mechanism 3054 extends through the second housing member 3004 allowing the user to depress an activation push button and adjust the angle of the second housing member 3004 relative to the first housing member 3002 .
- joint 3010 is a hinge that allows the first and second housing members to be rotated along two axes, as shown in FIGS. 31 through 35 .
- the joint 3010 may be a variety of devices which enable such functionality as may be contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art.
- the angle measurement device 3012 indicates to a user of the rotating laser apparatus 3000 the degree that the first housing member 3002 is relative to the second housing member 3004 .
- the position of the angle measurement device 3012 is fixed relative to the first housing member 3002 .
- the fixed positioning of the angle measurement device 3012 may be accomplished by coupling the angle measurement device 3012 to the first housing member 3002 , the joint 3010 , or other methods as may be contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art.
- the second housing member 3004 is allowed to slide freely over the angle measurement device 3012 as it is rotated relative to the first housing member 3002 .
- the rotation mechanism may be comprised of a variety of systems, such as a hydraulic system, compression system, or the like.
- the user engagement device i.e., the activation push button of the exemplary embodiment
- the rotation mechanism may be engaged directly by the user, as described above, or the rotation mechanism may be in communication with the computing system and the user may enter the desired angle and the rotation mechanism may set the rotating laser apparatus 3000 in the desired position.
- each of the two housing members include two laser sources.
- the first housing member 3002 includes a first laser source 3014 and a second laser source 3016 .
- the second housing member 3004 includes a third laser source 3026 and a fourth laser source 3028 .
- the laser sources 3014 , 3016 , 3026 , and 3028 may form a virtual grid allowing the user to specify a particular location for the execution of a function.
- the rotating laser apparatus 3000 may include a fewer or greater number of laser sources disposed within each of the housing members.
- the computing system 3006 is similar to the computing system described previously in FIGS. 1 through 29 .
- the computing system 3006 is in communication with the laser sources 3014 , 3016 , 3026 , and 3028 , and mounts upon the first housing member 3002 . It is contemplated that the coupling of the computing system 3006 may occur upon the second housing member 3004 .
- Exemplary interactive displays, readable on the computing system 2405 are shown in FIGS. 31, 36 and 37 .
- the interactive displays may provide the user a display of the status of the laser source(s), the angle between the first and second housing members, the type of pattern to established, and gather information from the laser beams.
- an interactive display on the computing system 3006 may allow the user to enter the desired angle and have the rotation mechanism set to that angle.
- step 3810 the interactive display 3008 of the computing system 3006 asks the user to specify if an angle is required for the current assignment.
- the angle referred to is the angle that the first housing member 3002 is at relative to the second housing member 3004 . If the user responds in the affirmative to this query then the user is asked to specify the angle required in step 3820 . After the angle has been specified or if no angle is required for the current assignment, as directed by the user inputting the information through the interactive display 3008 of the computing system 3006 , then in step 3830 the laser pattern is established.
- Establishing the laser pattern occurs by the user being asked on the interactive display to specify the laser pattern required.
- the user is asked if the laser pattern is a straight laser pattern. If the user responds affirmatively, indicating that a straight laser pattern is to be established, then in step 3860 the laser signal is sent to establish the straight pattern. If in step 3840 a user indicates that a straight pattern is not desired then the user is asked, in step 3850 , if a cross pattern is to be established. If the user responds to this query by indicating that a cross pattern is not to be established then the computing system 3006 returns to step 3830 and the interactive display prompts the user that the laser pattern setting must be established.
- the computing system 3006 may allow for the user to manually enter a laser pattern to be established. If the user responds to the query of step 3850 in the affirmative, indicating that a cross pattern is to be established, then in step 3860 the laser signal is sent to establish the cross pattern.
- the laser apparatus 3900 comprises a housing 3902 and a laser source 3904 coupled with the housing 3902 .
- the housing 3902 further includes a first optical splitter 3906 , a second optical splitter 3908 , and a third optical splitter 3910 .
- the housing includes a first optical reflector 3912 .
- Each of the optical splitters and the optical reflector is disposed within the housing 3902 in proximal location to a first emitter 3914 , a second emitter 3916 , a third emitter 3918 , and a fourth emitter 3920 , respectively.
- the optical splitters function to split an incident laser beam received into two or more refracted laser beams.
- an incident laser beam 3922 from the laser source 3904 strikes the first optical splitter 3906 whereupon the incident laser beam is divided into a first laser beam 3924 and a second laser beam 3926 .
- the first laser beam 3924 is directed to the first emitter 3314 where it is emitted from the housing across an operational field.
- the operational field may be a variety of work area, such as those found on a table saw, drill press, belt sander, lathe, or the like.
- the second refracted laser beam 3926 is directed towards the second optical splitter 3908 .
- the second laser beam 3926 is the incident laser beam for the second optical splitter 3908 whereupon striking the second optical splitter the second refracted laser beam is divided into a third laser beam 3928 and a fourth laser beam 3930 .
- the third laser beam 3928 is directed to the second emitter 3916 where it is emitted form the housing across the operational field.
- the fourth laser beam 3930 becomes the incident laser beam for the third optical splitter 3910 .
- the third optical splitter 3910 divides the laser beam into a fifth laser beam 3932 and a sixth laser beam 3934 .
- the fifth laser beam 3932 is directed to the third emitter 3918 where it is emitted from the housing across the operational field.
- the sixth laser beam 3934 becomes the incident laser beam for the first optical reflector 3912 .
- the first optical reflector 3912 directs the laser beam to the fourth emitter 3920 where it is emitted from the housing across the operational field.
- a single laser source may reduce the power consumption of the current invention and provide a more effective way to deal with heat build up, which is inherent within a laser beam generating source.
- the laser source may be a modular laser source capable of being inserted and removed from the housing of the laser apparatus. This may increase operational safety and provide an easier method of caring for the laser source by being able to remove it and store it in a separate location.
- a variety of laser sources may be enabled to couple with the housing of the laser apparatus of the current invention.
- the user of the laser apparatus with a modular laser source has the capability of inserting the appropriate laser source for the job to be accomplished. For example, the user may need a simple laser source for one job and then require a laser source with a dithering assembly for another job. Additionally, the user may require a smaller output laser source in one situation and a larger output laser source in another.
- the needed functionality required by the user may be easily enabled with multiple modular laser sources with differing functional capabilities.
- the laser apparatus 4000 comprises a housing 4002 coupled with a computing system 4004 .
- the computing system 4004 is similar to the computing systems described previously, except that in the present embodiment the computing system 4004 includes a laser source 4006 .
- the housing includes a first optical splitter 4008 , a first optical reflector 4010 , a second optical splitter 4012 , a third optical splitter 4014 , and a second optical reflector 4016 .
- the housing further includes a first emitter 4018 , a second emitter 4020 , a third emitter 4022 , and a fourth emitter 4024 .
- the laser source 4006 emits an incident laser beam into the housing 4002 which is then split by a first optical splitter 4008 into a first laser beam 4026 and a second laser beam 4028 .
- the first laser beam 4026 is directed to the first optical reflector 4010 where it is reflected through the first optical emitter 4018 and emitted across an operational field.
- the second laser beam 4028 is directed to the second optical splitter 4008 which divides the second laser beam into a third laser beam 4030 and a fourth laser beam 4032 .
- the third laser beam 4030 is directed through the second emitter 4020 across the operational field and the fourth laser beam 4032 becomes the incident laser beam for the third optical splitter 4012 .
- the third optical splitter 4010 divides the fourth laser beam 4032 into a fifth laser beam 4034 and a sixth laser beam 4036 .
- the fifth laser beam 4034 is directed through the third emitter 4022 across the operation field and the sixth laser beam 4036 becomes the incident laser beam for the second optical reflector 4014 .
- the sixth laser beam 4036 is reflected through the fourth optical emitter 4024 and emitted across the operational field.
- the laser apparatus may include an optical splitter control mechanism. This mechanism may allow a user to determine the number of laser beams emitted from the housing of the laser apparatus. This may be beneficial When the laser apparatus is being used in situations where the size of the work surface and other components are constantly changing. For example, on a table saw all four emitters may need to be engaged to cover the work surface presented. However, a drill press may have a much smaller working surface and using more than two emitters may not be beneficial to gathering the needed information as they may be outside the scope of the work surface available.
- a rotation laser apparatus 4100 including a single laser source 4102 is shown.
- the single laser source 4102 emits an incident laser beam 4104 which is split by a first optical splitter 4106 and a second optical splitter 4108 .
- the laser beam is also reflected by a first optical reflector 4110 and a second optical reflector 4112 .
- the optical splitters and reflectors function in the same manner as described previously in FIGS. 39 and 40 .
- the single laser source 4102 is located within the joint 4114 connecting a first housing member 4116 to a second housing member 4118 . Power may be provided through a portable power source or a power cord as described in previous figures.
- a rotation laser apparatus 4200 including a first laser source 4202 and a second laser source 4204 is shown in FIG. 39 .
- a first housing member 3606 is disposed on one end with the first laser source 3602 and connected at the opposite end, through joint 3608 , to a second housing member 3610 .
- the second housing member 3610 is disposed on the opposite end of its connection to the joint 3608 with the second laser source 3604 .
- the first housing member 3606 further includes a first optical splitter 3612 and a first optical reflector 3614 .
- the second housing member 3610 further includes a second optical splitter 4216 and a second optical reflector 4218 .
- the operation of the splitters and reflectors is similar to that previously described in FIGS. 39 and 40 .
- FIGS. 41 and 42 the number and configuration of optical splitters and reflectors may vary as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art. It is understood that the laser sources shown in the present embodiments are exemplary and may not be read as limiting or exclusive. As discussed in FIGS. 39 and 40 the laser apparati of FIGS. 41 and 42 may includes photo multipliers of various configurations in order to provide additional functionality to the laser apparatus. Alternatively, the laser sources provided in FIGS. 41 and 42 may be modular. The laser sources may be removed from the joint or the housing members and replaced with alternate laser sources.
- the laser apparatus 4300 comprises a housing 4302 disposed with a laser source 4304 .
- the housing is further disposed with a first optical splitter 4306 , a second optical splitter 4308 , a third optical splitter 4310 , and an optical reflector 4312 .
- the functionality of the optical splitters and the optical reflector is similar to that described in FIGS. 39 through 42 .
- the housing includes a first emitter 4314 , a second emitter 4316 , a third emitter 4318 and a fourth emitter 4320 .
- a plurality of light signal enhancing instruments 4322 , 4324 , 4326 , and 4328 may be photomultipliers comprising a variety of designs, such as photomultiplier end-on tubes, side-on photomultipliers, or the like.
- the photomultipliers may accept an incident laser beam and intensify the light signal by increasing the number of electrons in order to maintain sufficient light signal strength as the laser beam is being passed down from one optical splitter to the next.
- the light signal enhancing instruments may be positioned in front of the emitters in order to provide optimum light signal output.
- the light signal enhancing instruments may include a secondary laser source, such that the incident laser beam received has its signal strength increased.
- a low power laser source may be included within the light signal enhancing instrument which contributes a second light signal to the existing laser beam in order to make up for a loss of light signal intensity.
- Such a system of multiple light signal enhancing instruments may decrease production costs by substituting low power laser sources for separate and independent laser sources located throughout the laser apparatus. It is understood that the configuration and numbers of light signal enhancing instruments may vary as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art.
- the laser apparatus 4400 comprises a housing 4402 including a leveling mechanism 4404 and a wireless receiver 4406 .
- the housing 4402 further includes a communication port 4407 , an attachment adapter 4408 , and an attachment receiver 4410 .
- the housing 4402 includes a first laser source 4412 , a second laser source 4414 , a third laser source 4416 , and a fourth laser source 4418 .
- the leveling mechanism 4404 enables a user to determine the level characteristics of the laser apparatus 4400 in any location. Previous embodiments of the laser apparatus showed the leveling mechanism within the mounting assembly. By placing the leveling mechanism within the housing 4402 , the user may establish accurate placements in locations such as on a wall for use in mounting a drop ceiling, as shown in FIG. 46 .
- the laser sources 4412 through 4418 are similar to the laser sources shown and described previously. It is contemplated that a laser source may be located to emit a laser beam from either end of the housing 4402 . For example, a laser source may be positioned within the attachment adapter 4408 . By placing the laser source at either end of the housing the laser apparatus 4400 may be enabled to determine the level characteristics of objects located along a flat surface to which the laser apparatus 4400 is mounted, such as a picture on a wall or the like.
- the wireless receiver 4406 enables communication between the laser apparatus 4400 and a computing device 4502 , shown in FIG. 45 .
- the computing system may be communicatively coupled to the laser apparatus using a variety of systems, such as serial cable, Bluetooth, Infrared, or the like.
- the wireless communication system allows a user to mount the laser apparatus 4400 in a remote location, such as that shown in FIG. 46 , and receive information on the computing system 4502 .
- the laser apparatus 4400 is mounted to a wall to provide leveling information for a drop ceiling.
- a first laser beam 4602 and a second laser beam 4604 are shown striking a support rail 4606 for the drop ceiling.
- the laser apparatus may communicate to the computing system that the support rail 4606 is not level at the two identified points.
- a third laser beam 4608 and a fourth laser beam 4610 may provide no such indication that the support rail 4606 is out of level.
- the attachment adapter 4408 and the attachment receiver 4410 enable linking of one laser apparatus to another. As shown in FIG. 45 , a plurality of laser apparatus 4400 may be connected. In this embodiment, the multiple laser apparatus are in communication with the computing system 4502 . It is contemplated that the attachment adapter and attachment receiver provide a communicative link between each of the laser apparatus 4400 allowing a single computing system to control all connected laser apparatus. Alternately, each laser apparatus may receive the wireless signal 4504 being sent out by the computing system 4502 .
- the leveling mechanism 4404 may be disposed within any of the previous embodiments of the laser apparatus, shown in FIGS. 1 or 30 . It is further understood that the laser apparatus 4400 may include mounting members and latch and release mechanisms, such as those previously shown and described in FIG. 1 . Additionally, a mounting assembly for connecting the laser apparatus 4400 to a wall or other vertical surface is contemplated.
- the communication port 4407 enables a computing system to communicate with the laser sources 4412 through 4418 .
- the housing 4402 of the laser apparatus 4400 may be disposed with both the wireless receiver 4406 and the communication port 4407 or one or the other.
- the control device that the user employs to control the power tool must be simple and yet effectively provide the capability to control numerous complex tasks.
- the control device may be referred to as the user interface.
- the user interface of the present invention is designed to better serve the user by focusing on providing complex technology in an easy to understand or intuitive format.
- the technology serves the user by joining the complexity of the laser system with a user interface that provides simple to follow and easy to understand textual and/or graphical representations.
- Out-of-the-box implies a level of user friendliness with the idea being that any user may take the present invention and by simply turning it on, start using it with ease.
- a user interface in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention is first turned on it may provide a calibration of the current settings of a power tool environment without being prompted by the user.
- the user interface logically organizes and communicates the information to the user. Additionally, the user interface may present the user with operational choices logically related through easy to identify monikers providing a smooth flow to the user's navigation through the various user interface applications. Another example of the ease of use of the current user interface may involve the use of circular saws. All circular saw blades establish a kerf during their cut. A kerf is the area of material removed by the blade during the cut. While the kerf may be a minimal value it is not always an insignificant value and a user may wish to have the ability to account for the kerf of the cut when establishing settings.
- the user interface of the present invention may provide an operator the capability of determining the kerf for the circular saw blade through a user selectable menu of choices with pre-programmed kerf information.
- the user interface may establish the kerf of the circular saw blade being used without operator input and adjust all settings made to account for the kerf.
- Another embodiment of the present invention may be the user interface being able to determine the kerf of the circular saw blade being used through identification of a marker on the blade, such as a bar code imprinted on the blade. It is understood that adaptation of the user interface for use with other types of power tools may also include the ability to account for the amount of material removed by the power tool when establishing settings for the power tool.
- the correlation by the user interface of the selectors engaged by the user with the information the user sees on the display screen is an example of focusing on the user.
- This simple and effective design gives the user both qualitative and quantitative feedback on the various types of information the user may wish to see or adjust.
- the selectors may be buttons located on any surface of the user interface which provides for the appropriate correlation of the buttons with the icons on the display screen.
- Providing a display screen using liquid crystal display (LCD) technology is another example of focusing on the user.
- the LCD provides a visual field which has been proven to effectively reduce visual identification stress for a user.
- the color scheme and font types for the textual and graphical representations are designed to increase ease of use, even in the often dynamic working environments within which the user interface may be employed.
- Providing a backlit display screen also highlights the focus of the present invention, which is on the user.
- Powering the user interface of the present invention may occur through the use of batteries which are received in a battery cavity within the user interface.
- the user interface allows for the use of standard types of batteries for easy replacement and cost reduction. It is understood that the user interface may employ a variety of power sources, such as AC power through the use of a standard AC cord or fuel cells. Regardless of the power source used, the user interface provides a clear display to the user of the status of the power source. This may be helpful to avoid unnecessary delays caused by power failures which may have been avoided had the operator of the user interface known the status of the remaining power supply.
- the user interface of the present invention may provide a computing system capable of executing applications which are visualized for the operator on a display.
- the user interface is enabled to receive updates to its current applications inventory or replacement of applications should the need arise.
- the user interface may execute a specific range of applications for the operation of a power tool such as a table saw, or the like.
- the operator may wish to retro-fit the user interface on a belt sander.
- the belt sander will have different operating requirements and capabilities than a table saw and therefore the user interface may need to download an application set directed for the operation of a belt sander. Accomplishing this updating or replacing of applications may occur using a variety of different technologies.
- the user interface of the present invention may include a docking station which, when the user interface is docked, allows for a communicative link to be established between the user interface and a peripheral computing system.
- a docking station which, when the user interface is docked, allows for a communicative link to be established between the user interface and a peripheral computing system.
- information may be downloaded to the user interface from the peripheral computing system and the user interface may upload information to the peripheral computing system.
- the user interface may be disposed with communications ports, such as a serial cable port, infrared port, RF port, Bluetooth port, and the like, which allow it to network with peripheral computing systems.
- an operator of a power tool may establish the settings and measurements to be used with the power tool.
- a user of the table saw may set a desired fence to blade distance, blade height, blade angle, etc., through the user interface.
- the feedback from the laser apparatus 100 indicates that the desired orientation has been reached it may provide an indication to the user, through the user interface.
- Indicators may include visual and audio feedback, and the like.
- a sound feedback mechanism provided by a user interface of the present invention may present an audible signal to a user when a tool is in the selected position (e.g., when a saw blade has a desired height or angle, when a fence is in a desired distance from a saw blade, or the like).
- the sound feedback mechanism may emit via a microphone/speaker a series of beeps or other noises to a user that guide the user in the positioning of the tool. For example, the beeps may become louder, more frequent, and/or change in pitch the closer the tool is to the desired position.
- a user interface of the present invention may provide visual feedback mechanism (not shown) which presents a visual signal on its display.
- this visual signal may be as simple as a light or other symbol being displayed on the display of the user interface when the tool is in the desired position.
- arrows or other visual direction-guiding signals may be presented on the display to guide the user to the desired position of the tool.
- a user interface in accordance with the present invention may be coupled with a laser measurement and alignment device.
- the laser measurement and alignment device may comprise the laser apparatus 100 and computing system 104 shown and described in FIGS. 1 through 46 or may comprise a variety of systems as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art.
- the coupling may enable the user interface to be selectively or permanently detached from the laser measurement and alignment device.
- the user interface may communicate with the laser measurement and alignment device via a physical communication line (such as a cable) or via a wireless signal. It is contemplated that the user interface may couple directly with the laser apparatus 100 or may communicatively couple with the computing system 104 which in turn is coupled with the laser apparatus 100 .
- the communicative coupling may allow the user interface to operatively control the laser apparatus 100 from a remote location.
- the user interface may control a power tool, upon which the laser measurement and alignment device is coupled, from a remote location.
- the interface may include its own power supply so that the interface may transmit signals to the laser measurement and alignment device when detached therefrom.
- the interface and the laser measurement and alignment device may share a single power source.
- the power source may be batteries, fuel cells, or the like.
- the user interface may include laser sources, similar to those shown and described for the computing system 104 .
- the software loaded onto a user interface may be updated through a diskette, a DVD, a CD, the Internet, a network, or the like.
- a user interface may include a display which shows exemplary screens 4700 through 5300 shown in FIG. 47 through 53 .
- each screen includes four tabs: a home tab (labeled with a “home” icon), a settings tab (labeled with a “gear” icon), a calibration tab (labeled with a “reversed triangle” icon), and a save tab (labeled with a “diskette” icon).
- a user may toggle among different screens by touching an appropriate tab.
- an exemplary home screen 4700 is shown.
- the screen 4700 shows a distance icon and its corresponding value (“121 ⁇ 4′′”), an angle icon and its corresponding value (6.1°), and a height icon and its corresponding value (“11 ⁇ 4′′”).
- the screen 4700 may be replaced with a settings screen 4800 shown in FIG. 48 .
- the screen 4800 may show information such as the battery status of the user interface or the laser measurement and alignment device, and the like.
- the screen 4800 may be replaced with a calibration screen 4900 shown in FIG. 49 .
- a user may calibrate the laser measurement and alignment device. From the screen 4900 shown in FIG. 49 , when the save tab is touched, the screen 4900 may be replaced with a save screen 5000 shown in FIG. 50 , through which a user may save a height.
- FIG. 51 shows an additional exemplary save screen 5100 , through which a user may save a distance.
- FIG. 52 shows a further exemplary save screen 5200 , through which a user may save an angle.
- FIG. 53 shows a still further exemplary save screen 5300 , which shows various other exemplary icons (e.g., a speak icon for adjusting the volume of the speaker, and the like).
- a user interface coupled with a laser measurement and alignment device in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention may operate according to a scheme 5400 shown in FIG. 54 .
- a laser measurement and alignment device and a user interface are not attached to a power tool (e.g., a table saw, belt sander, lathe, drill press, nailer, router table, and the like)
- the laser measurement and alignment device and the user interface may be used to do other measurements unrelated to the power tool or may be recharged.
- the software loaded onto the user interface may be updated.
- the user interface may include a disk drive for loading software applications and saving information onto a removeable memory media.
- the user interface may include a drive for a DVD, a CD-ROM, flash memory devices, and the like, for receiving software updates.
- a laser measurement and alignment device and a user interface are attached to a power tool (e.g., a table saw, or the like)
- the laser measurement and alignment device and the user interface may be used to perform measurements on the power tool.
- the laser measurement and alignment device may be automatically calibrated through the user interface.
- a user interface may include four operational modes: distance, angle, height, and settings, as shown in FIG. 54 .
- a user may set a desired distance, e.g., a distance between a saw blade and fence of a table saw through the user interface.
- the user interface in a distance mode may include five options: (1) return to home state; (2) fine adjustment; (3) recall dimension (i.e., recall a previous saved distance); (4) save dimension (i.e., save the current distance); and (5) back one level.
- the user interface may include three options: (1) zero dimension, either absolute or relative; (2) units (fraction, decimal, or metric); and (3) add offset distance.
- a user may set a desired angle, e.g., an angle between a saw blade and a line perpendicular to a table surface of a table saw through the user interface.
- a desired angle e.g., an angle between a saw blade and a line perpendicular to a table surface of a table saw through the user interface.
- the user interface in an angle mode may include five options: (1) return to home state; (2) fine adjustment; (3) recall angle (i.e., recall a previous saved angle); (4) save dimension (i.e., save the current angle); and (5) back one level.
- the user interface may include two options: (a) zero dimension (either absolute or relative); and (b) compute an angle (a result based on miter and bevel).
- a user may set a desired height, e.g., a height of a saw blade over a table surface of a table saw through the user interface.
- the user interface in a height mode may include five options: (1) return to home state (the interface directly returns to a home screen when this option is chosen); (2) fine adjustment; (3) recall dimension (i.e., recall a previous saved height); (4) save dimension (i.e., save the current height); and (5) back one level (the interface goes back one level when this option is chosen).
- the user interface may include two options: (a) zero height (either absolute or relative); and (b) units (fraction, decimal, or metric).
- a user may set desired settings for the user interface.
- the user interface in a settings mode may include five options: (1) return to home state; (2) global units; (3) calibration; (4) system; and (5) back one level.
- the user interface may include three options: (a) fraction; (b) decimal; and (c) metric.
- the default unit may be fraction.
- a user may choose a resolution such as 1/128, 1/64, 1/32, or the like.
- a decimal unit a user may choose a resolution such as 0.0, 0.00, 0.000, or the like.
- the user interface may include three options: (a) measurements (distance, angle or height); (b) fence side (either left or right); (c) fence orientation (either horizontal or vertical).
- the user interface may include three options: (a) sound (either on or off); (b) display (to adjust brightness and contrast of the display); and (c) laser.
- the user interface may include three options: (i) on (laser is on for 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, or the like); (ii) off (laser is off); and (iii) sleep mode (laser falls asleep after laser is on for 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, or the like.
- a user may update the software loaded onto the user interface.
- each screen in a particular mode may include an icon for accessing the other modes directly.
- each screen presented to the user of the user interface may include an icon for the angle mode, height mode, and setting mode. By selecting the individual icon the user may be taken directly to the selected mode and presented with the series of options available under that mode.
- FIG. 55 shows an exemplary user interface 5800 with different exemplary screens which may execute the scheme 5400 shown in FIG. 54 .
- FIG. 56 shows the user interface 5800 with an exemplary calibration screen
- FIG. 57 shows the user interface 5800 with an additional exemplary calibration screen.
- the user interface 5800 will be described in detail along with FIG. 58 .
- the interface 5800 includes a display 5802 and a plurality of user input controls, which are generally indicated at 5804 .
- the display 5802 may be LCD (liquid crystal display), a pixel-based display, or the like.
- the controls 5804 include a plurality of push (or enter) buttons 5806 , 5808 , 5810 , 5812 and 5814 .
- the buttons 5806 through 5814 enable a user to toggle between the screens and modes displayable on the display 5802 , and to select and input values for any of the available options, as discussed in more detail subsequently.
- buttons 5806 through 5814 are positioned at the bottom of the interface 5800 and correlate with an option on the display 5802 available for selection by the user.
- the buttons 5806 through 5814 may be positioned anywhere on the interface 5800 as may be contemplated by a person of ordinary skill in the art.
- the buttons 5806 through 5814 are all enter buttons.
- other configurations and numbers of buttons may be used.
- other forms of user input controls may be used, such as slides, track balls, switches, and pointing devices.
- the described user interface is relatively large and complex, it is also possible to provide a much smaller user interface with less information displayed at a time.
- FIG. 58 illustrates a default, or home, screen 5816 of the display 5802 .
- This is the screen that is most often displayed to a user, and to which the controller defaults after user inputs are completed on any of the subsequently described screens.
- the display 5802 (and hence each screen of the display 5802 , including the home screen 5816 ) includes a battery region 5818 , a developer region 5820 , a current-screen region 5822 , a settings region 5824 and an available-option region 5826 .
- the battery region 5818 provides a user with information about the status of batteries used to provide power to the laser measurement and alignment device and the user interface 5800 . This feature is useful to allow a user to monitor the status of the battery during use. In particular, a user may want to check the remaining battery capacity before starting a project that may require more battery reserve than currently available. As shown, the battery region 5818 includes a small battery icon 5828 and a large battery icon 5830 . Each of the icons 5828 and 5830 has incremental bar-graph-like readings representing the theoretical amount of battery life remaining. It is understood other textual or symbolic representations may be used without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention.
- the icon 5828 may be used to indicate the status of the battery used to provide power to one of the user interface 5800 and the laser measurement and alignment device (e.g. the user interface 5800 ), and the icon 5830 may be used to indicate the status of the battery used to provide power to the other of the user interface 5800 and the laser measurement and alignment device (e.g., the laser measurement and alignment device).
- the battery region 5818 may include a single icon of a battery with incremental bar-graph-like readings representing the theoretical amount of battery life remaining when the battery is used to provide power to both the laser measurement and alignment device and the user interface 5800 . It is understood that the battery region 5818 may be positioned on the display 5802 as may be contemplated by a person of ordinary skill in the art.
- the developer region 5820 provides information about the developer of the user interface 5800 .
- the user interface 5800 is developed by Delta International Machinery Corp.
- the developer region 5820 may be not included in the display 5802 at all in order to save space.
- the developer region 5820 may provide an indication of ownership of the individual user interface. For example, a user may place a specific logo in this region to identify the user interface as their own. It is understood that the location of the developer region on the display 5802 may vary.
- each user interface may be enabled with a security feature which allows the individual unit to be protected from unauthorized use by another.
- the security feature may include a user being able to enter a password into the user interface which is required before operation of the user interface will be allowed. It is contemplated that other security features may be incorporated into the present invention as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art.
- the current-screen region 5822 is used to show the screen status of the user interface 5800 and will be described in more detail subsequently. As shown in FIG. 58 , the current-screen region 5822 of the home screen 5816 is empty. Alternatively, the current-screen region 5822 of the home screen 5816 may include graphic and/or textual representations indicating that the present screen is the home screen.
- the settings region 5824 displays information to the user about the current setup of programmed and user-selected modes for the tool (e.g., a table saw, or the like).
- the region 5824 includes at least one mode icon 5832 and its (their) corresponding value(s) 5834 .
- three operational mode icons are shown on the home screen 5816 , each of which has at least one value.
- the three illustrated mode icons are distance 5836 , angle 5840 , and height 5844 , each of which having a corresponding value 5838 , 5842 , and 5846 , respectively, and may trigger the display of one or more additional screens, as described in more detail subsequently.
- FIG. 58 shows a mode icon positioned below its corresponding value, other arrangements may be utilized as may be contemplated by a person of ordinary skill in the art.
- a mode icon and/or textual name may be positioned to the left, to the right, or above its corresponding value without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention.
- the distance value 5838 , the angle value 5842 , and the height value 5846 in the settings region 5824 are all displayed in a clear fashion to a user so that the user is not confused by the numbers inside these values. Different fonts, sizes, and/or color may be used to distinguish different numbers. It is understood that visual clarity and the ease with which an operator of the user interface can view the information presented on the display 5802 may implicitly establish a preferable range of fonts, sizes, and colors used by the user interface. Further, the amount of information to be presented on each screen of the display 5802 may determine/establish a range of fonts, sizes, and colors to be used.
- the integer may be preferably presented in a larger font than a numerator and a denominator of the fraction.
- the distance value 5838 is “51 ⁇ 4′′” in which the number “51 ⁇ 4′ is an integer “5” plus a fraction “1 ⁇ 4”
- the height value is “2 1/16′′” in which the number “2 1/16” is an integer “2” plus a fraction “ 1/16”.
- the integers “5” and “2” are presented in a larger font than the numerator “1” and the denominators “4” and “6” so that a user is not confused by the numbers in the values 5838 and 5846 .
- a value includes a decimal expansion of a number
- the decimal digit(s) before the decimal point may be preferably presented in a larger font than the decimal digit(s) after the decimal point.
- the angle value 5842 includes a decimal expansion “5. 1 ”.
- decimal digit “5” before the decimal point is presented in a larger font than the decimal point “1” after the decimal point so that a user is not confused by the numbers in the value 5842 . It is understood that other methods as may be contemplated by a person of ordinary skill in the art may be used to distinguish numbers in a value 5834 so that a user is not confused by those numbers.
- the available-option region 5826 has a plurality of tabs used to show available options a user may have from the current screen.
- Each of the tabs may use an icon, textual, and/or graphic representation to indicate an option available from the current screen.
- Each of the tabs is correlated to a user input control (e.g., a button, touch pad, and the like).
- a corresponding user input control may be operated on (e.g., a corresponding button is pushed, or the like).
- each tab is correlated to a button directly below. This correlation of location, establishing a user input control in direct physical proximity to the tab, provides an ease of use of the present invention generally not seen in the art.
- the available-option region 5826 has five tabs 5848 , 5850 , 5852 , 5854 , and 5856 , each of them is correlated to a button directly below. It is noted that although each tab on the home screen 5816 as shown in FIG. 58 uses an icon to represent an available option, any of the tabs may alternatively use a textual and/or graphic representation to indicate an available option without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention.
- the tab 5848 is labeled with a “home” icon filled with color different from the background, indicating the current screen is the home screen 5816 . Moreover, the tab 5848 may be marked differently from the four other tabs (e.g., the tab 5848 in FIG. 58 has no horizontal line above the “home” icon) to indicate that the current screen is the home screen 5816 .
- the tab 5848 is correlated to the button 5806 . When the button 5806 is pushed, the home screen 5816 remains (since the current screen is the home screen).
- the tab 5850 has a “distance” icon representing an option of setting the distance between the saw blade and the fence and is correlated to the button 5808 .
- the home screen 5816 shown in FIG. 58 when the button 5808 is pushed, the home screen 5816 is replaced with a distance screen 6300 shown in FIG. 63 , and the user interface 5800 enters into a distance mode.
- the distance screen 6300 may then be replaced with other exemplary screens in a distance mode shown in FIG. 59 and FIGS. 64 through 74 when an appropriate button (or buttons) is pushed.
- the tab 5852 has an “angle” icon representing an option of setting the angle between the saw blade and a line perpendicular to the surface of the saw table (usually less than 90°) and is correlated to the button 5810 .
- the home screen 5816 shown in FIG. 58 when the button 5810 is pushed, the home screen 5816 is replaced with an angle screen 7500 shown in FIG. 75 , and the user interface 5800 enters into an angle mode.
- the angle screen 7500 may then be replaced with other exemplary screens in an angle mode shown in FIG. 60 and FIGS. 76 through 83 when an appropriate button (or buttons) is pushed.
- the tab 5854 has a “height” icon representing an option of setting the height of the saw blade over the saw table surface and is correlated to the button 5812 .
- the home screen 5816 shown in FIG. 58 when the button 5812 is pushed, the home screen 5816 is replaced with a height screen 8400 shown in FIG. 84 , and the user interface 5800 enters into a height mode.
- the height screen 6300 may then be replaced with other exemplary screens in a height mode shown in FIG. 61 and FIGS. 85 through 94 when an appropriate button (or buttons) is pushed.
- the tab 5856 has a “gear” icon representing an option of adjusting the settings of the graphic user interface 5800 and/or the laser measurement and alignment device and is correlated to the button 5814 .
- the home screen 5816 shown in FIG. 58 when the button 5814 is pushed, the home screen 5816 is replaced with a settings screen 9500 shown in FIG. 95 , and the user interface 5800 enters into a settings mode.
- the settings screen 9500 may then be replaced with other exemplary screens in a settings mode shown in FIG. 62 and FIGS. 96 through 101 when an appropriate button (or buttons) is pushed.
- the focus of the user interface is to provide a system which enables complex operations through an easy to use controller.
- the present invention has employed the standard of logically relating the folders which contain the various operational functions enabled by the user interface. For instance, after the user interface is calibrated a home screen 5816 provides access to distance mode FIGS. 63 through 74 , angle mode FIGS. 75 through 83 , height mode FIGS. 84 through 94 , and settings mode FIGS. 95 through 101 . When one of the modes is selected it provides access to the relevant operations pertaining to that mode in a clear and concise manner. Thus, the navigation through the complex user interface is made simple and provides a smooth flow of operation.
- FIGS. 63 through 74 various exemplary screens 6300 through 7400 of the display 5802 of the user interface 5800 in a distance mode are shown.
- the distance screen 6300 is similar to the home screen 5816 shown in FIG. 58 .
- the distance screen 6300 shows the distance mode icon 5836 and its corresponding value 5838 only.
- the user interface 5800 is in a distance mode, only the distance mode icon 5836 and its corresponding value 5838 are shown in the settings region 5824 (see, e.g., FIGS. 63 through 74 ).
- a user sets only a desired distance between a saw blade and a fence of a table saw through the user interface 5800 when the user interface 5800 is in a distance mode. Because a user does not set an angle or a blade height in a distance mode, the angle and the height mode icons 5840 , 5844 and their corresponding values 5842 , 5846 do not need to be displayed on the screen in order to save battery power. Moreover, a screen in a distance mode showing only the distance mode icon 5836 and its corresponding value 5838 in the settings region 5824 may help a user to focus attention on setting the distance.
- the distance screen 6300 has in its available-option region 5826 five tabs 6302 , 6304 , 6306 , 6308 , and 6310 different from the five tabs shown in FIG. 58 .
- the tab 6302 has a “home” icon unfilled with color representing an option of “returning to home directly” and is correlated to the button 5806 directly below.
- the tab 6304 represents an option of “fine adjustment” and is correlated to the button 5808 directly below.
- the tab 6306 represents an option of “recall” and is correlated to the button 5810 directly below.
- the tab 6308 has a “diskette” icon representing an option of “save” and is correlated to the button 5812 directly below.
- the “diskette” icon may be altered to provide an alternative image more directly reflecting the current memory media being employed.
- the user interface may incorporate the usage of more than one type of memory media and thus include multiple memory media drives.
- the tab 6310 has a “back arrow” icon representing an option of “back one level” and is correlated to the button 5814 directly below. That is, when the button 5814 is pushed, the interface 5800 goes back one level and the distance screen 6300 is replaced with the home screen 5816 shown in FIG. 58 .
- the distance screen 6300 shown in FIG. 63 when the button 5808 is pushed, the distance screen 6300 is replaced with a distance fine adjustment screen 6400 shown in FIG. 64 .
- the screen 6400 shows in its current-screen region 5822 a textual representation “Fine Adjust”, indicating to a user that the current screen is for fine adjustment of a distance.
- the screen 6400 has five tabs: the tabs 6302 and 6310 (as shown in FIG. 63 ), a tab 6402 for a “Zero” option correlated to the button 5808 , a tab 6404 for “Units” option correlated to the button 5810 , and a tab 6406 for “Offset” option correlated to the button 5812 .
- the interface 5800 When the tab 6302 is chosen (e.g., by pushing the button 5806 ) from the screen 6400 , the interface 5800 directly returns to home and the screen 6400 is replaced with the home screen 5816 shown in FIG. 58 .
- the tab 6310 is chosen (e.g., by pushing the button 5814 ) from the screen 6400 , the interface 5800 goes back one level and the screen 6400 is replaced with the distance screen 6300 shown in FIG. 63 .
- the screen 6400 is replaced with a distance relative zero screen 6500 shown in FIG. 65 .
- the screen 6500 has in its current-screen region 5822 a word “Zero”, indicating the current screen 6500 is a distance zero screen.
- the screen 6500 has in its settings region 5824 a letter “R”, indicating that the current screen 6500 is a distance relative zero screen.
- the screen 6400 is replaced with a default distance units screen 6600 shown in FIG. 66 .
- the screen 6600 has in its current-screen region 5822 a distance icon and a word “Units”, indicating the current screen 6600 is a distance units screen.
- the screen 6600 includes three new tabs 6602 (Frac), 6604 (Dec) and 6606 (mm), which represent a fraction unit option, a decimal unit option, and a metric unit option, respectively.
- the tab 6602 representing a fraction unit option does not have a horizontal line above “Frac”, indicating the fraction unit option is chosen.
- the number in the distance value 5838 is displayed in a format of “integer+fraction” (see, e.g., “51 ⁇ 4” in FIG. 66 ).
- the screen 6600 is replaced with a distance decimal unit screen 6700 shown in FIG. 67 .
- the screen 6700 has in its current-screen region 5822 a distance icon and words “Dec Units”, indicating the current screen 6700 is a distance decimal units screen.
- the tab 6604 representing a decimal unit option does not have a horizontal line above “Dec”, indicating the decimal unit option is chosen.
- the number in the distance value 5838 is displayed in a format of a decimal expansion (see, e.g., “ 5 . 25 ” in FIG. 67 ).
- buttons 5808 , 5810 , and 5812 a user may toggle among the default distance units (in fraction units) screen 6600 shown in FIG. 66 , the distance decimal units screen 6700 shown in FIG. 67 , and a distance metric unit screen (not shown).
- the screen 6400 is replaced with a distance offset screen 6800 shown in FIG. 68 .
- the screen 6800 has in its current-screen region 5822 a word “Offset”, indicating the current screen 6800 is a distance offset screen.
- the screen 6800 includes a new tab 6802 (Set), representing an option of adding an offset distance.
- the distance screen 6300 shown in FIG. 63 when the button 5810 is pushed, the distance screen 6300 is replaced with a distance recall screen 6900 shown in FIG. 69 .
- the screen 6900 shows in its current-screen region 5822 a textual representation “Recall”, indicating to a user that the current screen is for recalling a saved distance.
- Each saved distance value may have a label number such as 1, 2, 3, etc.
- the screen 6900 shows a value 5838 (“51 ⁇ 4′′”) in its settings region 5824 .
- the screen 6900 includes two new tabs: a tab 6902 for a “+” option of moving to a saved distance value with a higher label number than that shown on the current screen, and a tab 6904 for a “ ⁇ ” option of moving to a saved distance value with a lower label number than that shown on the current screen.
- a tab 6902 for a “+” option of moving to a saved distance value with a higher label number than that shown on the current screen and a tab 6904 for a “ ⁇ ” option of moving to a saved distance value with a lower label number than that shown on the current screen.
- the “+” option the tab 6902
- the screen 6900 is replaced with a screen 7000 shown in FIG. 70 , where a saved distance value with a higher label number “2” (“2 3/64′′”) is shown.
- the screen 6900 shown in FIG. 69 when the “+” option is repeatedly chosen several times (e.g., by pushing the button 5808 several times), the screen 6900 may be replaced with a screen 7100 shown in FIG. 71 , where a saved distance value with a higher label number “9” (“127 ⁇ 8′′”) is shown. From the screen 7100 shown in FIG. 71 , when the “ ⁇ ” option (the tab 6904 ) is chosen, the screen 7100 is replaced with a screen 7200 shown in FIG. 72 , where a saved distance value with a lower label number “8” (“33 ⁇ 8′′”) is shown.
- the distance screen 6300 may be replaced with a distance save screen 7300 shown in FIG. 73 .
- the screen 7300 shows in its current-screen region 5822 a diskette icon and a textual representation “Save”, indicating to a user that the current screen is for saving a distance value.
- the screen 7300 includes a “diskette” tab 7302 , representing an option of saving the current value 5838 (“61 ⁇ 2′′”).
- the tab 7302 is chosen from the screen 7300 , the screen 7300 is replaced with the screen 7400 shown in FIG.
- the value “61 ⁇ 2′′” is given a label number (e.g., “11” shown in FIG. 74 ) and may be saved into a memory of the user interface 5800 or a memory of the laser measurement and alignment device communicatively coupled to the user interface 5800 .
- an operator of the user interface may input changes to the distance settings directly.
- an alternative user input control mode may be included which allows the user to directly affect changes in the distance settings.
- the user may be enabled to make corrections to the distance in incremental amounts, such as 1 ⁇ 2 inch or 1 ⁇ 4 inch, 0.1′′ or 0.01′′, or 10 mm or 5 mm.
- the user interface may provide “+” and “ ⁇ ” tabs correlated to user input control buttons which allow for this type of adjustment.
- the direct change of distance setting may be configured in a variety of ways and be within various locations of the height mode as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art.
- FIGS. 75 through 83 various exemplary screens 7500 through 8300 of the display 5802 of the user interface 5800 in an angle mode are shown.
- the angle screen 7500 is similar to the home screen 5816 shown in FIG. 58 .
- the angle screen 7500 shows the distance mode icon 5840 and its corresponding value 5842 only.
- the user interface 5800 is in an angle mode, only the angle mode icon 5840 and its corresponding value 5842 are shown in the settings region 5824 (see, e.g., FIGS. 75 through 83 ).
- a user sets only a desired angle between a saw blade and a line perpendicular to the table surface of a table saw through the user interface 5800 when the user interface 5800 is in an angle mode. Because a user does not set a distance or a blade height in an angle mode, the distance and the height mode icons 5836 , 5844 and their corresponding values 5838 , 5846 do not need to be displayed on the screen in order to save battery power. Moreover, a screen in an angle mode showing only the angle mode icon 5840 and its corresponding value 5842 in the settings region 5824 may help a user to focus attention on setting the angle.
- the angle screen 7500 shows in its current-screen region 5822 an angle icon and a textual representation “Angle”, indicating to a user that the current screen is in an angle mode.
- the screen 7500 has in its available-option region 5826 five tabs 6302 , 6304 , 6306 , 6308 , and 6310 different from the five tabs shown in FIG. 58 .
- the tab 6302 has a “home” icon unfilled with color representing an option of “returning to home directly” and is correlated to the button 5806 directly below.
- the angle screen 7500 is replaced with the home screen 5816 shown in FIG. 58 .
- the tab 6304 represents an option of “fine adjustment” and is correlated to the button 5808 directly below.
- the tab 6306 represents an option of “recall” and is correlated to the button 5810 directly below.
- the tab 6308 has a “diskette” icon representing an option of “save” and is correlated to the button 5812 directly below.
- the tab 6310 has a “back arrow” icon representing an option of “back one level” and is correlated to the button 5814 directly below. That is, when the button 5814 is pushed, the interface 5800 goes back one level and the angle screen 7500 is replaced with the home screen 5816 shown in FIG. 58 .
- the angle screen 7500 shown in FIG. 75 when the button 5808 is pushed, the angle screen 7500 is replaced with an angle fine adjustment screen 7600 shown in FIG. 76 .
- the screen 7600 shows in its current-screen region 5822 an angle icon and a textual representation “Fine Adjust”, indicating to a user that the current screen is for fine adjustment of an angle.
- the screen 7600 includes three tabs: the tabs 6302 and 6310 (as shown in FIG. 75 ), and a tab 6402 for a “Zero” option correlated to the button 5808 .
- the interface 5800 When the tab 6302 is chosen (e.g., by pushing the button 5806 ) from the screen 7600 , the interface 5800 directly returns to home and the screen 7600 is replaced with the home screen 5816 shown in FIG. 58 .
- the tab 6310 is chosen (e.g., by pushing the button 5814 ) from the screen 7600 , the interface 5800 goes back one level and the screen 7600 is replaced with the angle screen 7500 shown in FIG. 75 .
- the screen 7600 is replaced with an angle zero screen 7700 shown in FIG. 77 .
- the screen 7700 has in its current-screen region 5822 an angle icon and a word “Zero”, indicating the current screen 7700 is an angle zero screen.
- the screen 7700 includes two new tabs: a tab 7702 representing an angle absolute zero option, and a tab 7704 representing an angle relative zero option.
- the tab 7704 option is chosen (e.g., by pushing the button 5810 ) from the screen 7700 shown in FIG.
- the screen 7700 is replaced with an angle relative zero screen 7800 shown in FIG. 78 .
- the screen 7800 has in its current-screen region 5822 an angle icon and a word “Relative”, indicating the current screen 7800 is an angle relative zero screen.
- a user may toggle between the angle relative zero screen 7800 shown in FIG. 78 and the angle zero screen 7700 shown in FIG. 77 .
- the angle screen 7500 shown in FIG. 75 when the button 5810 is pushed, the angle screen 7500 is replaced with an angle recall screen 7900 shown in FIG. 79 .
- the screen 7900 shows in its current-screen region 5822 an angle icon and a textual representation “Recall”, indicating to a user that the current screen is for recalling a saved angle.
- Each saved angle value may have a label number such as 1, 2, 3, etc.
- the screen 7900 shows a value 5842 (“15.1°”) in its settings region 5824 .
- the screen 7900 includes two new tabs: a tab 7902 for a “+” option of moving to a saved angle value with a higher label number than that shown on the current screen, and a tab 7904 for a “ ⁇ ” option of moving to a saved angle value with a lower label number than that shown on the current screen.
- a tab 7902 for a “+” option of moving to a saved angle value with a higher label number than that shown on the current screen and a tab 7904 for a “ ⁇ ” option of moving to a saved angle value with a lower label number than that shown on the current screen.
- the screen 7900 may be replaced with a screen 8000 shown in FIG. 80 , where a saved angle value with a label number “5” (“ 30 .
- the screen 7900 shown in FIG. 79 when the “ ⁇ ” option (the tab 7904 ) is chosen, the screen 7900 may be replaced with a screen 8100 shown in FIG. 81 , where a saved angle value with a lower label number “1” (“7.5°”) is shown.
- the angle screen 7500 shown in FIG. 75 when the button 5812 is pushed, the angle screen 7500 is replaced with an angle save screen 8200 shown in FIG. 82 .
- the screen 8200 shows in its current-screen region 5822 an angle icon and a textual representation “Save”, indicating to a user that the current screen is for saving an angle value.
- the screen 8200 includes a “diskette” tab 8202 , representing an option of saving the current value 5842 (“41.0°”).
- the “diskette” icon may be altered to provide an alternative image more directly reflecting the current memory media being employed.
- the user interface may incorporate the usage of more than one type of memory media and thus include multiple memory media drives.
- the screen 8200 is replaced with a screen 8300 shown in FIG. 83 , where the value “41.0°” is given a label number (e.g., “9” shown in FIG. 83 ) and may be saved into a memory of the user interface 5800 or a memory of the laser measurement and alignment device communicatively coupled to the user interface 5800 .
- the value “41.0°” is given a label number (e.g., “9” shown in FIG. 83 ) and may be saved into a memory of the user interface 5800 or a memory of the laser measurement and alignment device communicatively coupled to the user interface 5800 .
- an operator of the user interface may input changes to the angle settings directly.
- an alternative user input control mode may be included which allows the user to directly affect changes in the angle settings.
- the user may be enabled to make corrections to the angle in incremental amounts, such as 0.5 degrees or 1 degree.
- the user interface may provide “+” and “ ⁇ ” tabs correlated to user input control buttons which allow for this type of adjustment.
- the direct change of angle setting may be configured in a variety of ways and be within various locations of the angle mode as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art.
- FIGS. 84 through 94 various exemplary screens 8400 through 9400 of the display 5802 of the user interface 5800 in a height mode are shown.
- the height screen 8400 is similar to the home screen 5816 shown in FIG. 58 .
- the height screen 8400 shows the height mode icon 5844 and its corresponding value 5846 only.
- the user interface 5800 is in a height mode, only the height mode icon 5844 and its corresponding value 5846 are shown in the settings region 5824 (see, e.g., FIGS. 84 through 94 ).
- a user sets only a desired height of a saw blade over a table surface of a table saw through the user interface 5800 when the user interface 5800 is in a height mode. Because a user does not set a distance or an angle in a height mode, the distance and angle mode icons 5836 , 5840 and their corresponding values 5838 , 5842 do not need to be displayed on the screen in order to save battery power. Moreover, a screen in a distance mode showing only the height mode icon 5844 and its corresponding value 5846 in the settings region 5824 may help a user to focus attention on setting the distance.
- the height screen 8400 shows in its current-screen region 5822 a height icon and a textual representation “Height”, indicating to a user that the current screen is in a height mode.
- the height screen 8400 has in its available-option region 5826 five tabs 6302 , 6304 , 6306 , 6308 , and 6310 different from the five tabs shown in FIG. 58 .
- the tab 6302 has a “home” icon unfilled with color representing an option of “returning to home directly” and is correlated to the button 5806 directly below.
- the distance screen 6300 is replaced with the home screen 5816 shown in FIG. 58 .
- the tab 6304 represents an option of “fine adjustment” and is correlated to the button 5808 directly below.
- the tab 6306 represents an option of “recall” and is correlated to the button 5810 directly below.
- the tab 6308 has a “diskette” icon representing an option of “save” and is correlated to the button 5812 directly below.
- the tab 6310 has a “back arrow” icon representing an option of “back one level” and is correlated to the button 5814 directly below. That is, when the button 5814 is pushed, the interface 5800 goes back one level and the distance screen 8400 is replaced with the home screen 5816 shown in FIG. 58 .
- the height screen 8400 shown in FIG. 84 when the button 5808 is pushed, the height screen 8400 is replaced with a height fine adjustment screen 8500 shown in FIG. 85 .
- the screen 8500 shows in its current-screen region 5822 a height icon and a textual representation “Fine Adjust”, indicating to a user that the current screen is for fine adjustment of a height.
- the screen 8500 has five tabs: the tabs 6302 and 6310 (as shown in FIG.
- a tab 8502 for a “Zero” option correlated to the button 5808 a tab 8504 for “Units” option correlated to the button 5810 , and a tab 8506 for “Offset” option correlated to the button 5812 .
- the tab 6302 is chosen (e.g., by pushing the button 5806 ) from the screen 8500 , the interface 5800 directly returns to home and the screen 8500 is replaced with the home screen 5816 shown in FIG. 58 .
- the tab 6310 is chosen (e.g., by pushing the button 5814 ) from the screen 8500 , the interface 5800 goes back one level and the screen 8500 is replaced with the height screen 8400 shown in FIG. 84 .
- the screen 8500 is replaced with a height absolute zero screen 8600 shown in FIG. 86 .
- the screen 8600 has in its current-screen region 5822 a height icon and a word “Zero”, indicating the current screen 8600 is a height zero screen.
- the screen 8600 has in its settings region 5824 a letter “A”, indicating that the current screen 8600 is a height absolute zero screen.
- the screen 8500 is replaced with a default height units screen 8700 shown in FIG. 87 .
- the screen 8700 has in its current-screen region 5822 a height icon and a word “Units”, indicating the current screen 8700 is a height units screen.
- the screen 8700 includes three new tabs 8702 (Frac), 8704 (Dec) and 8706 (mm), which represent a fraction unit option, a decimal unit option, and a metric unit option, respectively.
- the tab 8702 representing a fraction unit option does not have a horizontal line above “Frac”, indicating the fraction unit option is chosen.
- the number in the height value 5846 is displayed in a format of “integer+fraction” (see, e.g., “2 1/16” in FIG. 87 ).
- the screen 8700 may be replaced with a height decimal unit screen 8800 shown in FIG. 88 .
- the tab 8704 representing a decimal unit option does not have a horizontal line above “Dec”, indicating the decimal unit option is chosen.
- the number in the distance value 5838 is displayed in a format of a decimal expansion (see, e.g., “5. 25 ” in FIG. 88 ).
- a user may toggle among the default height units (in fraction units) screen 8700 shown in FIG. 87 , the height decimal units screen 8800 shown in FIG. 88 , and a height metric unit screen (not shown).
- the screen 8500 is replaced with a height offset screen 8900 shown in FIG. 89 .
- the screen 8900 has in its current-screen region 5822 a height icon and a word “Offset”, indicating the current screen 8900 is a height offset screen.
- a user may add an offset height.
- the height screen 8400 may be replaced with a height recall screen 9000 shown in FIG. 90 .
- the screen 9000 shows in its current-screen region 5822 a height icon and a textual representation “Recall”, indicating to a user that the current screen is for recalling a saved height.
- Each saved height value may have a label number such as 1, 2, 3, etc.
- the screen 9000 shows a value 5846 (“2 1/16′′”) in its settings region 5824 .
- the number “16” to the left of “2 1/16′′” indicates that the label number for “2 1/16′′” is “16”.
- the screen 9000 includes two new tabs: a tab 9002 for a “+” option of moving to a saved height value with a higher label number than that shown on the current screen, and a tab 9004 for a “ ⁇ ” option of moving to a saved height value with a lower label number than that shown on the current screen.
- the “ ⁇ ” option the tab 9004
- the screen 9000 may be replaced with a screen 9100 shown in FIG.
- the screen 9000 may be replaced with a screen 9200 shown in FIG. 92 , where a saved height value with a higher label number “21” (“1 1/64′′”) is shown.
- the height screen 8400 may be replaced with a height save screen 9300 shown in FIG. 93 .
- the screen 9300 shows in its current-screen region 5822 a height icon and a textual representation “Save”, indicating to a user that the current screen is for saving a height value.
- the screen 9300 includes a “diskette” tab 9302 , representing an option of saving the current value 5846 (“2 1/16′′”).
- the current value “2 1/16′′” may be given a label number and may be saved into a memory of the user interface 5800 or a memory of the laser measurement and alignment device communicatively coupled to the user interface 5800 .
- the “diskette” icon may be altered to provide an alternative image more directly reflecting the current memory media being employed.
- the user interface may incorporate the usage of more than one type of memory media and thus include multiple memory media drives.
- FIG. 94 shows another exemplary height save screen 9400 , where a current value “5 ⁇ 8′′” is given a label number (“12”) and may be saved into a memory of the user interface 5800 or a memory of the laser measurement and alignment device communicatively coupled to the user interface 5800 .
- an operator of the user interface may input changes to the height settings directly.
- an alternative user input control mode may be included which allows the user to directly affect changes in the height settings.
- the user may be enabled to make corrections to the height in incremental amounts, such as 1 ⁇ 2 inch or 1 ⁇ 4 inch, 0.1′′ or 0.01,5 mm or 10 mm.
- the user interface may provide “+” and “ ⁇ ” tabs correlated to user input control buttons which allow for this type of adjustment.
- the direct change of height setting may be configured in a variety of ways and be within various locations of the height mode as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art.
- FIGS. 95 through 101 various exemplary screens 9500 through 10100 of the display 5802 of the user interface 5800 in a settings mode are shown.
- the settings screen 9500 shows in its current-screen region 5822 a settings icon and a textual representation “Settings”, indicating to a user that the current screen is in a settings mode.
- the settings screen 9500 has in its available-option region 5826 five tabs 6302 , 9502 , 9504 , 9506 , and 6310 different from the five tabs shown in FIG. 58 .
- the tab 6302 has a “home” icon unfilled with color representing an option of “returning to home directly” and is correlated to the button 5806 directly below.
- the tab 9502 represents an option of “(global) Units” and is correlated to the button 5808 directly below.
- the tab 9504 represents an option of “Calibration” and is correlated to the button 5810 directly below.
- the tab 9506 represents an option of “System” and is correlated to the button 5812 directly below.
- the tab 6310 has a “back arrow” icon representing an option of “back one level” and is correlated to the button 5814 directly below. That is, when the button 5814 is pushed, the interface 5800 goes back one level and the settings screen 9500 may be replaced with the home screen 5816 shown in FIG. 58 .
- the screen 9500 may be replaced with a default global units screen (see, e.g., 9600 shown in FIG. 96 ).
- the screen 9600 has in its current-screen region 5822 a settings icon and a textual representation “Global Units”, indicating the current screen 9600 is a global units screen.
- the screen 9600 includes three new tabs 9602 (Frac), 9604 (Dec) and 9606 (mm), which represent a global fraction unit option, a global decimal unit option, and a global metric unit option, respectively, for both a distance value 5838 and a height value 5846 .
- the tab 9602 representing a global fraction unit option does not have a horizontal line above “Frac”, indicating the fraction unit option is chosen.
- the number in a distance value 5838 (and/or a height value 5846 ) is displayed in a format of “integer+fraction” (see, e.g., “ 1/16” for a distance value 5838 in FIG. 96 , where the integer is not shown because the integer is zero).
- the screen 9600 may be replaced with a global metric units screen (see, e.g., 9700 shown in FIG. 97 ).
- the tab 9606 representing a global metric unit option does not have a horizontal line above “mm”, indicating the global metric unit option is chosen.
- a distance value 5838 (and/or a height value 5846 ) is displayed in a metric unit (see, e.g., “1.58 mm” in FIG. 97 , where mm is millimeter).
- buttons 5808 , 5810 , and 5812 a user may toggle among a default global units (in fraction units) screen (see, e.g., 9600 shown in FIG. 96 ), a global metric units screen (see, e.g., 9700 shown in FIG. 97 ), and a global decimal units screen (not shown).
- a default global units (in fraction units) screen see, e.g., 9600 shown in FIG. 96
- a global metric units screen see, e.g., 9700 shown in FIG. 97
- a global decimal units screen not shown.
- the screen 9500 may be replaced with a calibration screen (see, e.g., 5600 shown in FIG. 56 , and 5700 shown FIG. 57 ).
- a calibration screen Through a calibration screen, a user may perform all kinds of calibrations to a height, an angle, and a distance.
- the user interface 5800 may have a drop-down menu (not shown) on the display 5802 to enable a user to select a calibration parameter from the drop-down menu.
- a drop-down menu may provide kerf information for various kinds of saw blades, fence orientation information (horizontal or vertical), fence type (Unifense, Biesemeyer fence, or the like).
- a saw blade may have a bar code or a RFID (Radio Frequency Identification) number attached to the saw blade body.
- the relevant information e.g., kerf, and the like
- the relevant information may be automatically entered into the user interface 5800 to enable the user interface 5800 to perform the calibration automatically.
- the screen 9500 may be replaced with a system screen (see, e.g., 9800 shown in FIG. 98 ).
- the screen 9800 has in its current-screen region 5822 a settings icon and a textual representation “System”, indicating the current screen 9800 is a system screen.
- the screen 9800 includes three new tabs 9802 , 9804 and 9806 , which represent a sound option, a brightness option, and a laser time out option, respectively.
- the screen 9800 may be replaced with a sound screen (see, e.g., 9900 shown in FIG. 99 ).
- the screen 9900 has in its current-screen region 5822 a sound icon and a textual representation “Sound”, indicating the current screen 9900 is a sound screen.
- the screen 9900 includes two new tabs 9902 (“+”) and 9904 (“ ⁇ ”), which represent an option of increasing a sound volume and an option of decreasing a sound volume, respectively.
- the screen 9900 includes a bar-type scale 9906 showing the current scale of the volume being ”5”.
- the tab 9902 is chosen and the sound volume is increased to a scale larger than “5”.
- the tab 9904 is chosen and the sound volume is decreased to a scale smaller than “5”. When the scale is decreased to zero (“0”), the sound is turned off.
- the sound feedback mechanism provided by the user interface 5800 presents an audible signal to a user when a tool is in the selected position (e.g., when a saw blade has a desired height or angle, when a fence is in a desired distance from a saw blade, or the like).
- the sound feedback mechanism may emit via a microphone/speaker a series of beeps or other noises to a user that guide the user in the positioning of the tool. For example, the beeps may become louder, more frequent, and/or change in pitch the closer the tool is to the desired position.
- the user interface 5800 may provide visual feedback mechanism (not shown) which presents a visual signal on its display 5802 .
- this visual signal may be as simple as a light or other symbol being displayed on the display 5802 when the tool is in the desired position.
- arrows or other visual direction-guiding signals may be presented on the display 5802 to guide the user to the desired position of the tool.
- the screen 9800 may be replaced with a brightness screen (see, e.g., 10000 shown in FIG. 100 ).
- the screen 10000 has in its current-screen region 5822 a brightness icon and a textual representation “Brightness”, indicating the current screen 10000 is a brightness screen.
- the screen 10000 includes two new tabs 10002 (“+”) and 10004 (“ ⁇ ”), which represent an option of increasing screen brightness and an option of decreasing screen brightness, respectively.
- the screen 10000 includes a bar-type scale 10006 showing the current brightness scale being “8”.
- the tab 10002 is chosen and the screen brightness is increased to a scale larger than “8”.
- the tab 10004 is chosen and the screen brightness is decreased to a scale smaller than “8”.
- the screen 9800 may be replaced with a laser time out screen (see, e.g., 10100 shown in FIG. 101 ).
- the screen 10100 has in its current-screen region 5822 a laser time out icon and a textual representation “Laser Time Out”, indicating the current screen 10100 is a laser time out screen.
- the screen 10100 includes two new tabs 10102 (“+”) and 10104 (“ ⁇ ”), which represent an option of increasing a time period for laser time out and an option of decreasing a time period for laser time out, respectively.
- the screen 10100 includes a bar-type scale 10106 showing three time periods for laser time out: 10 seconds, 30 seconds, and 60 seconds.
- the current time period for laser time out is shown to be “30 seconds” in FIG. 101 . That is, the laser measurement and alignment device will be turned off after it is on for 30 seconds.
- the tab 10102 is chosen and the time period for laser time out is increased to “60 seconds”.
- the button 5810 from the screen 10100 By pushing the button 5810 from the screen 10100 , the tab 10104 is chosen and the time period for laser time out is decreased to “10 seconds”.
- An alternative embodiment of the bar-type scale 10106 is shown in 10100 of FIG. 62 , where the current time period for laser time out is shown to be “10 seconds”, and a user may use the button 5808 to increase this time period and may use the button 5810 to decrease this time period.
- a nail gun 100 including a stud finder laser indicator assembly 102 is shown in FIGS. 102 through 104 .
- the stud finder laser indicator assembly 102 includes a housing 104 which encompasses a laser indicator assembly 106 and a stud finder detector assembly 108 .
- the housing 104 is enabled to couple with a nose casting assembly 110 .
- the nose casting assembly 110 couples with a nail magazine 103 and a casing 105 , the casing 105 housing a nail driving assembly.
- the casing 105 further couples with a handle 107 which couples with the nail magazine 103 .
- a trigger 109 is operationally coupled with the nail driving assembly.
- the coupling of the stud finder laser indicator assembly 102 with the nose casing assembly 110 occurs through a mounting member 111 coupled with the housing 104 .
- the mounting member is a slide and latch mechanism although it is understood that the coupling may occur by various mechanisms as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art.
- the stud finder laser indicator assembly 102 is enabled to detect the presence of a stud behind a first surface and then indicate its location by establishing a laser indicator/marker upon the first surface.
- the laser indicator may take a variety of forms, such as a point of light, a cross-hair configuration, a line configuration, and the like.
- FIG. 104 an alternative embodiment of the stud finder laser indicator assembly 102 , is shown.
- the assembly 102 further comprises a second indicator assembly 112 , which is a light emitting diode that provides a secondary visual indicator to the user of the present invention when a stud has been detected and located.
- the second indicator assembly may take a variety of forms without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention.
- the second indicator assembly may be a series of light emitting diodes.
- the second indicator assembly may provide an audio signal when the stud is detected and/or located.
- the stud finder laser indicator assembly 102 of FIG. 104 includes a selector assembly 114 .
- the selector assembly 114 comprises a multiple position switch 116 .
- the selector assembly 114 enables the user of the assembly 102 to selectively determine its operation. For instance, the user may prefer not to use the assembly 102 for a particular task and may position the selector assembly 114 in a position which disables the assembly 102 .
- the selector assembly 114 may enable the multiple position switch 116 with two or more positions for enabling the assembly 102 to accomplish a variety of tasks.
- the mounting member 111 has been reconfigured as a slide adapter for coupling with the nose casting assembly 110 which includes a slide 118
- a nail gun 1050 similar to that shown and described in FIGS. 102 through 104 , comprises a laser indicator assembly 1052 coupled with a nose casting assembly 1054 .
- the laser indicator assembly 1052 is employed by the user of the nail gun 1050 to establish a visual indicator/marker on a first surface 1056 .
- the visual marker is used by the operator of the nail gun 1050 to establish where the next nail is to be driven. In the present embodiment, this is accomplished by the laser indicator assembly 1052 establishing a laser line on the first surface 1056 .
- the laser line coincides with the position of a stud 1058 behind the first surface 1056 . It is understood that the operator of the nail gun 1050 may employ the nail gun 1050 simply as a tool to provide a point of reference for where the next nail will be driven.
- a nail gun 1060 similar to that shown and described in FIGS. 102 through 104 , includes a stud finder detector assembly 1061 coupled with a nose casting assembly 1062 .
- the stud finder detector assembly 1061 establishes the presence and location of a stud 1063 behind a first surface 1064 .
- the stud finder detector assembly 1061 further includes a visual indication assembly 1065 , which is a light emitting diode. The light emitting diode provides a visually detectable signal for the user of the nail gun 1060 when the stud 1063 is found.
- the stud finder laser indicator assembly and stud finder detector assembly may use various technologies for determining the presence and location of a stud behind a first surface. Relevant technologies may include, radar, sonar, radio frequency, electrical sensing devices, and the like.
- FIG. 107 indicates the use of a slide and latch mechanism for coupling a stud finder detector assembly 1070 , similar to that shown and described in FIG. 106 , to a nose casting assembly 1071 .
- a slide mounting member 1072 is coupled with the stud finder detector assembly 1070 and engages with a slide adapter receiver assembly 1073 .
- a latch 1074 disposed on the nose casting assembly 1071 engages with the stud finder detector assembly 1070 when proper engagement has been established.
- Alternative coupling mechanisms may be employed, such as a compression lock system, to affix the stud finder detector assembly to the nose casting assembly. Powering a stud finder detector assembly 1080 may be accomplished through a variety of ways as shown in FIGS. 108 and 109 .
- FIG. 108 and 109 FIG.
- FIG. 109 shows the stud finder detector assembly 1080 including a battery cavity 1081 which is capable of receiving a battery 1082 .
- the battery cavity 1081 may be configured to receive various types of batteries.
- the battery 1082 is a lithium ion battery which may be rechargeable.
- the battery cavity 1081 may be configured to receive standard batteries, such as triple AAA, double AA, C, and D type batteries.
- the battery cavity 1081 operably engages with a cover 1083 which protects the battery cavity 1081 and secures the battery 1082 in place.
- FIG. 109 shows a stud finder detector assembly 1090 including an AC adapter 1092 for receiving AC power through a standard AC cord 1094 .
- the stud finder detector assembly may be configured to include a rechargeable battery with the AC adapter 1092 providing the means through which the battery is recharged. It is also contemplated that the stud finder detector assembly may be configured to require a coupling with an AC source in order to operate. In the alternative, the stud finder detector assembly may be powered by a fuel cell coupled within a receiving cavity of the stud finder detector assembly.
- the fuel cell may be a variety of types as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art.
- the stud finder detector assembly shown in FIG. 109 , further includes a port 1096 .
- the port 1096 enables communicative coupling of the stud finder detector assembly with a peripheral device.
- the peripheral device may include a variety of computing systems as may be contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art.
- the port 1096 may allow the user of the stud finder detector assembly to perform diagnostic operations upon the system to determine if it is functioning properly.
- the port 1096 may be a serial cable connector port, infrared port, radio frequency port, and the like. Use of wireless communication technology is contemplated to establish a network including the stud finder detector assembly of the present invention.
- the coupling of the stud finder detector assembly with the nose casting assembly of the nail gun may provide a power coupling.
- the power coupling may direct an energy source being employed to power the nail gun into the stud finder detector assembly.
- This power coupling may be configured to provide power in a continuous manner or may be enabled to provide power upon an action taken by the operator of the nail gun.
- the stud finder detector assembly may be provided power when the trigger of the nail gun is at least partially depressed by the operator of the nail gun.
- the trigger may employ a multiple stage system allowing the operator to proceed through different trigger positions before actually firing the nail gun. In the present example, the trigger may have a first and a second position.
- the first position may complete the power coupling with the stud finder detector assembly allowing the operator to locate a stud.
- the operator may be required to hold the trigger in this position during operation of the stud finder detector assembly.
- the second position engages the nail driving assembly of the nail gun and drives the nail. It is contemplated that the multiple stage trigger system may allow an operator to engage the trigger into a position and then physically release the trigger. The trigger system, once engaged, may continue to allow operation of the additional features, such as the stud finder detector assembly.
- a stud finder detector assembly 1100 including a light emitting diode 1102 is shown.
- the stud finder detector assembly 1100 detects the presence of a stud 1104 behind a surface 1106 .
- the light emitting diode lights up providing a visual indication to a user that the stud 1104 has been detected.
- a laser indication assembly 1110 is shown in FIGS. 111 through 114 .
- the laser indication assembly 1110 includes a housing 1111 coupled with a lens 1112 .
- the housing 1111 encompasses a laser source which operationally engages the lens 1112 for establishing a laser line 1142 and a visual indicator 1144 on a first surface. It is understood that the laser source employed with the current embodiment of the present invention may comprise a variety of configurations as previously described throughout the specification.
- the housing 1111 further includes a slide mounting member 1114 which engages a slide adapter receiver 1115 disposed upon a nose casting assembly 1116 of a nail gun. As described above with respect to the stud finder detector assembly the housing 1111 is coupled with the nose casting assembly 1116 by the slide properly engaging a latch 1113 mechanism.
- alternative coupling assemblies may be employed without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention.
- Powering the laser source of the laser indication assembly 1110 may be accomplished through a variety of mechanisms.
- the laser indication assembly 1110 similar to the stud finder detector assembly, may be powered by a battery 1122 received within a battery cavity 1123 .
- a cover 1124 may engage the battery 1122 and the battery cavity 1123 to affix the position of the battery 1122 .
- the laser indication assembly 1110 may further include a selector assembly comprising a switch 1125 operationally coupled with the power source.
- the switch 1125 is a two position switch allowing the operator of the laser indication assembly 1110 to determine its usage. It is understood that the switch 1125 may be enabled to achieve a plurality of positions.
- FIG. 113 illustrates the laser indication assembly 1110 employing an AC adapter 1132 for receiving AC power through the use of an AC cord 1134 .
- the laser indication assembly may be configured to include a rechargeable battery with the AC adapter 1132 providing the means through which the battery is recharged.
- the laser indication assembly may be configured to require a coupling with an AC source in order to operate.
- the laser indication assembly may be powered by a fuel cell coupled within a receiving cavity of the laser indication assembly.
- the fuel cell may be a variety of types as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art. Similar to the system described above for powering the stud finder detector assembly, the laser indication assembly may receive power through a power coupling interface located on the nose casting assembly.
- the laser indication assembly shown in FIG. 113 , further includes a port 1136 .
- the port 1136 enables communicative coupling of the stud finder detector assembly with a peripheral device.
- the peripheral device may include a variety of computing systems as may be contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art.
- the port 1136 may allow the user of the stud finder detector assembly to perform diagnostic operations upon the system to determine if it is functioning properly.
- the port 1136 may be a serial cable connector port, infrared port, radio frequency port, and the like. Use of wireless communication technology is contemplated to establish a network including the stud finder detector assembly of the present invention.
- the laser source of the laser indication assembly establishes a visual indicator 1144 on a surface 1146 , in FIG. 114 .
- the visual indicator 1144 is a cross configuration, however, it is contemplated that the visual indicator may take a variety of forms, such as a point of light, a continuous line, and the like.
- the visual indicator 1144 is located on the surface 1146 in relation to the location of a stud 1148 located behind the surface 1146 .
- the visual indicator 1144 establishes, for the operator of the nail gun, the location where a nail may be driven.
- the correlation between the location of the stud 1148 and the visual indicator 1144 may be direct, as shown, or the visual indicator 1144 may be established at any location upon the surface 1146 .
- a laser indication assembly 1150 may be coupled with a stud finder detector assembly 1151 , as shown in FIGS. 115 through 122 .
- a housing 1152 of the laser indication assembly is coupled with a first latch member 1153 and a second latch member 1154 .
- the first and second latch member 1153 and 1154 operably engage with a first receiving mount 1155 and a second receiving mount 1156 , respectively.
- the first and second receiving mounts 1155 and 1156 are included in a housing 1157 of the stud finder detector assembly 1151 .
- the number, location, and type of assemblies used to couple the laser indication assembly 1150 to the stud finder detector assembly 1151 may vary as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art.
- a communications port 1158 is included in the housing 1157 of the stud finder detector assembly 1151 .
- the communications port 1158 enables the laser indication assembly 1150 to communicatively couple with the stud finder detector assembly 1151 .
- the communicative coupling allows the stud finder detector assembly 1151 and the laser indication assembly 1150 to operationally engage in a co-operative manner.
- the stud finder detector assembly 1151 may communicate to the laser indication assembly 1150 the detection of a stud behind a surface.
- the laser indication assembly 1150 may initiate operation and provide a visual indicator upon the surface identifying for a user the location of the stud.
- both the laser indication assembly 1150 and the stud finder detection assembly 1151 may include independent power sources.
- the exemplary embodiment shown in FIGS. 115 through 122 may provide a system which is operational from a single power source.
- the communications port 1158 may be adapted to provide a power coupling, thereby, enabling the laser indication assembly 1150 to receive power through the stud finder detection assembly 1151 .
- a flow of power in the opposite direction, through the laser indication assembly 1150 to the stud finder detector assembly 1151 is also contemplated by the present invention.
- a power coupling, independent of the communication port 1158 , between the two assemblies may be established in a variety of locations upon both housings.
- the stud finder detector assembly 1151 further includes a light emitting diode 1159 .
- the light emitting diode 1159 provides a visual indicator to a user when a stud has been detected.
- the light emitting diode 1159 may be temporarily disabled.
- the light emitting diode becomes operational again.
- the light emitting diode 1159 may continue in operation even when the laser indication assembly 1150 is coupled with the stud finder detector assembly 1151 . As can be seen in FIG.
- the combination stud finder detector and laser indication assembly (SFDLIA) 1165 is coupled with a nail gun 1160 .
- the SFDLIA 1165 detects the location of a stud 1161 behind a surface 1162 and then visually identifies that location to a user of the nail gun.
- the visual indicator is a cross hairs marker 1163 .
- the SFDLIA 1165 may establish a visual indication field which identifies the location and approximate width of the stud detected. As can be seen in FIG. 117 , the SFDLIA 1165 projects a pair of dashed lines 1172 for establishing the approximate outer boundaries of the stud detected behind the surface. In FIG. 118 , the stud is located and then a pair of indicator markers 1182 establishes the approximate outer boundaries of the stud for the user of the nail gun. In the present embodiment, the markers consist of alternating line-dash-line configurations. Referring now to FIG. 119 , a pair of continuous laser lines 1192 establishes the approximate outer boundaries of a stud.
- the SFDLIA 1165 may be used to establish the width of a stud and provide a visual marker to a user of a nail gun where to drive the next nail. As seen in FIG. 120 , the SFDLIA 1165 establishes the approximate outer boundaries by using a pair of visual markers 1202 , which are points of light, and then establishes a cross-hairs marker 1204 for indicating the approximate center of the stud. The center marker provides the user of the nail gun with a visual indication of where to drive the nail in order to engage the stud behind the surface. Other embodiments, such as that shown in FIG.
- 121 may include establishing the approximate stud width using a visual marker 1212 which establishes a pair of points of light and then establishing a dashed center line 1214 for the user to follow for driving the nail. Still further, the present invention may provide dashed line visual markers 1222 for identifying stud width and a line-dash-line visual marker 1224 for the center line, as may be seen in FIG. 122 .
- a stud finder laser indicator assembly 1230 is pivotally coupled with a nose casting assembly 1231 of a nail gun 1232 , in FIG. 123 .
- the pivotal coupling of the stud finder laser indicator assembly 1230 is accomplished by use of a swivel assembly coupled to the nose casting assembly 1231 and the stud finder laser indicator assembly 1230 . It is contemplated that various assemblies may be used to provide pivotal movement.
- a stud finder detector assembly 1240 is coupled with a laser indication assembly 1241 .
- the stud finder detector assembly 1240 is further coupled to a nose casting assembly 1242 of a nail gun 1243 .
- the laser indication assembly 1241 is pivotally coupled with the stud finder detector assembly 1240 .
- a swivel assembly provides the pivotal movement of the laser indication assembly 1241 , however, alternative assemblies may be employed.
- the laser indication assembly 1241 is communicatively coupled with the stud finder detector assembly 1240 through the use of a cable 1244 .
- the cable 1244 couples with the stud finder detector assembly 1240 and the laser indication assembly 1241 through communication ports individually located on the rear side of each assembly.
- the pivotal motion provided in FIGS. 123 and 124 to the assemblies allows the laser to maintain a visual marker on a stud, once the location of the stud is detected. For example, an initial position of a stud behind a surface is detected. The laser establishes a visual indicator 1233 and 1245 on the surface in relation to the position of the stud. Then the user of the nail gun continues to move the nail gun and pass by the location of the stud. However, using the pivoting capabilities of the assemblies in FIGS. 123 and 124 , the laser is enabled to maintain the visual marker in position on the surface relative to the location of the detected stud.
- the stud finder laser indicator assembly 1250 comprises a housing 1250 A including a first side 1250 B, a second side 1250 C, a third side 1250 D, a fourth side 1250 E, a fifth side 1250 F, and a sixth side 1250 G.
- the third side 1250 D is configured to include a first arm 1250 H and the fourth side 1250 E is configured to include a second arm 1250 I.
- the fifth side 1250 F further includes a mounting member 1250 J which enables the coupling of the horseshoe stud finder laser indicator assembly 1250 with a nose casting assembly 1251 of a nail gun 1252 , as shown in FIG. 125 .
- the horseshoe stud finder laser indicator assembly 1250 is shown to include a plurality of lens located about the circumference of a first side of the assembly.
- Each of the lenses is enabled to emit a laser beam provided from a laser source.
- Each lens may be individually set to emit the laser beam in a specific pattern.
- a first lens 1253 , a second lens 1254 , a third lens 1255 , and a fourth lens 1256 may be set to establish a first visual marker indicating a first approximate outer boundary of the width of a stud detected behind a surface.
- a fifth lens 1257 , a sixth lens 1258 , a seventh lens 1259 , and an eighth lens 1260 may be set to establish a second visual marker indicating a second approximate outer boundary of the width of the stud detected behind the surface.
- a ninth lens 1261 , a tenth lens 1262 , an eleventh lens 1263 , a twelfth lens 1264 , and a thirteenth lens 1265 may be set to establish a visual marker indicating a location which is the approximate center of the stud and/or indicating the location where the next nail may be driven by the user.
- the visual marker may be established as a continuous visual pattern or may be a non-continuous pattern.
- a non-continuous pattern may be a progression of visual markers alternating between an on and off state to provide a virtual visual field.
- some of the lenses may emit a laser beam and establish a visual marker in a continuous pattern while other lenses may emit a laser beam in a non-continuous pattern.
- the configuration of the pattern established may vary without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention.
- the horseshoe stud finder laser indicator assembly 1250 may employ a plurality of laser sources.
- the number of laser sources is between two and thirteen.
- the present invention may provide an individual laser source operably coupled with each of the lenses disposed on the housing 1250 A.
- various forms of optical technologies may be required to be employed in order to establish a visual field on a surface. As stated previously, these optical technologies may include beam splitters, reflectors, light signal enhancing instruments, and the like.
- the light signal enhancing instruments may be photomultipliers comprising a variety of designs, such as photomultiplier end-on tubes, photomultiplier side-on tubes, or the like.
- the photomultipliers may accept an incident laser beam and intensify the light signal by increasing the number of electrons in order to maintain sufficient light signal strength as the laser beam is being passed down from one optical splitter to the next.
- the light signal enhancing instruments may be positioned in front of the laser sources in order to provide optimum light signal output.
- the light signal enhancing instruments may include a secondary laser source, such that the incident laser beam received has its signal strength increased.
- a low power laser source may be included within the light signal enhancing instrument which contributes a second light signal to the existing laser beam in order to make up for a loss of light signal intensity.
- Such a system of multiple light signal enhancing instruments may decrease production costs by substituting low power laser sources for separate and independent laser sources located throughout the laser apparatus. It is understood that the configuration and numbers of light signal enhancing instruments may vary as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art.
- the horseshoe stud finder laser indicator assembly 1250 further includes a stud sensor assembly 1266 for detecting the stud.
- the stud sensor assembly 1266 may employ various technologies, as described previously, for detecting the location of a stud behind a surface.
- the stud sensor assembly 1266 uses a single lens 1267 through which the stud sensing technology is employed.
- the stud sensor assembly 1266 may comprise a plurality of lenses through which the stud sensing technology may be employed. The lenses may be distributed in various locations on the first side 1250 B of the housing 1250 A without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention.
- FIG. 127 a third embodiment of an integrated stud finder laser indicator assembly 1270 , is shown.
- the integrated stud finder laser indicator assembly 1270 is coupled with a nose casting assembly 1271 of a nail gun 1272 .
- the visual marker establishes a visual marker 1273 which indicates the approximate width of a stud 1275 and an indicator 1274 which approximates the center line of the stud 1275 .
- the integrated stud finder laser indicator assembly 1270 comprises a housing 1273 which encompasses a laser assembly for emitting a laser beam and a stud sensor assembly for detecting the location of a stud.
- the stud finder detector assembly, the laser indication assembly, or any one of the stud finder laser indicator assemblies may be integrated with the nose casting assembly of a nail gun.
- the laser assemblies used within any of the previously mentioned embodiments of FIGS. 102 through 127 may include multiple laser sources for establishing the visual marker upon a surface.
- the number and type of laser sources employed may vary as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art.
- a laser indication assembly may employ two laser sources, one being a high powered laser emitter and the other being a low powered laser emitter.
- the two laser sources may emit their incident laser beams through a single lens assembly or two or more lens assemblies disposed upon the housing of the laser indication assembly.
- one of the embodiments of the combination stud finder laser indicator assembly may employ similar laser technology.
- the tracker nail gun assembly 1280 comprises a nail magazine 1281 coupled with a nose casting assembly 1282 .
- the nose casting assembly 1282 couples with a casing 1283 , which houses a nail driving assembly operationally coupled with a trigger 1285 .
- the casing 1283 couples with a handle 1284 which is coupled with the nail magazine 1281 . It is understood that the nail magazine 1281 may be enabled to angularly adjust relative to the nose casting assembly 1282 and the handle 1284 .
- Disposed on the casing 1283 is a tracker assembly 1286 .
- the tracker assembly 1286 comprises a user interface assembly 1287 operationally coupled with a stud finder laser indicator assembly 1288 .
- the user interface assembly 1287 comprises a computing assembly including a display screen 1289 operationally coupled with a first selector 1290 , a second selector 1291 , a third selector 1292 , and a fourth selector 1293 .
- the display screen 1289 is enabled to display information, such as menu screens and directional capabilities which are then accessed through use of the selectors. For example, the display screen 1289 may prompt a user to determine the status of the stud finder and the laser, such as whether they are on or off. Further, the display screen may provide laser configuration options as seen in FIG. 130 allowing the user to select the type of visual field they wish to establish on a surface.
- the computing assembly may provide a monitoring function that is displayed to the user on display screen 1289 .
- a visual display is provided showing the user where the stud is in relation to the tracker nail gun assembly 1280 .
- the display screen 1289 provides information that the tracker nail gun assembly 1280 is positioned on the right edge of the stud. This allows the user to make any necessary corrections in order to center the position of the tracker nail gun assembly 1280 , as shown in FIG. 132 .
- the display screen 1289 includes a “Centered” readout which provides a secondary verification to the user of the positioning of the tracker nail gun assembly 1280 .
- the screens shown in the preferred embodiments of FIGS. 129 through 132 are exemplary, they should not be read as limiting.
- the user interface of the current embodiment may be enabled with similar capabilities and configurations as those shown and described in FIGS. 1 through 101 .
- the graphical user interface 5800 described in FIGS. 54 through 101 may be employed with the current embodiment of the present invention.
- the tracker nail gun assembly 1280 is shown, detecting the location of a stud behind a surface and identifying the location of that stud.
- the user interface assembly 1287 indicates to the user that the stud finder assembly is operational and has detected the presence of a stud behind the surface. This is shown by icon 1294 on the display screen 1289 .
- the tracker nail gun assembly 1280 may then use the laser indication assembly to establish a visual marker on the surface, such as the line-dash-line configuration shown in FIG. 134 , to indicate the position of the stud to the user.
- the tracker assembly 1286 may be enabled to determine the difference between the stud 1336 located behind a surface 1338 and other items, such as those mentioned above.
- the tracker assembly 1286 may further be able to display to the user of the tracker nail gun assembly 1280 a warning indication when the nail gun is positioned to drive a nail into one of these items.
- the tracker assembly 1286 may use various technologies for determining the substance of an item detected behind a surface.
- the technologies may include radar, sonar, electrical resistance detection, and the like as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art. Further, it is contemplated that the assemblies shown and described previously in FIGS. 102 through 132 may employ such technological capability.
- a tracker nail gun assembly 1360 is shown.
- the tracker nail gun assembly 1360 comprises a nail magazine 1361 coupled with a nose casting assembly 1362 .
- a casing 1363 is coupled with the nose casting assembly 1362 and a handle 1364 .
- the casing 1363 houses a nail driving assembly which is operationally coupled with a trigger 1365 .
- the handle 1364 is coupled with the nail magazine 1361 and it is understood that the nail magazine 1361 may be adjustably coupled with the handle 1364 and the nose casting assembly 1362 .
- Disposed on the casing 1363 is a user interface assembly 1366 .
- the user interface assembly 1366 is communicatively coupled with a stud finder detector assembly 1367 and a laser indication assembly 1368 .
- the laser indication assembly 1368 is communicatively coupled with the stud finder detector assembly 1367 .
- the user interface assembly 1366 comprises a computing assembly with a display screen 1375 and selectors 1376 , 1377 , 1378 , and 1379 , as described previously in FIGS. 128 thorough 135 .
- FIG. 137 shows a display of the display screen 1375 querying a user of the nail gun as to the types of studs being searched for at the work site. The user may enter the configuration of the stud, indicating such features as size and shape or whether the stud is composed of wood or steel. It is understood that the display shown in FIG. 137 on display screen 1375 is exemplary and may be displayed in any of the configurations of the tracker nail gun assembly shown in FIGS.
- a first adapter 1370 may be communicatively coupled with the computing system of the user interface assembly 1366 and allow a cable 1369 to couple with it.
- the cable 1369 may couple with a second adapter 1371 located on the stud finder detector assembly 1367 , thereby establishing a communicative link between the user interface assembly 1366 and the stud finder detector assembly 1367 .
- the laser indication assembly 1368 is communicatively coupled with the stud finder detector assembly 1367 through a coupling assembly (not shown). The coupling assembly allows the laser indication assembly 1368 to be removed from the stud finder detector assembly 1367 .
- FIG. 1 is a communicatively coupled with the computing system of the user interface assembly 1366 and allow a cable 1369 to couple with it.
- the cable 1369 may couple with a second adapter 1371 located on the stud finder detector assembly 1367 , thereby establishing a communicative link between the user interface assembly 1366 and the stud finder detector assembly 1367 .
- the laser indication assembly 1368 is communicatively coupled with the stud finder detector assembly 1367 by a cable 1372 .
- the cable 1372 couples with a third port 1373 disposed on the stud finder detector assembly 1367 and a fourth port 1374 disposed on the laser indication assembly 1368 .
- the communicative link between the user interface assembly 1366 and the stud finder detector assembly 1367 and the laser indication assembly 1368 may be established using wireless technologies, such as infrared, radio frequency, Bluetooth, and the like.
- FIG. 138 shows a user interface assembly 1381 , including a laser indication assembly 1382 , communicatively coupled with a stud finder detector assembly 1383 .
- a cable 1386 establishes the communicative link between the user interface assembly 1381 and the stud finder detector assembly 1383 .
- the cable 1386 couples with a first port 1387 and a second port 1388 .
- the user interface assembly 1381 includes a display screen and selectors as previously described in FIGS. 128 through 137 .
- the user interface is coupled with a casing 1384 and the stud finder detector assembly 1383 is coupled to a nose casting assembly 1385 .
- FIG. 139 shows the tracker drill assembly 1390 coupled with a stud finder laser indicator assembly 1391 .
- FIG. 140 shows the tracker drill assembly 1390 coupled with a stud finder detector assembly 1401 which is coupled with a laser indication assembly 1402 .
- the coupling of the stud finder laser indicator assembly 1391 and/or the stud finder detector assembly 1401 may occur using any of the variety of assemblies described previously in FIGS. 102 through 138 .
- the laser indication assembly 1402 may be pivotally coupled with the stud finder detector assembly 1401 .
- the tracker drill assembly 1390 comprises a casing 1392 , surrounding a motor assembly, coupled with an arbor assembly 1393 which is operationally coupled with a bit 1394 .
- the bit 1394 may be either a screwdriver bit or a drill bit.
- a trigger 1395 is operationally coupled with the motor assembly.
- a handle 1396 couples with the casing 1392 and a power cord 1397 runs through the handle 1396 to supply power to the motor assembly.
- the tracker drill assembly 1390 may include a motor assembly that provides a clutch to prevent over drilling. For example, drywallers use a clutched drywall gun to avoid drilling the screws through the drywall.
- the tracker drill assembly 1390 with a clutched motor assembly of the present invention may be used by drywallers and provide assistance in establishing and indicating the location of a stud behind a piece of drywall. Further, it is contemplated that the tracker drill assembly 1390 may use a variety of power sources, such as batteries, rechargeable batteries, fuel cells, and the like, without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Optics & Photonics (AREA)
- Wood Science & Technology (AREA)
- Forests & Forestry (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Radar, Positioning & Navigation (AREA)
- Remote Sensing (AREA)
- Length Measuring Devices By Optical Means (AREA)
- Sawing (AREA)
Abstract
Description
- The present invention is a continuation-in-part of U.S. application Ser. No. 10/445,290, filed on May 21, 2003, which claimed priority under 35 U.S.C. §119 to U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/429,840, filed on Nov. 27, 2002, and U.S. application Ser. No. 10/413,455, filed on Apr. 14, 2003 which claimed priority under 35 U.S.C. § 119 to U.S.
Provisional Application 60/414,200, filed on Sep. 27, 2002 and U.S.Provisional Application 60/373,752, filed on Apr. 18, 2002, herein incorporated by reference in their entireties. - The present invention generally relates to the field of power tools, and particularly to a power tool control system for use with a variety of power tools, such as table saws, belt sanders, lathes, disc sanders, planers, wood shapers, boring machines, jointers, drill presses, and the like.
- Power tools are used to accomplish a variety of tasks. No matter the task, the production of accurate and precise work is a high priority. Unfortunately, the precision and accuracy of work performed on these power tools is limited by human error and sub-standard equipment. Even when equipment with the latest advances, such as laser guidance technology, is employed it is often the case that the use of such technology is difficult for the equipment operator. The difficulties experienced by an operator may be due to a variety of reasons, such as inadequate instructional aids available from the manufacturer or dealer, overly complex operational requirements, or a poorly designed and organized user interface. Such difficulties have rendered many valuable advances in tool technology unpopular or obsolete due to operator dissatisfaction and frustration.
- Many power tools today have incorporated guidance mechanisms, such as laser guidance technology, into their power tool assembly. These mechanisms assist an operator in identifying and maintaining an accurate work product as the power tool executes a function upon a work piece. However, the operator is still required to establish the location of operation and this may result in imprecise and inaccurate work piece production due to imprecise measurements and settings established by the operator. Further, it is often necessary to perform different functions and then return to previous settings. Consequently, the operator is forced to establish and then re-establish settings, which may lead to further imprecision and inaccuracy in the work product produced due to operator error.
- Additionally, the use of advanced technology such as the laser guidance systems often provide user interface technology which is limited in capabilities, lacks a coherent and easily understood organizational structure for the information it gathers and provides to the operator, and makes accessing the information made available by it use difficult due to low quality display mechanisms and user interaction assemblies. Many of the difficulties experienced by operator's when employing the user interface devices may primarily be the result of a focus on the technology and not the user. For example, the user interface may provide the ability to access numerous features but have a display mechanism that is so cluttered that it becomes burdensome to decipher the relevant information. Many times, to correct for this problem, the user interface is stripped of numerous capabilities and the user is left with insufficient resources to accomplish their tasks.
- Therefore, it would be desirable to provide a power tool control system that enables a power tool operator to establish precise and accurate measurements and settings for a power tool and provide a user friendly user interface assembly in order to ensure work product of a high quality.
- Accordingly, the present invention is a power tool control system that enables a user to operate a power tool through a graphical user interface communicatively coupled with a non-contact measurement and alignment device. The graphical user interface correlates user engageable selectors with a logically related menu of power tool setting options displayed on a display screen in a high quality and easily readable format. The non-contact measurement and alignment device uses one or more lasers to determine power tool settings and establish proper alignment based on user needs.
- In a second aspect of the present invention a table saw comprising a frame coupled with a table, said table having an aperture. A trunion moveably and operatively connected to said frame, said trunion supporting a blade and drive assembly, said blade capable of being operatively extended from said table aperture, said blade being operatively tilted in at least one axis tangent to said table. A fence moveably coupled with said table and generally moveable parallel to said blade. A non-contact measurement and alignment device operative with said table saw, the non-contact measurement and alignment device for determining at least two of a table saw setting: (i) blade height, (ii) blade angle, and (iii) fence to blade distance. A graphical-user-interface communicatively coupled with the non-contact measurement and alignment device, the graphical-user-interface for user operation of said table saw for indicating at least two of a table saw setting: (i) blade height, (ii) blade angle, and (iii) fence to blade distance.
- In a third aspect of the present invention a nail gun, including a nose casting assembly coupled with a casing housing a nail driving assembly, comprises a stud finder detector assembly coupled with the nose casting assembly, the stud finder detector assembly for detecting the presence of a stud behind a first surface. A laser indication assembly including a laser source for emitting a laser beam is communicatively coupled with the stud finder detector assembly, the laser indication assembly for indicating the location of the stud. Wherein the laser beam establishes a visual marker on the first surface indicating the position of the stud.
- It is an object of the present invention to provide a user friendly power tool control system which presents information and options to the user in a logical manner and allows the user to move within the entire range of applications simply and easily. The correlation of the position of the user engaged selectors with the on screen display options provides an easy to follow progression of power tool setting options. By focusing on the user, the technology is designed to be accessible within a system that a typical person can access without having to spend time learning about the system and its capabilities. This may provide a significant advantage over prior or current systems where the technology is the focus and the user is a secondary consideration.
- It is a further object of the present invention to provide power tools employing or capable of employing the power tool control system. In the present application, specific examples illustrate the use of the present invention with a table saw, belt sander, lathe, router, nail gun, drills, drill press, and the like. However, it should be understood that the present invention is contemplated for use with devices which require precise and accurate measurements and settings in order to accomplish a specific task and that would benefit from removing human error from the establishment of these measurements and settings.
- It is a still further object of the present invention to provide a graphical user interface which enables the operation of a power tool through textual and graphical representations on a display screen. The user interface provides logically related menus and folders within the menus which contain various applications and functionality which are easily accessed and displayed in a clear format.
- It is an additional object of the present invention to provide a power tool control system which may be interchanged with various power tool systems. Further, the power tool control system may receive application services which update the existing applications and may provide new applications.
- It is to be understood that both the forgoing general description and the following detailed description are exemplary and explanatory only and are not restrictive of the invention as claimed. The accompanying drawings, which are incorporated in and constitute a part of the specification, illustrate an embodiment of the invention and together with the general description, serve to explain the principles of the invention.
- The numerous advantages of the present invention may be better understood by those skilled in the art by reference to the accompanying figures in which:
-
FIG. 1 is an illustration of a laser apparatus including a computing system in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 2 is an illustration of the laser apparatus showing alternative power supply embodiments; -
FIGS. 3 and 4 illustrate the computing system shown inFIG. 1 , including display screens; -
FIG. 5 is an illustration of the computing system showing alternative power supply embodiments; -
FIG. 6 is an illustration of the laser apparatus coupled to a leveling assembly in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 7 is an illustration of a laser apparatus coupled to a level assembly and in communication with a remote computing system; -
FIG. 8 is an isometric illustration of a table saw system including the laser apparatus shown inFIG. 1 coupled to a fence connected to a table saw emitting three laser beams; -
FIG. 9 is a top plan view of the table saw system ofFIG. 8 illustrating the laser apparatus emitting three laser beams for establishing distance measurements in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 10 is a side elevation view of the table saw system ofFIG. 8 illustrating the laser apparatus emitting a single laser beam for establishing a distance measurement; -
FIG. 11 is an illustration of the laser apparatus coupled with a combination belt sander and disc sander power tool; -
FIG. 12 is an illustration of the laser apparatus coupled with a lathe; -
FIG. 13 is an illustration of a laser light indicia and reading assembly coupled with a computing system in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 14 is an illustration of the laser light indicia and reading assembly coupled to a level assembly, the computing system being coupled to the level assembly and in communication with the laser scanning apparatus; -
FIG. 15A, 15B , and 15C illustrate a known scanning module which may be employed in the laser light indicia and reading assembly in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 16 is a top plan view of a known scanning module employing a dithering assembly; -
FIG. 17 is an illustration of a known dithering assembly employing a drive coil and drive magnet to provide mirror oscillation; -
FIG. 18 is an illustration of a known dithering assembly employing travel stops to control the range of rotational travel imparted to the mirror; -
FIG. 19 is an illustration of a known dithering assembly employing pads connected to drive and feedback magnets to control the range of rotational travel imparted to the mirror; -
FIG. 20 is an illustration of the laser light indicia and reading assembly coupled with a table saw and establishing a laser light cut line; -
FIG. 21 is an illustration of the laser light indicia and reading assembly coupled with the table saw and establishing a laser light cut line on a work piece; -
FIG. 22 is an illustration of the laser light indicia and reading assembly coupled with a belt sander and establishing a laser beam line; -
FIG. 23 is an illustration of the laser light indicia and reading assembly coupled with the belt sander and establishing a laser beam line on a work piece; -
FIG. 24 is an illustration of the laser light indicia and reading assembly coupled with a wood shaper and establishing a laser beam line; -
FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating functional steps which are accomplished by the laser apparatus and the laser light indicia and reading assembly of the present invention; -
FIG. 26 is an illustration of a laser apparatus connected to a fence on a table saw, whereupon each laser source includes a dithering assembly; -
FIG. 27 is an illustration of multiple laser light indicia and reading assemblies connected to a table saw emitting a laser beam grid produced by laser sources with dithering assemblies; -
FIG. 28 is an illustration of a laser light indicia and reading assembly connected to a drill press establishing multiple laser beam drill points in a horizontal plane; -
FIG. 29 is an illustration of a laser light indicia and reading assembly establishing multiple laser beam drill points in a vertical plane; -
FIG. 30 is an isometric illustration of a rotating laser apparatus including a computing system and rotation assembly in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 31 is an illustration of the rotating laser apparatus including a display menu and an angle measurement device; -
FIGS. 32 and 33 illustrate the rotation assembly including the angle of measurement device and a lock and release unit operable by the user; -
FIG. 34 is an illustration of the rotating laser apparatus in operation; -
FIG. 35 is an illustration of the rotating laser apparatus with laser beams produced by laser sources with dithering assemblies; -
FIGS. 36 and 37 are illustrations of a computing system of the laser apparatus showing display menus available; -
FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating functional steps which are accomplished by the rotating laser apparatus; -
FIG. 39 is an illustration of a laser apparatus with a single laser source providing a laser beam which is split to emit separate laser beams from the laser beam source assemblies located within the housing by optical splitters; -
FIG. 40 is an illustration of the laser apparatus coupled with a computing system that provides a single laser beam which is split to emit separate laser beams from the laser beam source assemblies located within the housing by optical splitters; -
FIG. 41 is an illustration of a rotating laser apparatus with a single laser source; -
FIG. 42 is an illustration of a rotating laser apparatus with a first and a second laser source; -
FIG. 43 is an illustration of the laser apparatus inFIG. 39 , including a plurality of photo multipliers disposed within a housing of the laser apparatus; -
FIG. 44 is an illustration of a laser apparatus including a leveling mechanism in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 45 is an illustration of a plurality of the laser apparatus, shown inFIG. 44 , coupled with one another; -
FIG. 46 is an illustration of the laser apparatus inFIG. 44 , providing leveling readings to a drop ceiling assembly; -
FIG. 47 shows an exemplary home screen shown on a display of an exemplary user interface in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 48 shows an exemplary settings screen shown on a display of an exemplary user interface in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 49 shows an exemplary calibration screen shown on a display of an exemplary user interface in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 50 shows an exemplary save screen shown on a display of an exemplary user interface in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 51 shows an additional exemplary save screen shown on a display of an exemplary user interface in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 52 shows a further exemplary save screen shown on a display of an exemplary user interface in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 53 shows a still further exemplary save screen shown on a display of an exemplary user interface in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 54 shows an exemplary scheme according to which a user interface may operate in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 55 shows an exemplary user interface with different screens in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention, which user interface may execute the scheme shown inFIG. 54 ; -
FIG. 56 shows an exemplary calibration screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 57 shows an additional exemplary calibration screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 58 illustrates an exemplary home screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 59 illustrates various exemplary screens in a distance mode in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 60 illustrates various exemplary screens in an angle mode in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 61 illustrates various exemplary screens in a height mode in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 62 illustrates various exemplary screens in a settings mode in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 63 shows an exemplary distance screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 64 shows an exemplary distance fine adjustment screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 65 shows an exemplary distance relative zero screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 66 shows an exemplary default distance units screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 67 shows an exemplary distance decimal unit screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 68 shows an exemplary distance offset screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 69 shows an exemplary distance recall screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 70 shows an additional exemplary distance recall screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 71 shows a further exemplary distance recall screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 72 shows a still further exemplary distance recall screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 73 shows an exemplary distance save screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 74 shows an additional exemplary distance save screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 75 shows an exemplary angle screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 76 shows an exemplary angle fine adjustment screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 77 shows an exemplary angle zero screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 78 shows an exemplary angle relative zero screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 79 shows an exemplary angle recall screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 80 shows an additional exemplary angle recall screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 81 shows a further exemplary angle recall screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 82 shows an exemplary angle save screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 83 shows an additional exemplary angle save screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 84 shows an exemplary height screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 85 shows an exemplary height fine adjustment screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 86 shows an exemplary height absolute zero screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 87 shows an exemplary default height units screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 88 shows an exemplary height decimal unit screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 89 shows an exemplary height offset screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 90 shows an exemplary height recall screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 91 shows an additional exemplary height recall screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 92 shows a further exemplary height recall screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 93 shows an exemplary height save screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 94 shows an additional exemplary height save screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 95 shows an exemplary settings screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 96 shows an exemplary default global units screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 97 shows an exemplary global metric units screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 98 shows an exemplary system screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 99 shows an exemplary sound screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 100 shows an exemplary brightness screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 101 shows an exemplary laser time out screen in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 102 is an illustration of a nail gun including a stud finder laser indicator assembly in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 103 is an isometric view of the stud finder laser indicator assembly; -
FIG. 104 is a perspective view of a second exemplary embodiment of a stud finder laser indicator assembly removed from a nail gun and being used by an operator to locate and identify the position of a stud behind a surface; -
FIG. 105 is an illustration of a nail gun including a laser indication assembly for establishing a visual marker on a surface in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 106 is an illustration of a stud finder detector assembly comprising an indicator coupled with a nail gun, the indicator for providing a visual identification to a user when a stud has been detected; -
FIG. 107 is an illustration of the coupling assembly used for coupling the stud finder detector assembly with a nose casing assembly of a nail gun; -
FIG. 108 is an illustration of the stud finder detector assembly including a battery cavity with a cover for receiving a battery; -
FIG. 109 is an illustration of a stud finder detector assembly including an adapter for receiving an AC power supply through and a port for coupling with a peripheral device; -
FIG. 110 is an isometric view of the stud finder detector assembly detecting a stud and identifying the detection of the stud through an indicator; -
FIG. 111 is an illustration of the coupling assembly used for coupling the laser indication assembly with a nose casing assembly of a nail gun; -
FIG. 112 is an illustration of the laser indication assembly including a battery cavity with a cover for receiving a battery; -
FIG. 113 is an illustration of a laser indication assembly including an adapter for receiving an AC power supply and a port for coupling with a peripheral device; -
FIG. 114 is an illustration of a laser indication assembly including a laser source providing a visual indicator on a surface; -
FIG. 115 is an illustration of a second exemplary embodiment of a stud finder detector assembly and a laser indication assembly including a coupling assembly allowing the two assemblies to physically and communicatively couple to form a stud finder laser indicator assembly; -
FIG. 116 is an illustration of a nail gun employing the stud finder laser indicator assembly ofFIG. 115 and establishing a cross-hairs visual marker on a surface indicating the location of a stud behind the surface; -
FIG. 117 is an illustration of a nail gun employing the stud finder laser indicator assembly ofFIG. 115 and establishing a pair of dashed line visual markers on a surface indicating the location and approximate width of a stud behind the surface; -
FIG. 118 is an illustration of a nail gun employing the stud finder laser indicator assembly ofFIG. 115 and establishing a pair of line-dash-line visual markers on a surface indicating the location and approximate width of a stud behind the surface; -
FIG. 119 is an illustration of a nail gun employing the stud finder laser indicator assembly ofFIG. 115 and establishing a pair of continuous line visual markers on a surface indicating the location and approximate width of a stud behind the surface; -
FIG. 120 is an illustration of a nail gun employing the stud finder laser indicator assembly ofFIG. 115 and establishing a pair of light pointer visual markers on a surface indicating the location and approximate width of a stud behind the surface and a cross-hairs visual marker for establishing the approximate center of the stud; -
FIG. 121 is an illustration of a nail gun employing the stud finder laser indicator assembly ofFIG. 115 and establishing a pair of light pointer visual markers on a surface indicating the location and approximate width of a stud behind the surface and a dashed line visual marker for establishing the approximate center of the stud; -
FIG. 122 is an illustration of a nail gun employing the stud finder laser indicator assembly ofFIG. 115 and establishing a pair of dashed line visual markers on a surface indicating the location and approximate width of a stud behind the surface and a line-dash-line visual marker for establishing the approximate center of the stud; -
FIG. 123 is an illustration of a stud finder laser indicator assembly pivotally coupled with the nose casting assembly of a nail gun wherein a visual marker is established on a surface indicating the location of a stud behind the surface and is enabled to maintain the visual marker on the identified location even when the nail gun is moved out of position relative to the position of the stud; -
FIG. 124 is an illustration of a second embodiment of a stud finder laser indicator assembly pivotally coupled with the nose casting assembly of a nail gun wherein a visual marker is established on a surface indicating the location of a stud behind the surface and is enabled to maintain the visual marker on the identified location even when the nail gun is moved out of position relative to the position of the stud; -
FIG. 125 is an illustration of a horseshoe stud finder laser indicator assembly coupled with a nose casting assembly of a nail gun in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 126 is an isometric view of the horseshoe stud finder laser indicator assembly showing a stud sensor assembly and a plurality of lens disposed on a housing of the horseshoe stud finder laser indicator assembly; -
FIG. 127 is an illustration of a third exemplary embodiment of the stud finder laser indicator assembly coupled with a nose casting assembly of a nail gun establishing a pair of light pointer visual markers indicating the location and the approximate width of a stud and a dashed line visual marker indicating the approximate center of the stud; -
FIG. 128 is an isometric view illustrating a tracker assembly coupled with a nail gun, the tracker assembly comprising a user interface assembly including a stud finder laser indicator assembly in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 129 is an expanded view illustrating the tracker assembly including the user interface assembly and the stud finder laser indicator assembly, coupled with the nail gun; -
FIG. 130 is a perspective view illustrating a display screen, a first, second, third, and fourth selector, of the user interface assembly, the display screen presenting various visual marker configuration options for selection by the user; -
FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the display screen of the user interface assembly providing visual feedback to the user of the position of the nail gun relative to the position of a stud behind a surface and indicating that the nail gun is not centered on the stud; -
FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the display screen of the user interface assembly providing visual feedback to the user of the position of the nail gun relative to the position of a stud behind a surface and indicating that the nail gun is positioned at the center of the stud; -
FIG. 133 is an illustration of the nail gun coupled with the tracker assembly of the present invention detecting the location of a stud behind a surface and detecting the location of piping and electrical wiring to be avoided by the user of the nail gun when driving a nail; -
FIG. 134 is an illustration of the nail gun ofFIG. 133 establishing a visual marker on the surface indicating the location of the stud behind the surface and avoiding the piping and electrical wiring located in close proximity to the stud; -
FIG. 135 is an illustration of the nail gun ofFIG. 133 wherein the user interface is indicating to the user that piping and electrical wiring have been detected and that the user should not drive a nail in this location; -
FIG. 136 is a second exemplary embodiment of a tracker assembly coupled with a nail gun, the tracker assembly comprising a user interface communicatively coupled with a stud finder laser indication assembly through use of a cable; -
FIG. 137 is an expanded view of the second exemplary embodiment of the tracker assembly coupled with the nail gun, wherein a display screen of the user interface is displaying stud size and composition options for selection by the user of the nail gun; -
FIG. 138 is a third exemplary embodiment of a tracker assembly coupled with a nail gun wherein a user interface includes a laser indication assembly and the user interface is communicatively coupled with a stud finder detector assembly through use of a cable; -
FIG. 139 is an illustration of a drill coupled with a stud finder laser indicator assembly in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention; and -
FIG. 140 is an illustration of a drywall gun, including a clutched motor, coupled with a second exemplary embodiment of a stud finder laser indicator assembly in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention. - Reference will now be made in detail to the presently preferred embodiments of the invention, examples of which are illustrated in the accompanying drawings.
- Referring generally now to
FIG. 1 , alaser apparatus 100 of the present invention is shown. In the present embodiment, thelaser apparatus 100 comprises ahousing 102 coupled with acomputing system 104. Further, thehousing 102 is disposed with afirst laser source 106, asecond laser source 108, and athird laser source 110. Alternatively, thehousing 102 may include a greater or fewer number of laser beam sources in order to meet the needs of a manufacturer or consumer. Each of the threelaser sources 106 through 110 is in communication with thecomputing system 104. In the current embodiment the communicative link is a wireless system, however, alternate systems, such as serial cable, infrared, or the like may be employed. - In the present embodiment, the
laser sources 106 through 110 are enabled to emit infrared laser beams. These laser beams are invisible to the human eye, however, light emitting diodes may be linked to the laser beam in order to provide a visual indicator of the travel of the laser beam. In an alternate embodiment the laser sources may be enabled to emit various types of laser beams, such as an ultraviolet laser beam, or the like without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention. - Additionally, a first mounting
member 112 and a second mountingmember 114 are coupled with thehousing 102. The number, location, and configuration of the mounting members may vary as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art. The mounting members are suitable for connecting thehousing 102 to another device such as a power tool. The power tool may be a table saw, a belt sander, a planer, a disc sander, a lathe, a drill press, and the like. In the current embodiment thelaser apparatus 100 is shown being suitable for mounting on afence 116 which would normally be coupled with a table saw. As shown, the mountingmembers first latch 124 and asecond latch 126 which slide through and latch thehousing 102 to a mounting assembly, power tool, or other devices. In the current embodiment the first andsecond latches - The
latches first release mechanism 120 and asecond release mechanism 122, respectively. In the present embodiment, the first andsecond release mechanisms buttons latches housing 102, of thelaser apparatus 100, from the mounting assembly, power tool, or other device the user is currently operating. The location and number of release mechanisms may vary as determined by the number of mounting members and latches disposed on thelaser apparatus 100. - The housing further provides the user a
first grip 128 and asecond grip 130 proximally located next to thebuttons grips housing 102 for depressing the first andsecond buttons laser apparatus 100. - It is further contemplated that the
laser apparatus 100 may include a laser source which emits an incident laser beam from either afirst end 116 or asecond end 118 of thehousing 102. Such a configuration may be desirable in situations where a user needs only one laser beam to produce a finished work product, such as when working on a lathe machine as shown inFIG. 10 . - In an alternate embodiment, the three
laser beam sources housing 102. The modular laser source units may be locked in position, once inserted into thehousing 102, by use of a variety of system, such as a latch system, compression system, or the like. There may be a variety of modular laser source units disposed with laser sources of varying power. Further, the modular laser source units may include a dithering assembly enabling the laser source to provide dithering functionality. For further discussion on dithering assemblies seeFIGS. 21 through 24 below. - Further, the
laser apparatus 100 may be comprised of a single laser source. The single laser source may emit an incident laser beam through thehousing 102. The single laser source may be attached at either thefirst end 116 or thesecond end 118 of thehousing 102. Alternatively, the single laser source may be included in thecomputing system 104. In a single laser source configuration optical splitters, optical reflectors, and photomultipliers may be employed in order to facilitate the functional capabilities of thelaser apparatus 100. A detailed discussion of the single laser source design, including the use of optical splitters, optical reflectors, and photomultipliers, is provided inFIGS. 36 through 40 . - In the present embodiment, the
computing system 104 controls the functioning of each of the threelaser sources 106 through 110. A user interacts with thecomputing system 104 and directs the emitting of a laser beam from each of the three laser sources. Additionally, thecomputing system 104 monitors the laser beams and provides a display to the user of relevant information. - The information provided on the display may include distance measurements, blade height measurements, blade angle, and the like. Additionally, the laser beams may provide information regarding the truing of the machine and a work piece, and the indexing of the work piece. For example, in a belt sander apparatus as will be shown and discussed in
FIG. 11 , the user may ensure that the angle of the sander matches the desired specifications using the laser apparatus. Further, a work piece to be presented to the sander may be verified by the laser apparatus to be in the correct position for presentation to the sander. The laser apparatus may also provide an indexing functionality by determining the leading edge of the work piece and monitoring the distance traveled by the work piece. It is contemplated that other information relevant to a variety of power tools may also be provided by the computing system to the user. - Referring now to
FIG. 2 , thelaser apparatus 100 is shown. Thehousing 102 includes afirst receptor port 202 suitable for receiving aportable power source 204. Theportable power source 204 provides power for the operation of the laser sources disposed within thehousing 102. Thefirst receptor port 202 further includes aremovable hatch 206 which fastens in place over the opening of thefirst receptor port 202. Theportable power source 204 may be a variety of devices, such as a rechargeable battery or the like, without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention. - Also shown in
FIG. 2 is an alternate configuration of thehousing 102 where power may be received via apower cord 208 which engages asecond receptor port 210. It is understood that typically only one of the above mentioned power source configurations will be employed on thelaser apparatus 100 and thatFIG. 2 is only an exemplary embodiment of two possible configurations. Further, the location and configuration of the first andsecond receptor ports - Additionally, a
communication port 212 is included in thehousing 102 of thelaser apparatus 100. Thecommunication port 212 provides a communicative link to thecomputing system 104, allowing the computing system to communicate with thelaser sources 106 through 110 disposed within thehousing 102. The location and configuration of thecommunication port 212 may vary as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention. Further, afirst coupling port 214 and asecond coupling port 216 are included on thehousing 102 for coupling with thecomputing system 104 as will be further described inFIG. 6 . -
FIGS. 3 and 4 show exemplary displays on thecomputing system 104. Being an interactive system, thecomputing system 104 includes afirst selector 302, asecond selector 304, and athird selector 306. Thefirst selector 302 and thethird selector 306 allow a user to scroll through choices presented on adisplay screen 308 of thecomputing system 104. Thesecond button 304 allows a user to select the desired application choice presented on thedisplay screen 308. For example, inFIG. 3 a user may choose to turn on or turn off the lasers by using the first andthird buttons second button 304 to execute the function. InFIG. 4 thedisplay screen 308 is providing a user with the readouts determined during the process of truing the machine. The user may accept these dimensions by selecting the “cont.” function or reject these dimensions by selecting the “reset” function. It is understood that the displays presented on thedisplay screen 308 are exemplary and may not be read as exclusive. A variety of displays and interactive functionalities may be presented ondisplay screen 308 without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention. - Various configurations of the
computing system 104 may be employed without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention. Ergonomic shaping and providing additional capabilities is contemplated. The display screen may be a liquid crystal display, back lit monitor, or the like, while the selector features may include rollers, ball knobs, or the like. - In the current embodiment, on one end of the
computing system 104 are coupled afirst button 310 and asecond button 312. Preferably, these buttons are depression buttons, however, other systems as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art may be employed. The two buttons are used in the coupling and uncoupling of thecomputing system 104 with thehousing 102 of thelaser apparatus 100, as will be described inFIGS. 5 and 6 . - In
FIG. 5 thecomputing system 104 includes afirst receptor port 502 suitable for receiving aportable power source 504. Theportable power source 504 provides power for the operation of thecomputing system 104 that may be coupled to thehousing 102 and is in communication with the laser sources. Thefirst receptor port 502 further includes aremovable hatch 506 which fastens in place over the opening of thefirst receptor port 502. As described for theportable power source 204 of thehousing 102, theportable power source 504 may be a variety of devices, such as a rechargeable battery or the like, without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention. In an alternate configuration thecomputing system 104 may receive power from apower cord 508 which engages asecond receptor port 510. The location and configuration of the first andsecond receptor ports - Additionally, the
computing system 104 includes a first mountingmember 512 and a second mountingmember 514. These two mounting members couple with thehousing 102 of thelaser apparatus 104. It is contemplated that a latch and release mechanism is disposed within one of the two mounting members and operably connects with the twobuttons computing system 104 includes acommunication adapter 516 that engages with thecommunication port 212, shown inFIG. 2 , disposed on thehousing 102. - Referring to
FIG. 6 , thelaser apparatus 100 is shown withcomputing system 104 in vertical orientation over thecommunication port 212 and the first andsecond coupling ports members computing system 104, are positioned to engage with the first andsecond coupling ports communication adapter 516 is positioned to engage with thecommunication port 212. In this preferred embodiment, a user must supply sufficient force to couple thecomputing system 104 with thehousing 102. As discussed above inFIG. 3 , the first andsecond buttons computing system 104 in place. A latch or latches may be located on the mountingmembers 512 and/or 514, and as thecomputing system 104 is pressed into place they may engage with the inside of thecoupling ports 214 and/or 216. In order to remove thecomputing system 104 form thehousing 102, the user will depress one or both of the first andsecond buttons computing system 104 to release from thehousing 102. Other systems may be employed to affix thecomputing system 104 to thehousing 102 without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention. - The
laser apparatus 100 is shown engaging a mountingassembly 602. Preferably, the mountingassembly 602 includes aleveling device 604. The mounting assembly includes a first mountingport 606, a second mountingport 608, and a third mountingport 610. Initially the mountingassembly 602 is mounted to a power tool or other desired device by using the mounting ports. It is contemplated that the mounting ports may be a variety of configurations as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art. Before thelaser apparatus 100 is connected a user may establish that the mountingassembly 602 is in a level position by checking theleveling device 604. In this way the user may ensure that thelaser apparatus 100 is level once it is connected to the mountingassembly 602. The mountingassembly 602 further includes afirst coupling port 612 and asecond coupling port 614 which engage the mountingmembers laser apparatus 100. - Referring now to
FIG. 7 , alaser apparatus 700 is shown. Thelaser apparatus 700 includes ahousing member 702 in communication with aremote computing system 703. Thehousing member 702 is disposed with afirst laser source 726, asecond laser source 728, and athird laser source 730. Additionally, a mountingassembly 704 capable of connecting with thehousing member 702 and providing a communication link between thehousing member 702 and theremote computing system 703, is included. - The
housing member 702 is similar to that shown and described inFIGS. 1, 2 , and 6, except that thehousing member 702 further includes acommunication adapter 708 and does not include the communication port shown inFIGS. 2 and 6 . Thecommunicative adapter 708 communicatively couples with theremote computing system 703 by engaging thecommunication adapter 708 in thecommunicative coupling point 706. This communicative linking allows a user of thelaser apparatus 700 to control thelaser sources 726 through 730 through the use of theremote computing system 703. Additionally, the housing member includes a first mountingmember 732 and a second mountingmember 734. The first mountingmember 732 is disposed with a compression latch 736 and is operably engaged with afirst depression button 740. The second mountingmember 734 is disposed with acompression latch 738 and is operably engaged with asecond depression button 742. The first mountingmember 732 couples with afirst coupling port 744 disposed on the mountingassembly 704, and the second mountingmember 734 couples with asecond coupling port 746 disposed on the mountingassembly 704. As described previously the first and second depression buttons allow the user to remove thehousing member 702 from the mountingassembly 704. - The
remote computing system 703 is similar to that shown and described inFIGS. 1 , and 3 through 6 except that it couples with a remote mountingmember 710. The remote mountingmember 710, preferably, mounts to a stationary surface, such as a wall, and provides afirst communication port 712 for coupling with acommunication adapter 722 disposed on theremote computing system 703. Additionally, the remote mountingmember 710 includes afirst coupling port 714 and asecond coupling port 716 for coupling with a first mountingmember 718 and second mountingmembers 720 of theremote computing system 703. Further, the remote mountingmember 710 includes asecond communication port 724 which couples with acommunication adapter 707 connected to the mountingassembly 704. - The mounting
assembly 704 is similar to the mounting assembly shown inFIG. 6 , except that the mountingassembly 704 further includes acommunicative coupling port 706 and acommunication adapter 707. Thecommunication adapter 708, disposed on thehousing member 702, engages with thecommunication port 706 providing a communicative link. The communicative link from thehousing member 702 to theremote computing system 703 is completed through the coupling of thecommunication adapter 707 with thesecond communication port 724 of the remote mountingmember 710. The mountingassembly 704 includes a first mountingport 748, a second mountingport 750, and a third mountingport 752. These mounting ports allow the mountingassembly 704 to be coupled to a variety of devices such as power tools and the like. - A table saw system 800 including the
laser apparatus 100 mounted on afence 804 which is connected to atable saw 802, is shown inFIGS. 8, 9 , and 10. Preferably, thelaser apparatus 100 provides three laser beams. The laser beams may be used to establish three distance measurements indicated by d1, d2, and d3. These measurements are displayed to the user on thecomputing system 104. Additionally, the laser beams in communication with thecomputing system 104 may display a variety of information, such as circular saw blade height, circular saw blade angle, or the like. The table saw 802 further includes acircular saw blade 806, afirst adjustment mechanism 808, and asecond adjustment mechanism 810. In the present embodiment, thefirst adjustment mechanism 808 enables a user of the table saw 802 to adjust the angle of thecircular saw blade 806 relative to the operational field of the table saw 802. The operational field may be defined as that area of the table saw 802 upon which a work piece may be placed and thecircular saw blade 806 may perform a cut upon the work piece. In other embodiments where thelaser apparatus 100 is mounted or connected to another power tool or device the operational field may include the area where the work piece is placed and a function is performed upon the work piece. Thesecond adjustment mechanism 810 enables a user to adjust the height which thecircular saw blade 806 extends above the surface of the operation field of the table saw 802. - Referring now to
FIGS. 9 and 10 , thelaser apparatus 100 coupled to atable saw 802 is shown. Thelaser apparatus 100 includes thehousing 102 coupled with thecomputing system 104. Thehousing 102 is mounted to afence 804 connected to the table saw 802. InFIG. 10 thesingle laser source 110 is shown, thelaser source 110 is being used to measure the distance d1 from thefence 804 to acircular saw blade 806. InFIG. 9 thehousing 102 includes thefirst laser source 106, thesecond laser source 108, and thethird laser source 110 each emitting a laser beam across the operational field of the table saw 802, from thefence 804 to thecircular saw blade 806. - Referring now to
FIGS. 11 and 12 , thelaser apparatus 100 is shown coupled to asander system 1100 and alathe system 1200. InFIG. 11 thesander system 1100 includes abelt sander 1102 with anoperational field 1106 and adisc sander 1104 with anoperational field 1108. In the current embodiment, two of thelaser apparatus 100 systems are employed. One is mounted upon thebelt sander 1102 and the other is mounted upon thedisc sander 1104. Thelaser apparatus 100 may provide information on the angle of the sander relative to the operational field and the height the sander extends above the operational field. InFIG. 12 thelaser apparatus 100 is coupled to thelathe 1202 and employs a single laser source configuration. The laser source emits a single laser beam which travels down one side of the operational field of thelathe 1202. The laser source may monitor the size of the work piece coupled with the lathe and indicate to the user when the desired work piece size has been reached. In bothFIGS. 11 and 12 the location and configuration of thelaser apparatus 100 may vary as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art. - Referring now to
FIGS. 13 a laser light indicia and readingassembly 1300 is shown. In the current embodiment, the laser light indicia and readingassembly 1300 comprises ahousing 1302 which includes alaser source 1304 in communication with acomputing system 1306. Thehousing 1302 is coupled with a mountingmember 1308. Acommunication adapter 1310 communicatively couples thecomputing system 1306 with thelaser source 1304 disposed within thehousing 1302 through acable 1311. The type of cable employed in the present embodiment is a standard serial cable. However, it is contemplated that a variety of connection mechanisms may be employed, such as wireless, infrared, or the like. Thecomputing system 1306 is similar to thecomputing system 104 in that it provides adisplay screen 1312, afirst selector 1314, asecond selector 1316, and athird selector 1318. Additionally, thecomputing system 1306 may further include akeypad 1320, as shown in the current embodiment. Thekeypad 1320 may enable increased functionality of the computing system, such as increased control over the laser source. - In
FIG. 14 a laser light indicia and readingassembly 1400 is shown. In the present embodiment, the laser light indicia and readingassembly 1400 comprises ahousing 1402 which includes alaser source 1404, acomputing system 1406, and a mountingassembly 1408. Thehousing 1402 is coupled with a mountingmember 1412 for coupling with the mountingassembly 1408. The mountingassembly 1408 further includes acommunication adapter 1410 which couples with thelaser source 1404 through thehousing 1402. Preferably, thecommunication adapter 1410 is coupled with acable 1411 which connects to the mountingassembly 1408. It is understood that the configuration of thecommunication adapter 1410 and type ofcable 1411 employed may vary as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art. Through theserial cable 1411 thecommunication adapter 1410 is further communicatively coupled with the communication port 1414. - In the present embodiment, the communication port 1414 is designed to couple with the
computing system 1406 when it is mounted to the mountingassembly 1408. Further, afirst coupling port 1416 and asecond coupling port 1418 are disposed on the mountingassembly 1408 and further engage with thecomputing system 1406 when thecomputing system 1406 is mounted to the mountingassembly 1408. Thecomputing system 1406 is similar to thecomputing system 104 shown and described previously, except that thecomputing system 1406 includes anindicator 1420. Theindicator 1420 is a light emitting diode (LED) which provides indication to the user of thesystem 1400 when thecomputing system 1406 is properly mounted and engaged with the mountingassembly 1408. It is contemplated that thecomputing system 1406 may not includeindicator 1406. However, a variety of configurations may be employed forindicator 1420 without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention. - A
leveling device 1422 is disposed within mountingassembly 1408. As shown and described previously inFIGS. 6 and 7 the leveling assembly ensures that the laser light indicia and readingassembly 1400 is level with the device to which it is connected. A first mountingport 1426 and a second mountingport 1428 are employed to connect the mountingassembly 1408 with the desired device. In the present embodiment the mounting ports allow for screws to be inserted and fastened to the device and the mountingassembly 1408. However, it is contemplated that a variety of fastening devices and configurations may be employed. - The mounting
assembly 1408 further comprises a lasersource coupling port 1424. The lasersource coupling port 1424 is designed to receive the mountingmember 1412 which is coupled to thehousing 1402 disposed with thelaser source 1404. The mountingmember 1412 includes a release mechanism comprised of abutton 1430 disposed on thehousing 1402, and alatch 1432. Thebutton 1430 is a depression button, operably engaged with thelatch 1432, which the user may depress in order to activate thelatch 1432. Thelatch 1432 is a compression latch which retracts back into the mountingmember 1412 when thebutton 1430 is depressed. Thelatch 1432 is extended away from the mountingmember 1412 and engages the inner surface of the lasersource coupling point 1424 to affix thehousing 1402 to the mountingassembly 1408. - In the preferred embodiment, the laser source for both
FIGS. 13 and 14 is enabled as a standard single laser beam producing laser source. Alternatively, the laser source in bothFIGS. 13 and 14 may be enabled as a scanning module. A knownscanning module 1500 is shown inFIG. 15A, 15B , and 15C. Thescanning module 1500 comprises alaser source 1502 with aspherical lens 1504 disposed in ahousing 1503. Thehousing 1503 includes anaperture 1505 through which a laser beam, emitted from thelaser source 1502 through thespherical lens 1504, passes. The laser beam travels through acylindrical lens 1506 and strikes amultifaceted polygon deflector 1510. Themultifaceted polygon deflector 1510 deflects the incident laser beam emitted by the laser source through thecylindrical lens 1508 and out to asurface 1512. Thesurface 1512 is a nominal plane and the incident laser beam is provided afirst focus 1514. As indicated by the arrows thescanning module 1500 moves the focused laser beam along thesurface 1512. The scanning module may further include two light emittingdiode assemblies - The laser beam from the
scanning module 1500 may appear as a continuous line defined by the angle of incidence with which the laser beam strikes themultifaceted polygon deflector 1510. As such, the light emitting diodes would provide the visual indication of the defined area to the user. - The
scanning module 1500 receives the reflected laser beams through thecylindrical lens 1508. The reflected laser beams may travel directly to the photodetector 1520 or the laser beams may travel to the multifaceted polygon deflector. The laser beams which strike the multifaceted polygon deflector are deflected to a collecting mirror 1522 where they are reflected to the photodetector 1520. In this manner thescanning module 1500 is enabled to read a surface it is scanning. - It is contemplated that the laser source(s) employed in the laser light indicia and reading assembly and the laser apparatus may include a dithering assembly. A
typical dithering assembly 1600, known in the art, is shown inFIG. 16 . The ditheringassembly 1600 includes alaser source 1602 and amirror 1604 disposed within ahousing 1606 and may be employed to establish a laser beam which presents as a continuous line upon a surface. Further, it is known that dithering assemblies may comprise a pair of magnets and a pair of magnetic coils. As shown inFIG. 17 a mirror 1702 is coupled to abase 1704 which is connected to aflexible support arm 1706 that is connected to asupport member 1708. Adrive coil 1710 is positioned on one side of theflexible support arm 1706 and afeedback coil 1712 is positioned on the opposite side of theflexible support arm 1706. Adrive magnet 1714 is connected to thebase 1704 and proximally located to thedrive coil 1710 while afeedback magnet 1716 is connected to thebase 1704 and proximally located to thefeedback coil 1712. A drive current (e.g., an oscillating drive current) is run through thedrive coil 1710 and causes themirror 1702 to rotate. The rotation imparted to themirror 1702 causes a change in the angle of incidence of the laser beam striking the mirror, and thus imparts a change in the angle of reflection imparted to the incident laser beam. As a result, the reflected laser beam appears as a continuous line defined by the rotational range of themirror 1702. - Additionally, dithering assemblies which control the range of rotation of the mirror are known.
FIG. 18 shows one such assembly where amirror 1802 is connected to abase 1804, which is connected to aflexible support arm 1806 that is connected to asupport member 1808 coupled to asurface 1810. Adrive coil 1812 is coupled to thesupport member 1808 in proximal relation to adrive magnet 1814 which is coupled with thebase 1804. Afirst travel stop 1816 and asecond travel stop 1818 are disposed in a desired location relative to themirror 1802 to provide a limited range of rotation by themirror 1802. - Alternative methods for controlling the range of rotation of the mirror in a dithering assembly may include the use of pads, as shown in
FIG. 19 . Themirror 1902 is connected to abase 1904, which is connected to aflexible support arm 1906 that is connected to asupport member 1908 coupled to asurface 1910. Adrive coil 1912 is coupled to thesupport member 1908 in proximal relation to adrive magnet 1914 which is connected to thebase 1904. Afeedback coil 1916 is coupled to thesupport member 1908 in proximal relation to afeedback magnet 1918, which is connected to thebase 1904. Afirst pad 1920 is coupled with thedrive magnet 1914, and asecond pad 1922 is coupled with thefeedback magnet 1918. The pads, which impact with the drive and feedback coils, limit the rotation range of motion of themirror 1902. - In many dithering assemblies the effects of feedback between the drive coil/magnet and the feedback coil/magnet may have harmful effects, such as increased noise and unstable rotational amplitude production. A feedback sensor, such as a Hall sensor, may be employed to monitor electrical potential in a dithering assembly and trigger a switching of the polarity of the drive current in the drive coil at the appropriate time in relation to the position of the mirror. This switching of polarities reverses the drive force being exerted on the drive magnet and the mirror.
- Referring now to
FIG. 20 , atable saw system 2000 including a laser light indicia and readingassembly 2002, is shown. The laser light indicia and readingassembly 2002 is similar to the laser light indicia and readingassembly FIGS. 13 and 14 , and includes acomputing system 2003 similar to that shown inFIGS. 13 and 14 . In the current embodiment, the table saw system 200 further includes a table 2004, afence 2006, and acircular saw blade 2008. Additionally, afirst adjustment mechanism 2010 and a second adjustment mechanism 2012 are included in the table saw system 200 and operably engage with thecircular saw blade 2008 to adjust blade angle and blade height relative to the operational field of thetable saw system 2000, as described previously inFIG. 8 . - In this embodiment the laser light indicia and reading
assembly 2002 establishes a continuouslaser beam line 2014. Thelaser beam line 2014 is laid down across the operational field of thetable saw system 2000 and provides a cut line for a user of the system. It is contemplated that the laser light indicia and readingassembly 2002 will establish a laser beam line that tracks the position of thecircular saw blade 2008. For example, if the user adjusts the angle of thecircular saw blade 2008 relative to the operational field of thetable saw system 2000, the laser light indicia and readingassembly 2002 will monitor that change and establish a laser beam line that tracks the position of thecircular saw blade 2008. - In an alternate embodiment the
laser beam line 2014 may be established using optically activated indicators that are integrated with the table 2004 in positions proximal to thecircular saw blade 2008. For example, the table 2004 may be integrated with sensors which respond by illuminating upon being struck by light from the laser light indicia and readingassembly 2002. Alternately, optically activated cables may be integrated into the table saw to provide a laser line. Regardless of the type of optically activated indicators, their positioning relative to thecircular saw blade 2008 and the lines of cut that may be established through use of the adjustment mechanisms provides a user an easily ascertained path to guide the cutting of the work piece by. - Referring now to
FIG. 21 , atable saw system 2100 is shown. Thetable saw system 2100 comprises a laser light indicia and readingassembly 2102, a table 2104, afence 2106, and acircular saw blade 2108. The laser light indicia and readingassembly 2102 is coupled to acomputing system 2103, similar to that previously described inFIGS. 13 and 14 . Additionally, awork piece 2112 is located within the operation field of thetable saw system 2100 and is being guided by thefence 2106 and anangular adjustment mechanism 2110. Theangular adjustment mechanism 2110 may position thework piece 2112 in a desired angular setting and then guide thework piece 2112 through thecircular saw blade 2108 at the set angle. In the current embodiment the laser light indicia and reading assembly establishes a laserbeam light line 2114 across thework piece 2112. This laserbeam light line 2114 may be used by the user as the cut line and followed throughout the cut. - It is contemplated that the laser light indicia and
reading assemblies FIGS. 20 and 21 may include an indexing and truing functionality. An example of the truing of a work piece may include a user attempting to make a forty five degree angled cut on the work piece. The user may enter this information into the computing system in communication with the laser light indicia and reading assembly and when the work piece is set into the operational field of the table saw system, the laser light indicia and reading assembly may emit a laser beam which identifies the angle that the work piece is set at in relation to the circular saw blade. An example of the indexing of a work piece may include a user attempting to make a notch cut into a work piece that does not run the length or width of the work piece. When the work piece is set into the operational field of the table saw system, the laser light indicia and reading assembly may emit a laser beam which determines the position of the leading edge of the work piece. As the work piece is passed across the circular saw blade, the laser beam enables the laser light indicia and reading assembly to monitor the rate of travel imparted to the work piece and the overall distance of travel across the circular saw by the work piece. In this manner the laser light indicia and reading assembly may communicate to the computing system when the desired length of cut has been accomplished, and have that information passed on the user. - The user may be notified as to the truing and indexing information through the computing system, as previously discussed. Alternatively, the laser light indicia and reading assembly may be provided with an indicator to communicate to the user that the desired specifications have been accomplished. For example, a red light emitting diode may be coupled to the housing of the laser light indicia and reading assembly for indicating to the user that the desired function has not been accomplished. A green light emitting diode, coupled to the housing of the laser light indicia and reading assembly, may indicate to the user that the desired function has been accomplished and it is time to proceed or remove the work piece from the field of operation. Other indication systems as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art may be employed without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention.
- Referring now to
FIGS. 22 and 23 , anedge sander system 2200, is shown. In the current embodiment, theedge sander system 2200 includes a laser light indicia and readingassembly 2202, a work table 2204,belt sand paper 2206, and anadjustment mechanism 2208. Acomputing system 2203 is coupled to the laser light indicia and readingassembly 2202. The laser light indicia and readingassembly 2202 and thecomputing system 2203 are similar to those shown inFIGS. 13 and 14 . The laser light indicia and readingassembly 2202 may be enabled for truing and indexing of the edge sander and a work piece (such aswork piece 2302 shown inFIG. 23 ) as previously described inFIGS. 20 and 21 . For example, a user of theedge sander system 2200 may be attempting to sand off a one-quarter inch segment from a work piece. In the process of sanding, one end of the work piece may be receiving greater pressure than the other resulting in an uneven depth of sanding. The laser light indicia and readingassembly 2200 may indicate to a user that uneven pressure is being applied and identify the end where this is occurring and the corrections that need to be made to true the work piece. - Referring now to
FIG. 24 , awood shaper system 2400 is shown. In the present embodiment, thewood shaper system 2400 includes a laser light indicia and readingassembly 2402, a work table 2404, abit 2406, an on/offmechanism 2408, and anadjustment mechanism 2410. Acomputing system 2403 is coupled to the laser light indicia and readingassembly 2402. The laser light indicia and readingassembly 2402 may be enabled to determine the angle of presentation and the size of thebit 2406. Additionally, the laser light indicia and readingassembly 2402 may be enabled for truing and indexing of the wood shaper system and a work piece being operated upon by the wood shaper system as described previously. - A flowchart illustrating functional steps which may be accomplished using the laser apparatus of
FIGS. 1 through 12 and the laser light indicia and reading assembly ofFIGS. 13 through 24 , is shown inFIG. 25 . Thefirst step 2510 involves the setting of the machine. This involves mounting the laser apparatus to the power tool being utilized. As discussed previously, the laser apparatus may be directly mounted to a power tool or mounted to a separate mounting assembly which is connected to the power tool. Once the laser apparatus has been properly set then instep 2520 the laser apparatus must be trued in order to provide accurate results. This may be accomplished by checking the leveling mechanism as described previously, if such a mounting assembly is being employed or using the laser beams to determine the correct alignment. If the laser apparatus determines that the mounting is untrue it notifies the user. Once the laser apparatus determines it is truly aligned then instep 2530 the work piece is set. Once the laser apparatus determines that the work piece has been set then instep 2540 it determines if the setting of the work piece is true. Once the work piece is trued the user begins operation of the power tool instep 2550. When it is determined that the machining of the work piece is completed instep 2560 operation of the power tool is halted. - It is contemplated that an optically reflective material may be disposed upon a surface that is struck by the laser beam emitted from the laser apparatus or the laser light indicia and reading assembly. In this manner when the laser beams are emitted they will strike the optically reflective material and be reflected. In one embodiment the reflected laser beams may be received by an optical detector disposed within the housing of the laser apparatus or the laser light indicia and reading assembly. The optical detector may be in communication with the computing system and the computing system may process the laser beam information to determine measurements and other setting information. In alternate embodiments the reflected laser beam may be received by one or several optical detector(s) remotely located with respect to the laser apparatus or the laser light indicia and reading assembly, but in communication with the computing system. As stated above the optical detector will relay the information gathered from the laser beam to the computing system where it may be processed and displayed to a user as measurement of setting information. For example, an optically reflective material may be circumferentially disposed about a circular saw blade of a table saw. The table saw may be disposed with a fence that has a laser apparatus (as described in
FIG. 1 ) mounted upon it. The laser apparatus may emit one or more incident laser beams which strike the optically reflective material on the circular saw blade and, if the circular saw blade is perpendicular to the incident laser beams, are reflected back towards the laser apparatus. The laser apparatus may be disposed with one or more optical detectors to receive the reflected laser beam(s) and communicate the information gathered to the computing system for processing and display to a user. The type and configuration of the optically reflective material may vary as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art. - It is further contemplated that the laser apparatus or the laser light indicia and reading assembly may establish a communicative link with their respective computing systems through a communication system disposed within the device, to which the laser apparatus or the laser light indicia and reading assembly are mounted, itself. In this manner a mounting assembly as shown in
FIGS. 6, 7 , and 14 would not be necessary and the laser apparatus or the laser light indicia and reading assembly may be directly mounted to the device. Additionally, the laser apparatus or the laser light indicia and reading assembly may be enabled to accept power from the device to which they are mounted, thus, reducing the need to have a separate power source or power source connection. For example, a fence mounted to a table saw system may be disposed to connect with the laser apparatus or the laser light indicia and reading assembly. The fence may include a communication port, as shown and described on the mounting assemblies ofFIGS. 7 and 14 , which couples with a communication adapter disposed on the housing of the laser apparatus or the laser light indicia and reading assembly. The fence may further include a communication adapter which may be coupled with the computing system, thereby enabling the computing system to be in communication with the laser apparatus or the laser light indicia and reading assembly. Further, the power source for the table saw system may include an outlet on the fence which may be engaged by the laser apparatus or the laser light indicia and reading assembly to provide power to either system. - Heat build-up within the laser apparatus or the laser light indicia and reading assembly is an important concern. Overheating may result in malfunctioning of the laser source(s) within the housing and cause damage to the laser source or housing necessitating expensive repair and lost time. In one embodiment of the present invention the laser source may be a low power and low intensity laser source to minimize the heat build up with the housing. Such an embodiment is suitable for situations where the use of the laser apparatus and the laser light indicia and reading assembly is sporadic and limited. However, in a situation where the laser apparatus or the laser light indicia and reading assembly are in constant use over prolonged periods of time even a low power and intensity laser source may experience significant heat build up which may damage the system.
- To effectively handle a situation where the heat build up is significant, the laser apparatus and the laser light indicia and reading assembly may include a cooling system. In one embodiment, the housing of either system may include vents to allow heat to escape and cooler air to be drawn into the housing to help cool the laser sources. In an alternate embodiment, the cooling system may be comprised of a fan assembly mounted within the housing to blow air through the housing and over the laser source(s). The housing may include a vent located at an end opposite the fan to allow the blown air and heat to escape. In a third embodiment a cooling system may comprise an inert coolant being run through the housing of the laser apparatus or the laser light indicia and reading assembly. The coolant system may include a tank of the inert coolant connected to the housing through tubing and then an exhaust system connected to the housing for removing and disposing of the inert coolant after it has run through the housing. It is contemplated that a coolant system may be disposed within a device to which the laser apparatus and the laser light indicia and reading assembly are connected. The inert coolant may be presented and exhausted through the mounting connection between the device and the laser apparatus or the laser light indicia and reading assembly. For example, the laser apparatus of
FIG. 1 , may include connection portals in the mounting members. When the mounting members are secured to a fence, such as shown in FIGS. 8 through 10, tubing, which is connected to a tank of the inert coolant, may be connected to one of the mounting members. The inert coolant may be pumped into the housing through the mounting member and then exhausted through the other mounting member. It is contemplated that a variety of coolant systems, as may be contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art, may be employed without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention. - Referring now to
FIG. 26 a table saw system 2600 including alaser apparatus 2602, is shown. Thetable saw system 2600 further includes awork surface 2616, afence 2618, acircular saw blade 2620, and anadjustment mechanism 2622. Thelaser apparatus 2602 is similar to the laser apparatus ofFIG. 1 with ahousing 2604 and acomputing system 2614. However, thelaser apparatus 2602 includes fourlaser sources housing 2604 and each laser source includes a dithering assembly. In the present embodiment, the laser sources establish multiple laser beam lines across the operational field of thetable saw system 2600. The laser beams provide information on distance of thefence 2618 from thecircular saw blade 2620, the angle of thecircular saw blade 2620 relative to thework surface 2616, and have the ability to sense when a work piece has entered the operational field of thetable saw system 2600. It is understood that thelaser apparatus 2602 may gather a variety of other information as discussed inFIGS. 1 through 12 , without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention. - Referring now to
FIG. 27 , atable saw system 2700 including a first laser light indicia and readingassembly 2702 and a second laser light indicia and readingassembly 2704, is shown. Both the first and the second laser light indicia andreading assemblies computing system 2703. The computing system controls the functionality of both laser light indicia and reading assemblies. Alternatively, each laser light indicia and reading assembly may be coupled with a separate computing system. Thetable saw system 2700 further includes awork surface 2706, afence 2708, acircular saw blade 2710, and anangle adjustment mechanism 2712. The angle adjustment mechanism is similar to that discussed inFIG. 21 . In the present embodiment, the first and second laser light indicia and reading assemblies are similar to the laser light indicia and reading assembly shown and described inFIG. 13 , except that each of the housings is disposed with a plurality of laser sources. The plurality of laser sources may be enabled as scanning modules or include dithering assemblies to produce alaser beam grid 2716 upon awork piece 2714. Alternately, thelaser beam grid 2716 may be established upon awork surface 2706 of thetable saw system 2700. Using the first and second laser light indicia and reading assemblies a user of thetable saw system 2700 is enabled to establish multiple cut lines and grid points by intersecting the laser beam lines produced. The exact location of the grid points may be determined by the user and entered into the computing system which controls the laser light indicia and reading assemblies. It is contemplated that a single computing system may be enabled to control both laser light indicia and reading assemblies or that a separate and independent computing system may be used to control each laser light indicia and reading assembly. In an alternate embodiment the laser light indicia and reading assemblies may be disposed with a single laser source as described inFIG. 13 . - Referring now to
FIG. 28 , adrill press system 2800 including a laser light indicia and readingassembly 2802, is shown. Thedrill press system 2800 includes ahousing 2803 disposed with anengagement device 2804 and adrill bit 2806. In the present embodiment, the laser light indicia and readingassembly 2802 is disposed with a laser source enabled to provide a plurality of drill points along two axes. This may be accomplished by a single laser source rotating identification points in series or multiple laser sources may be included within the laser light indicia and readingassembly 2802 to provide multiple identification points. Alternately, the laser light indicia and readingassembly 2802, with a single laser source, may establish a single continuous identification point. Acomputing system 2803 is coupled to the laser light indicia and readingassembly 2802 and mounted on thehousing 2803. Alternatively, thecomputing system 2803 may be remotely located and couple with the laser light indicia and readingassembly 2802 via a wireless system. - Referring now to
FIG. 29 , a laser light indicia and readingassembly 2902 included in aboring device system 2900, is shown. The laser light indicia and readingassembly 2902 is coupled to acomputing system 2903 and may establish one or a plurality of depth indication points. This may be accomplished by a single laser source rotating identification points in series or multiple laser sources may be included within the laser light indicia and readingassembly 2902 to provide multiple identification points. As theboring bit 2904 proceeds through thework piece 2906 the laser light indicia and reading assembly is enabled to monitor the progress. When theboring bit 2904 reaches the desired depth the laser light indicia and reading assembly will provide an indication to the user of theboring device system 2900. As discussed previously, the indication may be provided through light emitting diodes, or the like. - A
rotating laser apparatus 3000 including afirst housing member 3002, asecond housing member 3004, and acomputing system 3006 is shown inFIGS. 30 through 37 . Thefirst housing member 3002 includes afirst laser source 3014, asecond laser source 3016, acommunication port 3018, afirst coupling port 3020, asecond coupling port 3022, and agrip 3024. The first housing member may include a mounting member, a latch, and a release mechanism as described previously inFIG. 1 . Thesecond housing member 3004 includes athird laser source 3026, afourth laser source 3028, and agrip 3030. Thesecond housing member 3004 may also include a mounting member, a latch, and a release mechanism as described previously inFIG. 1 . Thecommunication port 3018 provides communicative linkage to all four laser sources disposed within the first and the second housing members. - In the current embodiment, the
computing system 3006 is coupled with thefirst housing member 3002. Thecomputing system 3006 is similar to thecomputing system 104 described previously. The computing system includes afirst selector 3032, asecond selector 3034, and athird selector 3036. Further, adisplay screen 3038 provides an interactive medium for a user who is operating therotating laser apparatus 3000. Additionally, thecomputing system 3006 includes acommunication adapter 3038 for coupling with thecommunication port 3018 disposed on thefirst housing member 3002. The computing system also includes a first mountingmember 3040 and asecond mounting member 3042 for engaging with the first andsecond coupling ports first housing member 3002. Afirst button 3044 and asecond button 3046 operably engage with the first and second mounting members to perform a latch and release function enabling a user to secure thecomputing system 3006 to thefirst housing member 3002 and remove thecomputing system 3006 from thefirst housing member 3002. Anindicator 3048 is included on thecomputing system 3006 to provide a user feedback on whether thecomputing system 3006 is in communication with the four laser sources. - The two
housing members rotation mechanism 3008. Therotation mechanism 3008 comprises a joint 3010 coupled with anangle measurement device 3012. Theangle measurement device 3012 includes teeth along the outer edge, away from the joint 3010. The teeth of the angle measurement device are engaged by aratchet arm 3050 coupled on one end with a coiledcompression spring mechanism 3052 and anactivation mechanism 3054 on the other end. In the present embodiment, theratchet arm 3050 and the coiledcompression spring mechanism 3052 are disposed on the inside of thesecond housing member 3004 in a position proximal to theangle measurement device 3012. Theactivation mechanism 3054 extends through thesecond housing member 3004 allowing the user to depress an activation push button and adjust the angle of thesecond housing member 3004 relative to thefirst housing member 3002. - Preferably, joint 3010 is a hinge that allows the first and second housing members to be rotated along two axes, as shown in
FIGS. 31 through 35 . It is understood that the joint 3010 may be a variety of devices which enable such functionality as may be contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art. Further, theangle measurement device 3012 indicates to a user of therotating laser apparatus 3000 the degree that thefirst housing member 3002 is relative to thesecond housing member 3004. The position of theangle measurement device 3012 is fixed relative to thefirst housing member 3002. The fixed positioning of theangle measurement device 3012 may be accomplished by coupling theangle measurement device 3012 to thefirst housing member 3002, the joint 3010, or other methods as may be contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art. Thesecond housing member 3004 is allowed to slide freely over theangle measurement device 3012 as it is rotated relative to thefirst housing member 3002. - Alternatively, the rotation mechanism may be comprised of a variety of systems, such as a hydraulic system, compression system, or the like. Further, the user engagement device (i.e., the activation push button of the exemplary embodiment) may be other mechanisms as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art. Additionally, the rotation mechanism may be engaged directly by the user, as described above, or the rotation mechanism may be in communication with the computing system and the user may enter the desired angle and the rotation mechanism may set the
rotating laser apparatus 3000 in the desired position. - In the present embodiment, each of the two housing members include two laser sources. The
first housing member 3002 includes afirst laser source 3014 and asecond laser source 3016. Thesecond housing member 3004 includes athird laser source 3026 and afourth laser source 3028. As shown inFIG. 35 , thelaser sources rotating laser apparatus 3000 may include a fewer or greater number of laser sources disposed within each of the housing members. - As discussed above, the
computing system 3006 is similar to the computing system described previously inFIGS. 1 through 29 . In the present embodiment, thecomputing system 3006 is in communication with thelaser sources first housing member 3002. It is contemplated that the coupling of thecomputing system 3006 may occur upon thesecond housing member 3004. Exemplary interactive displays, readable on the computing system 2405, are shown inFIGS. 31, 36 and 37. The interactive displays may provide the user a display of the status of the laser source(s), the angle between the first and second housing members, the type of pattern to established, and gather information from the laser beams. Further, when thecomputing system 3006 is in communication with therotation mechanism 3008 an interactive display on thecomputing system 3006 may allow the user to enter the desired angle and have the rotation mechanism set to that angle. - Referring now to
FIG. 38 , a flowchart illustrating the functional steps achieved using the interactive display of thecomputing system 3006 of therotating laser apparatus 3000, is shown. Instep 3810 theinteractive display 3008 of thecomputing system 3006 asks the user to specify if an angle is required for the current assignment. The angle referred to is the angle that thefirst housing member 3002 is at relative to thesecond housing member 3004. If the user responds in the affirmative to this query then the user is asked to specify the angle required instep 3820. After the angle has been specified or if no angle is required for the current assignment, as directed by the user inputting the information through theinteractive display 3008 of thecomputing system 3006, then instep 3830 the laser pattern is established. - Establishing the laser pattern occurs by the user being asked on the interactive display to specify the laser pattern required. In
step 3840 the user is asked if the laser pattern is a straight laser pattern. If the user responds affirmatively, indicating that a straight laser pattern is to be established, then instep 3860 the laser signal is sent to establish the straight pattern. If in step 3840 a user indicates that a straight pattern is not desired then the user is asked, instep 3850, if a cross pattern is to be established. If the user responds to this query by indicating that a cross pattern is not to be established then thecomputing system 3006 returns to step 3830 and the interactive display prompts the user that the laser pattern setting must be established. It is contemplated that thecomputing system 3006, through theinteractive display 3008, may allow for the user to manually enter a laser pattern to be established. If the user responds to the query ofstep 3850 in the affirmative, indicating that a cross pattern is to be established, then instep 3860 the laser signal is sent to establish the cross pattern. - Referring now to
FIG. 39 , alaser apparatus 3900, is shown. In the current embodiment, thelaser apparatus 3900 comprises ahousing 3902 and alaser source 3904 coupled with thehousing 3902. Thehousing 3902 further includes a firstoptical splitter 3906, a secondoptical splitter 3908, and a thirdoptical splitter 3910. Further, the housing includes a firstoptical reflector 3912. Each of the optical splitters and the optical reflector is disposed within thehousing 3902 in proximal location to afirst emitter 3914, asecond emitter 3916, athird emitter 3918, and afourth emitter 3920, respectively. - The optical splitters function to split an incident laser beam received into two or more refracted laser beams. For example, in
FIG. 39 , anincident laser beam 3922 from thelaser source 3904 strikes the firstoptical splitter 3906 whereupon the incident laser beam is divided into afirst laser beam 3924 and asecond laser beam 3926. Thefirst laser beam 3924 is directed to the first emitter 3314 where it is emitted from the housing across an operational field. The operational field may be a variety of work area, such as those found on a table saw, drill press, belt sander, lathe, or the like. The second refractedlaser beam 3926 is directed towards the secondoptical splitter 3908. In effect, thesecond laser beam 3926 is the incident laser beam for the secondoptical splitter 3908 whereupon striking the second optical splitter the second refracted laser beam is divided into athird laser beam 3928 and afourth laser beam 3930. Thethird laser beam 3928 is directed to thesecond emitter 3916 where it is emitted form the housing across the operational field. Thefourth laser beam 3930 becomes the incident laser beam for the thirdoptical splitter 3910. The thirdoptical splitter 3910 divides the laser beam into afifth laser beam 3932 and asixth laser beam 3934. Thefifth laser beam 3932 is directed to thethird emitter 3918 where it is emitted from the housing across the operational field. Thesixth laser beam 3934 becomes the incident laser beam for the firstoptical reflector 3912. The firstoptical reflector 3912 directs the laser beam to thefourth emitter 3920 where it is emitted from the housing across the operational field. - A single laser source may reduce the power consumption of the current invention and provide a more effective way to deal with heat build up, which is inherent within a laser beam generating source. In an alternate embodiment the laser source may be a modular laser source capable of being inserted and removed from the housing of the laser apparatus. This may increase operational safety and provide an easier method of caring for the laser source by being able to remove it and store it in a separate location. Additionally, a variety of laser sources may be enabled to couple with the housing of the laser apparatus of the current invention. Thus, the user of the laser apparatus with a modular laser source has the capability of inserting the appropriate laser source for the job to be accomplished. For example, the user may need a simple laser source for one job and then require a laser source with a dithering assembly for another job. Additionally, the user may require a smaller output laser source in one situation and a larger output laser source in another. The needed functionality required by the user may be easily enabled with multiple modular laser sources with differing functional capabilities.
- Referring now to
FIG. 40 , alaser apparatus 4000 is shown. In the present embodiment thelaser apparatus 4000 comprises ahousing 4002 coupled with acomputing system 4004. Preferably, thecomputing system 4004 is similar to the computing systems described previously, except that in the present embodiment thecomputing system 4004 includes alaser source 4006. The housing includes a firstoptical splitter 4008, a firstoptical reflector 4010, a secondoptical splitter 4012, a thirdoptical splitter 4014, and a secondoptical reflector 4016. The housing further includes afirst emitter 4018, a second emitter 4020, athird emitter 4022, and afourth emitter 4024. - The
laser source 4006 emits an incident laser beam into thehousing 4002 which is then split by a firstoptical splitter 4008 into afirst laser beam 4026 and asecond laser beam 4028. Thefirst laser beam 4026 is directed to the firstoptical reflector 4010 where it is reflected through the firstoptical emitter 4018 and emitted across an operational field. Thesecond laser beam 4028 is directed to the secondoptical splitter 4008 which divides the second laser beam into a third laser beam 4030 and a fourth laser beam 4032. The third laser beam 4030 is directed through the second emitter 4020 across the operational field and the fourth laser beam 4032 becomes the incident laser beam for the thirdoptical splitter 4012. The thirdoptical splitter 4010 divides the fourth laser beam 4032 into a fifth laser beam 4034 and a sixth laser beam 4036. The fifth laser beam 4034 is directed through thethird emitter 4022 across the operation field and the sixth laser beam 4036 becomes the incident laser beam for the secondoptical reflector 4014. Upon striking the secondoptical reflector 4014, the sixth laser beam 4036 is reflected through the fourthoptical emitter 4024 and emitted across the operational field. - In an additional embodiment, the laser apparatus may include an optical splitter control mechanism. This mechanism may allow a user to determine the number of laser beams emitted from the housing of the laser apparatus. This may be beneficial When the laser apparatus is being used in situations where the size of the work surface and other components are constantly changing. For example, on a table saw all four emitters may need to be engaged to cover the work surface presented. However, a drill press may have a much smaller working surface and using more than two emitters may not be beneficial to gathering the needed information as they may be outside the scope of the work surface available.
- Referring now to
FIG. 41 , arotation laser apparatus 4100 including asingle laser source 4102, is shown. Thesingle laser source 4102 emits anincident laser beam 4104 which is split by a firstoptical splitter 4106 and a secondoptical splitter 4108. The laser beam is also reflected by a firstoptical reflector 4110 and a secondoptical reflector 4112. The optical splitters and reflectors function in the same manner as described previously inFIGS. 39 and 40 . In the present embodiment thesingle laser source 4102 is located within the joint 4114 connecting afirst housing member 4116 to asecond housing member 4118. Power may be provided through a portable power source or a power cord as described in previous figures. - A
rotation laser apparatus 4200 including afirst laser source 4202 and asecond laser source 4204, is shown inFIG. 39 . In the present embodiment a first housing member 3606 is disposed on one end with the first laser source 3602 and connected at the opposite end, through joint 3608, to a second housing member 3610. The second housing member 3610 is disposed on the opposite end of its connection to the joint 3608 with the second laser source 3604. The first housing member 3606 further includes a first optical splitter 3612 and a first optical reflector 3614. The second housing member 3610 further includes a secondoptical splitter 4216 and a secondoptical reflector 4218. The operation of the splitters and reflectors is similar to that previously described inFIGS. 39 and 40 . - In both
FIGS. 41 and 42 the number and configuration of optical splitters and reflectors may vary as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art. It is understood that the laser sources shown in the present embodiments are exemplary and may not be read as limiting or exclusive. As discussed inFIGS. 39 and 40 the laser apparati ofFIGS. 41 and 42 may includes photo multipliers of various configurations in order to provide additional functionality to the laser apparatus. Alternatively, the laser sources provided inFIGS. 41 and 42 may be modular. The laser sources may be removed from the joint or the housing members and replaced with alternate laser sources. - Referring now to
FIG. 43 , alaser apparatus 4300 is shown. Thelaser apparatus 4300 comprises ahousing 4302 disposed with alaser source 4304. The housing is further disposed with a firstoptical splitter 4306, a secondoptical splitter 4308, a thirdoptical splitter 4310, and anoptical reflector 4312. The functionality of the optical splitters and the optical reflector is similar to that described inFIGS. 39 through 42 . Additionally, the housing includes afirst emitter 4314, asecond emitter 4316, athird emitter 4318 and afourth emitter 4320. - In the present embodiment, a plurality of light
signal enhancing instruments - Alternatively, the light signal enhancing instruments may include a secondary laser source, such that the incident laser beam received has its signal strength increased. For example, a low power laser source may be included within the light signal enhancing instrument which contributes a second light signal to the existing laser beam in order to make up for a loss of light signal intensity. Such a system of multiple light signal enhancing instruments may decrease production costs by substituting low power laser sources for separate and independent laser sources located throughout the laser apparatus. It is understood that the configuration and numbers of light signal enhancing instruments may vary as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art.
- Referring now to
FIGS. 44, 45 , and 46, alaser apparatus 4400 is shown. In the current embodiment, thelaser apparatus 4400 comprises ahousing 4402 including aleveling mechanism 4404 and awireless receiver 4406. Thehousing 4402 further includes acommunication port 4407, anattachment adapter 4408, and anattachment receiver 4410. Additionally, thehousing 4402 includes afirst laser source 4412, asecond laser source 4414, athird laser source 4416, and afourth laser source 4418. - The
leveling mechanism 4404 enables a user to determine the level characteristics of thelaser apparatus 4400 in any location. Previous embodiments of the laser apparatus showed the leveling mechanism within the mounting assembly. By placing the leveling mechanism within thehousing 4402, the user may establish accurate placements in locations such as on a wall for use in mounting a drop ceiling, as shown inFIG. 46 . - The
laser sources 4412 through 4418 are similar to the laser sources shown and described previously. It is contemplated that a laser source may be located to emit a laser beam from either end of thehousing 4402. For example, a laser source may be positioned within theattachment adapter 4408. By placing the laser source at either end of the housing thelaser apparatus 4400 may be enabled to determine the level characteristics of objects located along a flat surface to which thelaser apparatus 4400 is mounted, such as a picture on a wall or the like. - The
wireless receiver 4406 enables communication between thelaser apparatus 4400 and acomputing device 4502, shown inFIG. 45 . In alternate embodiments the computing system may be communicatively coupled to the laser apparatus using a variety of systems, such as serial cable, Bluetooth, Infrared, or the like. The wireless communication system allows a user to mount thelaser apparatus 4400 in a remote location, such as that shown inFIG. 46 , and receive information on thecomputing system 4502. For example, shown inFIG. 46 , thelaser apparatus 4400 is mounted to a wall to provide leveling information for a drop ceiling. Afirst laser beam 4602 and asecond laser beam 4604 are shown striking asupport rail 4606 for the drop ceiling. In this situation the laser apparatus may communicate to the computing system that thesupport rail 4606 is not level at the two identified points. Athird laser beam 4608 and afourth laser beam 4610 may provide no such indication that thesupport rail 4606 is out of level. Thus, a user is informed not only of the misalignment but also where along thesupport rail 4606 the misalignment is occurring. - The
attachment adapter 4408 and theattachment receiver 4410 enable linking of one laser apparatus to another. As shown inFIG. 45 , a plurality oflaser apparatus 4400 may be connected. In this embodiment, the multiple laser apparatus are in communication with thecomputing system 4502. It is contemplated that the attachment adapter and attachment receiver provide a communicative link between each of thelaser apparatus 4400 allowing a single computing system to control all connected laser apparatus. Alternately, each laser apparatus may receive thewireless signal 4504 being sent out by thecomputing system 4502. - It is understood that the
leveling mechanism 4404 may be disposed within any of the previous embodiments of the laser apparatus, shown in FIGS. 1 or 30. It is further understood that thelaser apparatus 4400 may include mounting members and latch and release mechanisms, such as those previously shown and described inFIG. 1 . Additionally, a mounting assembly for connecting thelaser apparatus 4400 to a wall or other vertical surface is contemplated. Thecommunication port 4407 enables a computing system to communicate with thelaser sources 4412 through 4418. Thehousing 4402 of thelaser apparatus 4400 may be disposed with both thewireless receiver 4406 and thecommunication port 4407 or one or the other. - Smooth and easy operational control over a complex technological system, such as a laser guidance, measurement, and alignment system, may be critical to the success of any device. In the power tool field, this is even more critical as a user of power tools employing complex technology is often faced with a chaotic and dangerous working environment filled with loud noises, many moving parts, dust and debris which hamper visual capabilities, and a variety of different operations which require their attention. Therefore, the control device that the user employs to control the power tool must be simple and yet effectively provide the capability to control numerous complex tasks. In the field of power tools, the control device may be referred to as the user interface. The user interface of the present invention is designed to better serve the user by focusing on providing complex technology in an easy to understand or intuitive format.
- Many times when complex technologies are incorporated into existing devices, such as laser systems with power tools, the focus is on the technology and the user is forced to comprehend a bewildering array of new standards and display terminology. With the present invention the technology serves the user by joining the complexity of the laser system with a user interface that provides simple to follow and easy to understand textual and/or graphical representations. Out-of-the-box implies a level of user friendliness with the idea being that any user may take the present invention and by simply turning it on, start using it with ease. For example, when a user interface in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention is first turned on it may provide a calibration of the current settings of a power tool environment without being prompted by the user. From the calibration the user interface logically organizes and communicates the information to the user. Additionally, the user interface may present the user with operational choices logically related through easy to identify monikers providing a smooth flow to the user's navigation through the various user interface applications. Another example of the ease of use of the current user interface may involve the use of circular saws. All circular saw blades establish a kerf during their cut. A kerf is the area of material removed by the blade during the cut. While the kerf may be a minimal value it is not always an insignificant value and a user may wish to have the ability to account for the kerf of the cut when establishing settings. The user interface of the present invention may provide an operator the capability of determining the kerf for the circular saw blade through a user selectable menu of choices with pre-programmed kerf information. In the alternative, the user interface may establish the kerf of the circular saw blade being used without operator input and adjust all settings made to account for the kerf. Another embodiment of the present invention may be the user interface being able to determine the kerf of the circular saw blade being used through identification of a marker on the blade, such as a bar code imprinted on the blade. It is understood that adaptation of the user interface for use with other types of power tools may also include the ability to account for the amount of material removed by the power tool when establishing settings for the power tool.
- The correlation by the user interface of the selectors engaged by the user with the information the user sees on the display screen is an example of focusing on the user. This simple and effective design gives the user both qualitative and quantitative feedback on the various types of information the user may wish to see or adjust. The selectors may be buttons located on any surface of the user interface which provides for the appropriate correlation of the buttons with the icons on the display screen. Providing a display screen using liquid crystal display (LCD) technology is another example of focusing on the user. The LCD provides a visual field which has been proven to effectively reduce visual identification stress for a user. The color scheme and font types for the textual and graphical representations are designed to increase ease of use, even in the often dynamic working environments within which the user interface may be employed. Providing a backlit display screen also highlights the focus of the present invention, which is on the user.
- Powering the user interface of the present invention may occur through the use of batteries which are received in a battery cavity within the user interface. The user interface allows for the use of standard types of batteries for easy replacement and cost reduction. It is understood that the user interface may employ a variety of power sources, such as AC power through the use of a standard AC cord or fuel cells. Regardless of the power source used, the user interface provides a clear display to the user of the status of the power source. This may be helpful to avoid unnecessary delays caused by power failures which may have been avoided had the operator of the user interface known the status of the remaining power supply.
- The user interface of the present invention may provide a computing system capable of executing applications which are visualized for the operator on a display. Thus, the user interface is enabled to receive updates to its current applications inventory or replacement of applications should the need arise. For example, the user interface may execute a specific range of applications for the operation of a power tool such as a table saw, or the like. However, the operator may wish to retro-fit the user interface on a belt sander. The belt sander will have different operating requirements and capabilities than a table saw and therefore the user interface may need to download an application set directed for the operation of a belt sander. Accomplishing this updating or replacing of applications may occur using a variety of different technologies. For instance, the user interface of the present invention may include a docking station which, when the user interface is docked, allows for a communicative link to be established between the user interface and a peripheral computing system. Thus, information may be downloaded to the user interface from the peripheral computing system and the user interface may upload information to the peripheral computing system. The user interface may be disposed with communications ports, such as a serial cable port, infrared port, RF port, Bluetooth port, and the like, which allow it to network with peripheral computing systems.
- Through a user interface of the present invention, an operator of a power tool, such as a table saw, may establish the settings and measurements to be used with the power tool. For example, a user of the table saw may set a desired fence to blade distance, blade height, blade angle, etc., through the user interface. When the feedback from the
laser apparatus 100 indicates that the desired orientation has been reached it may provide an indication to the user, through the user interface. Indicators may include visual and audio feedback, and the like. For example, a sound feedback mechanism provided by a user interface of the present invention may present an audible signal to a user when a tool is in the selected position (e.g., when a saw blade has a desired height or angle, when a fence is in a desired distance from a saw blade, or the like). In a variation of this mechanism, the sound feedback mechanism may emit via a microphone/speaker a series of beeps or other noises to a user that guide the user in the positioning of the tool. For example, the beeps may become louder, more frequent, and/or change in pitch the closer the tool is to the desired position. Alternatively, a user interface of the present invention may provide visual feedback mechanism (not shown) which presents a visual signal on its display. For example, this visual signal may be as simple as a light or other symbol being displayed on the display of the user interface when the tool is in the desired position. In a variation of the visual feedback mechanism, arrows or other visual direction-guiding signals may be presented on the display to guide the user to the desired position of the tool. - A user interface in accordance with the present invention may be coupled with a laser measurement and alignment device. The laser measurement and alignment device may comprise the
laser apparatus 100 andcomputing system 104 shown and described inFIGS. 1 through 46 or may comprise a variety of systems as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art. The coupling may enable the user interface to be selectively or permanently detached from the laser measurement and alignment device. The user interface may communicate with the laser measurement and alignment device via a physical communication line (such as a cable) or via a wireless signal. It is contemplated that the user interface may couple directly with thelaser apparatus 100 or may communicatively couple with thecomputing system 104 which in turn is coupled with thelaser apparatus 100. The communicative coupling may allow the user interface to operatively control thelaser apparatus 100 from a remote location. Thus, the user interface may control a power tool, upon which the laser measurement and alignment device is coupled, from a remote location. - In an exemplary embodiment, the interface may include its own power supply so that the interface may transmit signals to the laser measurement and alignment device when detached therefrom. Alternatively, the interface and the laser measurement and alignment device may share a single power source. The power source may be batteries, fuel cells, or the like. In a further embodiment of the present invention, the user interface may include laser sources, similar to those shown and described for the
computing system 104. Moreover, the software loaded onto a user interface may be updated through a diskette, a DVD, a CD, the Internet, a network, or the like. - According to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention, a user interface may include a display which shows
exemplary screens 4700 through 5300 shown inFIG. 47 through 53. As shown inFIG. 47 through 53, each screen includes four tabs: a home tab (labeled with a “home” icon), a settings tab (labeled with a “gear” icon), a calibration tab (labeled with a “reversed triangle” icon), and a save tab (labeled with a “diskette” icon). A user may toggle among different screens by touching an appropriate tab. - As shown in
FIG. 47 , anexemplary home screen 4700 is shown. Thescreen 4700 shows a distance icon and its corresponding value (“12¼″”), an angle icon and its corresponding value (6.1°), and a height icon and its corresponding value (“1¼″”). From thescreen 4700 shown inFIG. 47 , when the settings tab is touched, thescreen 4700 may be replaced with asettings screen 4800 shown inFIG. 48 . Thescreen 4800 may show information such as the battery status of the user interface or the laser measurement and alignment device, and the like. From thescreen 4800 shown inFIG. 48 , when the calibration tab is touched, thescreen 4800 may be replaced with acalibration screen 4900 shown inFIG. 49 . Through thecalibration screen 4900, a user may calibrate the laser measurement and alignment device. From thescreen 4900 shown inFIG. 49 , when the save tab is touched, thescreen 4900 may be replaced with asave screen 5000 shown inFIG. 50 , through which a user may save a height.FIG. 51 shows an additionalexemplary save screen 5100, through which a user may save a distance.FIG. 52 shows a furtherexemplary save screen 5200, through which a user may save an angle.FIG. 53 shows a still furtherexemplary save screen 5300, which shows various other exemplary icons (e.g., a speak icon for adjusting the volume of the speaker, and the like). - It is understood that the foregoing-described screens shown in
FIGS. 47 through 53 are intended as exemplary only and not as a limitation to the present invention. Those of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that various combinations and arrangements may be employed without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention. - A user interface coupled with a laser measurement and alignment device in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention may operate according to a scheme 5400 shown in
FIG. 54 . As shown inFIG. 54 , when a laser measurement and alignment device and a user interface are not attached to a power tool (e.g., a table saw, belt sander, lathe, drill press, nailer, router table, and the like), the laser measurement and alignment device and the user interface may be used to do other measurements unrelated to the power tool or may be recharged. Additionally, the software loaded onto the user interface may be updated. For instance, the user interface may include a disk drive for loading software applications and saving information onto a removeable memory media. Alternatively, the user interface may include a drive for a DVD, a CD-ROM, flash memory devices, and the like, for receiving software updates. When a laser measurement and alignment device and a user interface are attached to a power tool (e.g., a table saw, or the like), the laser measurement and alignment device and the user interface may be used to perform measurements on the power tool. Additionally, the laser measurement and alignment device may be automatically calibrated through the user interface. - In one embodiment of the present invention, a user interface may include four operational modes: distance, angle, height, and settings, as shown in
FIG. 54 . - In a distance mode, a user may set a desired distance, e.g., a distance between a saw blade and fence of a table saw through the user interface. In the exemplary embodiment shown in
FIG. 54 , the user interface in a distance mode may include five options: (1) return to home state; (2) fine adjustment; (3) recall dimension (i.e., recall a previous saved distance); (4) save dimension (i.e., save the current distance); and (5) back one level. Under the fine adjustment option, the user interface may include three options: (1) zero dimension, either absolute or relative; (2) units (fraction, decimal, or metric); and (3) add offset distance. - In an angle mode, a user may set a desired angle, e.g., an angle between a saw blade and a line perpendicular to a table surface of a table saw through the user interface. As shown in
FIG. 54 , the user interface in an angle mode may include five options: (1) return to home state; (2) fine adjustment; (3) recall angle (i.e., recall a previous saved angle); (4) save dimension (i.e., save the current angle); and (5) back one level. Under the fine adjustment option, the user interface may include two options: (a) zero dimension (either absolute or relative); and (b) compute an angle (a result based on miter and bevel). - In a height mode, a user may set a desired height, e.g., a height of a saw blade over a table surface of a table saw through the user interface. As shown in
FIG. 54 , the user interface in a height mode may include five options: (1) return to home state (the interface directly returns to a home screen when this option is chosen); (2) fine adjustment; (3) recall dimension (i.e., recall a previous saved height); (4) save dimension (i.e., save the current height); and (5) back one level (the interface goes back one level when this option is chosen). Under the fine adjustment option, the user interface may include two options: (a) zero height (either absolute or relative); and (b) units (fraction, decimal, or metric). - In a settings mode, a user may set desired settings for the user interface. As shown in
FIG. 54 , the user interface in a settings mode may include five options: (1) return to home state; (2) global units; (3) calibration; (4) system; and (5) back one level. Under the global units option, the user interface may include three options: (a) fraction; (b) decimal; and (c) metric. The default unit may be fraction. Under the fraction unit, a user may choose a resolution such as 1/128, 1/64, 1/32, or the like. Under the decimal unit, a user may choose a resolution such as 0.0, 0.00, 0.000, or the like. Under the calibration option, the user interface may include three options: (a) measurements (distance, angle or height); (b) fence side (either left or right); (c) fence orientation (either horizontal or vertical). Under the system option, the user interface may include three options: (a) sound (either on or off); (b) display (to adjust brightness and contrast of the display); and (c) laser. Under the laser option, the user interface may include three options: (i) on (laser is on for 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, or the like); (ii) off (laser is off); and (iii) sleep mode (laser falls asleep after laser is on for 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, or the like. Additionally, under the system option, a user may update the software loaded onto the user interface. - It is understood that the number of modes and options available under each mode and the variety of operations which may be performed by the user interface may vary without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention. For instance, other options under the save dimension option, found under the distance mode, angle mode, and height mode, may include: (1) save to diskette, (2) save to CDR, and (3) save to flash media. Additionally, each screen in a particular mode may include an icon for accessing the other modes directly. For example, under the distance mode each screen presented to the user of the user interface may include an icon for the angle mode, height mode, and setting mode. By selecting the individual icon the user may be taken directly to the selected mode and presented with the series of options available under that mode.
-
FIG. 55 shows anexemplary user interface 5800 with different exemplary screens which may execute the scheme 5400 shown inFIG. 54 .FIG. 56 shows theuser interface 5800 with an exemplary calibration screen, andFIG. 57 shows theuser interface 5800 with an additional exemplary calibration screen. Theuser interface 5800 will be described in detail along withFIG. 58 . - Referring now to
FIG. 58 , theexemplary user interface 5800 will be described in more detail. Theinterface 5800 includes adisplay 5802 and a plurality of user input controls, which are generally indicated at 5804. Thedisplay 5802 may be LCD (liquid crystal display), a pixel-based display, or the like. As shown, thecontrols 5804 include a plurality of push (or enter)buttons buttons 5806 through 5814 enable a user to toggle between the screens and modes displayable on thedisplay 5802, and to select and input values for any of the available options, as discussed in more detail subsequently. InFIG. 58 , thebuttons 5806 through 5814 are positioned at the bottom of theinterface 5800 and correlate with an option on thedisplay 5802 available for selection by the user. However, thebuttons 5806 through 5814 may be positioned anywhere on theinterface 5800 as may be contemplated by a person of ordinary skill in the art. In the exemplary embodiment shown, thebuttons 5806 through 5814 are all enter buttons. However, it is within the scope of the present invention that other configurations and numbers of buttons may be used. Similarly, other forms of user input controls may be used, such as slides, track balls, switches, and pointing devices. Of course, although the described user interface is relatively large and complex, it is also possible to provide a much smaller user interface with less information displayed at a time. -
FIG. 58 illustrates a default, or home,screen 5816 of thedisplay 5802. This is the screen that is most often displayed to a user, and to which the controller defaults after user inputs are completed on any of the subsequently described screens. As shown, the display 5802 (and hence each screen of thedisplay 5802, including the home screen 5816) includes abattery region 5818, adeveloper region 5820, a current-screen region 5822, asettings region 5824 and an available-option region 5826. - The
battery region 5818 provides a user with information about the status of batteries used to provide power to the laser measurement and alignment device and theuser interface 5800. This feature is useful to allow a user to monitor the status of the battery during use. In particular, a user may want to check the remaining battery capacity before starting a project that may require more battery reserve than currently available. As shown, thebattery region 5818 includes asmall battery icon 5828 and alarge battery icon 5830. Each of theicons icon 5828 may be used to indicate the status of the battery used to provide power to one of theuser interface 5800 and the laser measurement and alignment device (e.g. the user interface 5800), and theicon 5830 may be used to indicate the status of the battery used to provide power to the other of theuser interface 5800 and the laser measurement and alignment device (e.g., the laser measurement and alignment device). Alternatively, thebattery region 5818 may include a single icon of a battery with incremental bar-graph-like readings representing the theoretical amount of battery life remaining when the battery is used to provide power to both the laser measurement and alignment device and theuser interface 5800. It is understood that thebattery region 5818 may be positioned on thedisplay 5802 as may be contemplated by a person of ordinary skill in the art. - The
developer region 5820 provides information about the developer of theuser interface 5800. As shown, theuser interface 5800 is developed by Delta International Machinery Corp. Alternatively, thedeveloper region 5820 may be not included in thedisplay 5802 at all in order to save space. In another embodiment thedeveloper region 5820 may provide an indication of ownership of the individual user interface. For example, a user may place a specific logo in this region to identify the user interface as their own. It is understood that the location of the developer region on thedisplay 5802 may vary. Further, each user interface may be enabled with a security feature which allows the individual unit to be protected from unauthorized use by another. For example, the security feature may include a user being able to enter a password into the user interface which is required before operation of the user interface will be allowed. It is contemplated that other security features may be incorporated into the present invention as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art. - The current-
screen region 5822 is used to show the screen status of theuser interface 5800 and will be described in more detail subsequently. As shown inFIG. 58 , the current-screen region 5822 of thehome screen 5816 is empty. Alternatively, the current-screen region 5822 of thehome screen 5816 may include graphic and/or textual representations indicating that the present screen is the home screen. - The
settings region 5824 displays information to the user about the current setup of programmed and user-selected modes for the tool (e.g., a table saw, or the like). As shown inFIG. 58 , theregion 5824 includes at least onemode icon 5832 and its (their) corresponding value(s) 5834. For example, as shown inFIG. 58 , three operational mode icons are shown on thehome screen 5816, each of which has at least one value. The three illustrated mode icons aredistance 5836,angle 5840, andheight 5844, each of which having a correspondingvalue FIG. 58 shows a mode icon positioned below its corresponding value, other arrangements may be utilized as may be contemplated by a person of ordinary skill in the art. For example, a mode icon (and/or textual name) may be positioned to the left, to the right, or above its corresponding value without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention. - Preferably, the
distance value 5838, theangle value 5842, and theheight value 5846 in thesettings region 5824 are all displayed in a clear fashion to a user so that the user is not confused by the numbers inside these values. Different fonts, sizes, and/or color may be used to distinguish different numbers. It is understood that visual clarity and the ease with which an operator of the user interface can view the information presented on thedisplay 5802 may implicitly establish a preferable range of fonts, sizes, and colors used by the user interface. Further, the amount of information to be presented on each screen of thedisplay 5802 may determine/establish a range of fonts, sizes, and colors to be used. This is another example of the user focus of the present invention, making complex technology available in a simple and effective manner. If a number is presented as an integer plus a fraction, the integer may be preferably presented in a larger font than a numerator and a denominator of the fraction. For example, as shown inFIG. 58 , thedistance value 5838 is “5¼″” in which the number “5¼′ is an integer “5” plus a fraction “¼”, and the height value is “2 1/16″” in which the number “2 1/16” is an integer “2” plus a fraction “ 1/16”. The integers “5” and “2” are presented in a larger font than the numerator “1” and the denominators “4” and “6” so that a user is not confused by the numbers in thevalues FIG. 58 , theangle value 5842 includes a decimal expansion “5.1”. The decimal digit “5” before the decimal point is presented in a larger font than the decimal point “1” after the decimal point so that a user is not confused by the numbers in thevalue 5842. It is understood that other methods as may be contemplated by a person of ordinary skill in the art may be used to distinguish numbers in avalue 5834 so that a user is not confused by those numbers. - For each screen of the
display 5802 of theinterface 5800, the available-option region 5826 has a plurality of tabs used to show available options a user may have from the current screen. Each of the tabs may use an icon, textual, and/or graphic representation to indicate an option available from the current screen. Each of the tabs is correlated to a user input control (e.g., a button, touch pad, and the like). To choose an option representing a tab, a corresponding user input control may be operated on (e.g., a corresponding button is pushed, or the like). In a preferred embodiment, as shown inFIG. 58 , each tab is correlated to a button directly below. This correlation of location, establishing a user input control in direct physical proximity to the tab, provides an ease of use of the present invention generally not seen in the art. - On the
home screen 5816 shown inFIG. 58 , the available-option region 5826 has fivetabs home screen 5816 as shown inFIG. 58 uses an icon to represent an available option, any of the tabs may alternatively use a textual and/or graphic representation to indicate an available option without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention. - As shown in
FIG. 58 , thetab 5848 is labeled with a “home” icon filled with color different from the background, indicating the current screen is thehome screen 5816. Moreover, thetab 5848 may be marked differently from the four other tabs (e.g., thetab 5848 inFIG. 58 has no horizontal line above the “home” icon) to indicate that the current screen is thehome screen 5816. Thetab 5848 is correlated to thebutton 5806. When thebutton 5806 is pushed, thehome screen 5816 remains (since the current screen is the home screen). - As shown in
FIG. 58 , the tab 5850 has a “distance” icon representing an option of setting the distance between the saw blade and the fence and is correlated to thebutton 5808. From thehome screen 5816 shown inFIG. 58 , when thebutton 5808 is pushed, thehome screen 5816 is replaced with adistance screen 6300 shown inFIG. 63 , and theuser interface 5800 enters into a distance mode. Thedistance screen 6300 may then be replaced with other exemplary screens in a distance mode shown inFIG. 59 andFIGS. 64 through 74 when an appropriate button (or buttons) is pushed. - As shown in
FIG. 58 , the tab 5852 has an “angle” icon representing an option of setting the angle between the saw blade and a line perpendicular to the surface of the saw table (usually less than 90°) and is correlated to thebutton 5810. From thehome screen 5816 shown inFIG. 58 , when thebutton 5810 is pushed, thehome screen 5816 is replaced with anangle screen 7500 shown inFIG. 75 , and theuser interface 5800 enters into an angle mode. Theangle screen 7500 may then be replaced with other exemplary screens in an angle mode shown inFIG. 60 andFIGS. 76 through 83 when an appropriate button (or buttons) is pushed. - As shown in
FIG. 58 , the tab 5854 has a “height” icon representing an option of setting the height of the saw blade over the saw table surface and is correlated to thebutton 5812. From thehome screen 5816 shown inFIG. 58 , when thebutton 5812 is pushed, thehome screen 5816 is replaced with aheight screen 8400 shown inFIG. 84 , and theuser interface 5800 enters into a height mode. Theheight screen 6300 may then be replaced with other exemplary screens in a height mode shown inFIG. 61 andFIGS. 85 through 94 when an appropriate button (or buttons) is pushed. - As shown in
FIG. 58 , thetab 5856 has a “gear” icon representing an option of adjusting the settings of thegraphic user interface 5800 and/or the laser measurement and alignment device and is correlated to thebutton 5814. From thehome screen 5816 shown inFIG. 58 , when thebutton 5814 is pushed, thehome screen 5816 is replaced with asettings screen 9500 shown inFIG. 95 , and theuser interface 5800 enters into a settings mode. The settings screen 9500 may then be replaced with other exemplary screens in a settings mode shown inFIG. 62 andFIGS. 96 through 101 when an appropriate button (or buttons) is pushed. - The focus of the user interface is to provide a system which enables complex operations through an easy to use controller. In order to accomplish this goal the present invention has employed the standard of logically relating the folders which contain the various operational functions enabled by the user interface. For instance, after the user interface is calibrated a
home screen 5816 provides access to distance modeFIGS. 63 through 74 , angle modeFIGS. 75 through 83 , height modeFIGS. 84 through 94 , and settings modeFIGS. 95 through 101 . When one of the modes is selected it provides access to the relevant operations pertaining to that mode in a clear and concise manner. Thus, the navigation through the complex user interface is made simple and provides a smooth flow of operation. - Referring generally now to
FIGS. 63 through 74 , variousexemplary screens 6300 through 7400 of thedisplay 5802 of theuser interface 5800 in a distance mode are shown. Referring toFIG. 63 , thedistance screen 6300 is similar to thehome screen 5816 shown inFIG. 58 . However, in itssettings region 5824 thedistance screen 6300 shows thedistance mode icon 5836 and itscorresponding value 5838 only. In a preferred embodiment, when theuser interface 5800 is in a distance mode, only thedistance mode icon 5836 and itscorresponding value 5838 are shown in the settings region 5824 (see, e.g.,FIGS. 63 through 74 ). Preferably, a user sets only a desired distance between a saw blade and a fence of a table saw through theuser interface 5800 when theuser interface 5800 is in a distance mode. Because a user does not set an angle or a blade height in a distance mode, the angle and theheight mode icons corresponding values distance mode icon 5836 and itscorresponding value 5838 in thesettings region 5824 may help a user to focus attention on setting the distance. - As shown in
FIG. 63 , thedistance screen 6300 has in its available-option region 5826 fivetabs FIG. 58 . Thetab 6302 has a “home” icon unfilled with color representing an option of “returning to home directly” and is correlated to thebutton 5806 directly below. When thebutton 5806 is pushed, thedistance screen 6300 is replaced with thehome screen 5816 shown inFIG. 58 . Thetab 6304 represents an option of “fine adjustment” and is correlated to thebutton 5808 directly below. Thetab 6306 represents an option of “recall” and is correlated to thebutton 5810 directly below. Thetab 6308 has a “diskette” icon representing an option of “save” and is correlated to thebutton 5812 directly below. As mentioned previously, it is contemplated that other removable memory media may be employed with the present invention, such as a DVD, CDR, flash media device, and the like. Therefore, the “diskette” icon may be altered to provide an alternative image more directly reflecting the current memory media being employed. Further, it is understood that the user interface may incorporate the usage of more than one type of memory media and thus include multiple memory media drives. - The
tab 6310 has a “back arrow” icon representing an option of “back one level” and is correlated to thebutton 5814 directly below. That is, when thebutton 5814 is pushed, theinterface 5800 goes back one level and thedistance screen 6300 is replaced with thehome screen 5816 shown inFIG. 58 . - From the
distance screen 6300 shown inFIG. 63 , when thebutton 5808 is pushed, thedistance screen 6300 is replaced with a distancefine adjustment screen 6400 shown inFIG. 64 . As shown, thescreen 6400 shows in its current-screen region 5822 a textual representation “Fine Adjust”, indicating to a user that the current screen is for fine adjustment of a distance. Thescreen 6400 has five tabs: thetabs 6302 and 6310 (as shown inFIG. 63 ), atab 6402 for a “Zero” option correlated to thebutton 5808, atab 6404 for “Units” option correlated to thebutton 5810, and a tab 6406 for “Offset” option correlated to thebutton 5812. When thetab 6302 is chosen (e.g., by pushing the button 5806) from thescreen 6400, theinterface 5800 directly returns to home and thescreen 6400 is replaced with thehome screen 5816 shown inFIG. 58 . When thetab 6310 is chosen (e.g., by pushing the button 5814) from thescreen 6400, theinterface 5800 goes back one level and thescreen 6400 is replaced with thedistance screen 6300 shown inFIG. 63 . - When the “Zero” option is chosen (e.g., by pushing the button 5808) from the
screen 6400, thescreen 6400 is replaced with a distance relative zeroscreen 6500 shown inFIG. 65 . As shown inFIG. 65 , thescreen 6500 has in its current-screen region 5822 a word “Zero”, indicating thecurrent screen 6500 is a distance zero screen. Additionally, thescreen 6500 has in its settings region 5824 a letter “R”, indicating that thecurrent screen 6500 is a distance relative zero screen. This is further shown by different representations of twonew tabs 6502 and 6504 on thescreen 6500, where thetab 6504 representing a distance relative zero option does not have a horizontal line above the word “Relative”, indicating the distance relative zero option is chosen. Using thebuttons screen 6500 shown inFIG. 65 and a distance absolute zero screen (not shown). - When the “Units” option is chosen (e.g., by pushing the button 5810) from the
screen 6400, thescreen 6400 is replaced with a default distance units screen 6600 shown inFIG. 66 . As shown inFIG. 66 , thescreen 6600 has in its current-screen region 5822 a distance icon and a word “Units”, indicating thecurrent screen 6600 is a distance units screen. Thescreen 6600 includes three new tabs 6602 (Frac), 6604 (Dec) and 6606 (mm), which represent a fraction unit option, a decimal unit option, and a metric unit option, respectively. Thetab 6602 representing a fraction unit option does not have a horizontal line above “Frac”, indicating the fraction unit option is chosen. As a result of this option, the number in thedistance value 5838 is displayed in a format of “integer+fraction” (see, e.g., “5¼” inFIG. 66 ). - From the
screen 6600 shown inFIG. 66 , when thebutton 5810 is pushed, thescreen 6600 is replaced with a distancedecimal unit screen 6700 shown inFIG. 67 . As shown inFIG. 67 , thescreen 6700 has in its current-screen region 5822 a distance icon and words “Dec Units”, indicating thecurrent screen 6700 is a distance decimal units screen. Thetab 6604 representing a decimal unit option does not have a horizontal line above “Dec”, indicating the decimal unit option is chosen. As a result of this option, the number in thedistance value 5838 is displayed in a format of a decimal expansion (see, e.g., “5.25” inFIG. 67 ). Using thebuttons screen 6600 shown inFIG. 66 , the distance decimal units screen 6700 shown inFIG. 67 , and a distance metric unit screen (not shown). - When the “Offset” option is chosen (e.g., by pushing the button 5812) from the
screen 6400 shown inFIG. 64 , thescreen 6400 is replaced with a distance offsetscreen 6800 shown inFIG. 68 . As shown inFIG. 68 , thescreen 6800 has in its current-screen region 5822 a word “Offset”, indicating thecurrent screen 6800 is a distance offset screen. Thescreen 6800 includes a new tab 6802 (Set), representing an option of adding an offset distance. - From the
distance screen 6300 shown inFIG. 63 , when thebutton 5810 is pushed, thedistance screen 6300 is replaced with adistance recall screen 6900 shown inFIG. 69 . As shown, thescreen 6900 shows in its current-screen region 5822 a textual representation “Recall”, indicating to a user that the current screen is for recalling a saved distance. There may exist at least one saved distance value in a memory of theuser interface 5800 or a memory of the laser measurement and alignment device communicatively coupled to theuser interface 5800. Each saved distance value may have a label number such as 1, 2, 3, etc. For example, thescreen 6900 shows a value 5838 (“5¼″”) in itssettings region 5824. The number “1” to the left of “5¼″” indicates that the label number for “5¼″” is “1”. Thescreen 6900 includes two new tabs: atab 6902 for a “+” option of moving to a saved distance value with a higher label number than that shown on the current screen, and atab 6904 for a “−” option of moving to a saved distance value with a lower label number than that shown on the current screen. For example, from thescreen 6900 shown inFIG. 69 , when the “+” option (the tab 6902) is chosen, thescreen 6900 is replaced with ascreen 7000 shown inFIG. 70 , where a saved distance value with a higher label number “2” (“2 3/64″”) is shown. Additionally, from thescreen 6900 shown inFIG. 69 , when the “+” option is repeatedly chosen several times (e.g., by pushing thebutton 5808 several times), thescreen 6900 may be replaced with ascreen 7100 shown inFIG. 71 , where a saved distance value with a higher label number “9” (“12⅞″”) is shown. From thescreen 7100 shown inFIG. 71 , when the “−” option (the tab 6904) is chosen, thescreen 7100 is replaced with ascreen 7200 shown inFIG. 72 , where a saved distance value with a lower label number “8” (“3⅜″”) is shown. - From the
distance screen 6300 shown inFIG. 63 , when the button-5812 is pushed, thedistance screen 6300 may be replaced with adistance save screen 7300 shown inFIG. 73 . As shown, thescreen 7300 shows in its current-screen region 5822 a diskette icon and a textual representation “Save”, indicating to a user that the current screen is for saving a distance value. Thescreen 7300 includes a “diskette” tab 7302, representing an option of saving the current value 5838 (“6½″”). When the tab 7302 is chosen from thescreen 7300, thescreen 7300 is replaced with thescreen 7400 shown inFIG. 74 , where the value “6½″” is given a label number (e.g., “11” shown inFIG. 74 ) and may be saved into a memory of theuser interface 5800 or a memory of the laser measurement and alignment device communicatively coupled to theuser interface 5800. - It is contemplated that an operator of the user interface may input changes to the distance settings directly. For example, under the distance fine adjustment screen an alternative user input control mode may be included which allows the user to directly affect changes in the distance settings. The user may be enabled to make corrections to the distance in incremental amounts, such as ½ inch or ¼ inch, 0.1″ or 0.01″, or 10 mm or 5 mm. The user interface may provide “+” and “−” tabs correlated to user input control buttons which allow for this type of adjustment. The direct change of distance setting may be configured in a variety of ways and be within various locations of the height mode as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art.
- Referring generally now to
FIGS. 75 through 83 , variousexemplary screens 7500 through 8300 of thedisplay 5802 of theuser interface 5800 in an angle mode are shown. Referring toFIG. 75 , theangle screen 7500 is similar to thehome screen 5816 shown inFIG. 58 . However, in itssettings region 5824 theangle screen 7500 shows thedistance mode icon 5840 and itscorresponding value 5842 only. In a preferred embodiment, when theuser interface 5800 is in an angle mode, only theangle mode icon 5840 and itscorresponding value 5842 are shown in the settings region 5824 (see, e.g.,FIGS. 75 through 83 ). Preferably, a user sets only a desired angle between a saw blade and a line perpendicular to the table surface of a table saw through theuser interface 5800 when theuser interface 5800 is in an angle mode. Because a user does not set a distance or a blade height in an angle mode, the distance and theheight mode icons corresponding values angle mode icon 5840 and itscorresponding value 5842 in thesettings region 5824 may help a user to focus attention on setting the angle. - As shown in
FIG. 75 , theangle screen 7500 shows in its current-screen region 5822 an angle icon and a textual representation “Angle”, indicating to a user that the current screen is in an angle mode. As shown, thescreen 7500 has in its available-option region 5826 fivetabs FIG. 58 . Thetab 6302 has a “home” icon unfilled with color representing an option of “returning to home directly” and is correlated to thebutton 5806 directly below. When thebutton 5806 is pushed, theangle screen 7500 is replaced with thehome screen 5816 shown inFIG. 58 . Thetab 6304 represents an option of “fine adjustment” and is correlated to thebutton 5808 directly below. Thetab 6306 represents an option of “recall” and is correlated to thebutton 5810 directly below. Thetab 6308 has a “diskette” icon representing an option of “save” and is correlated to thebutton 5812 directly below. Thetab 6310 has a “back arrow” icon representing an option of “back one level” and is correlated to thebutton 5814 directly below. That is, when thebutton 5814 is pushed, theinterface 5800 goes back one level and theangle screen 7500 is replaced with thehome screen 5816 shown inFIG. 58 . - From the
angle screen 7500 shown inFIG. 75 , when thebutton 5808 is pushed, theangle screen 7500 is replaced with an anglefine adjustment screen 7600 shown inFIG. 76 . As shown, thescreen 7600 shows in its current-screen region 5822 an angle icon and a textual representation “Fine Adjust”, indicating to a user that the current screen is for fine adjustment of an angle. Thescreen 7600 includes three tabs: thetabs 6302 and 6310 (as shown inFIG. 75 ), and atab 6402 for a “Zero” option correlated to thebutton 5808. When thetab 6302 is chosen (e.g., by pushing the button 5806) from thescreen 7600, theinterface 5800 directly returns to home and thescreen 7600 is replaced with thehome screen 5816 shown inFIG. 58 . When thetab 6310 is chosen (e.g., by pushing the button 5814) from thescreen 7600, theinterface 5800 goes back one level and thescreen 7600 is replaced with theangle screen 7500 shown inFIG. 75 . - When the “Zero” option is chosen (e.g., by pushing the button 5808) from the
screen 7600 shown inFIG. 76 , thescreen 7600 is replaced with an angle zeroscreen 7700 shown inFIG. 77 . As shown inFIG. 77 , thescreen 7700 has in its current-screen region 5822 an angle icon and a word “Zero”, indicating thecurrent screen 7700 is an angle zero screen. Thescreen 7700 includes two new tabs: atab 7702 representing an angle absolute zero option, and atab 7704 representing an angle relative zero option. When thetab 7704 option is chosen (e.g., by pushing the button 5810) from thescreen 7700 shown inFIG. 77 , thescreen 7700 is replaced with an angle relative zeroscreen 7800 shown inFIG. 78 . As shown inFIG. 78 , thescreen 7800 has in its current-screen region 5822 an angle icon and a word “Relative”, indicating thecurrent screen 7800 is an angle relative zero screen. Using thebuttons screen 7800 shown inFIG. 78 and the angle zeroscreen 7700 shown inFIG. 77 . - From the
angle screen 7500 shown inFIG. 75 , when thebutton 5810 is pushed, theangle screen 7500 is replaced with anangle recall screen 7900 shown inFIG. 79 . As shown, thescreen 7900 shows in its current-screen region 5822 an angle icon and a textual representation “Recall”, indicating to a user that the current screen is for recalling a saved angle. There may exist at least one saved angle value in a memory of theuser interface 5800 or a memory of the laser measurement and alignment device communicatively coupled to theuser interface 5800. Each saved angle value may have a label number such as 1, 2, 3, etc. For example, thescreen 7900 shows a value 5842 (“15.1°”) in itssettings region 5824. The number “2” to the left of “15.1°” indicates that the label number for “15.1°” is “2”. Thescreen 7900 includes two new tabs: atab 7902 for a “+” option of moving to a saved angle value with a higher label number than that shown on the current screen, and atab 7904 for a “−” option of moving to a saved angle value with a lower label number than that shown on the current screen. For example, from thescreen 7900 shown inFIG. 79 , when the “+” option (the tab 7902) is chosen (several times), thescreen 7900 may be replaced with ascreen 8000 shown inFIG. 80 , where a saved angle value with a label number “5” (“30.0°”) is shown. Additionally, from thescreen 7900 shown inFIG. 79 , when the “−” option (the tab 7904) is chosen, thescreen 7900 may be replaced with ascreen 8100 shown inFIG. 81 , where a saved angle value with a lower label number “1” (“7.5°”) is shown. - From the
angle screen 7500 shown inFIG. 75 , when thebutton 5812 is pushed, theangle screen 7500 is replaced with an angle savescreen 8200 shown inFIG. 82 . As shown, thescreen 8200 shows in its current-screen region 5822 an angle icon and a textual representation “Save”, indicating to a user that the current screen is for saving an angle value. Thescreen 8200 includes a “diskette”tab 8202, representing an option of saving the current value 5842 (“41.0°”). As mentioned previously, it is contemplated that other removable memory media may be employed with the present invention, such as a DVD, CDR, flash media device, and the like. Therefore, the “diskette” icon may be altered to provide an alternative image more directly reflecting the current memory media being employed. Further, it is understood that the user interface may incorporate the usage of more than one type of memory media and thus include multiple memory media drives. - When the
tab 8202 is chosen from thescreen 8200, thescreen 8200 is replaced with ascreen 8300 shown inFIG. 83 , where the value “41.0°” is given a label number (e.g., “9” shown inFIG. 83 ) and may be saved into a memory of theuser interface 5800 or a memory of the laser measurement and alignment device communicatively coupled to theuser interface 5800. - It is contemplated that an operator of the user interface may input changes to the angle settings directly. For example, under the angle fine adjustment screen an alternative user input control mode may be included which allows the user to directly affect changes in the angle settings. The user may be enabled to make corrections to the angle in incremental amounts, such as 0.5 degrees or 1 degree. The user interface may provide “+” and “−” tabs correlated to user input control buttons which allow for this type of adjustment. The direct change of angle setting may be configured in a variety of ways and be within various locations of the angle mode as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art.
- Referring generally now to
FIGS. 84 through 94 , variousexemplary screens 8400 through 9400 of thedisplay 5802 of theuser interface 5800 in a height mode are shown. Referring toFIG. 84 , theheight screen 8400 is similar to thehome screen 5816 shown inFIG. 58 . However, in itssettings region 5824 theheight screen 8400 shows theheight mode icon 5844 and itscorresponding value 5846 only. In a preferred embodiment, when theuser interface 5800 is in a height mode, only theheight mode icon 5844 and itscorresponding value 5846 are shown in the settings region 5824 (see, e.g.,FIGS. 84 through 94 ). Preferably, a user sets only a desired height of a saw blade over a table surface of a table saw through theuser interface 5800 when theuser interface 5800 is in a height mode. Because a user does not set a distance or an angle in a height mode, the distance andangle mode icons corresponding values height mode icon 5844 and itscorresponding value 5846 in thesettings region 5824 may help a user to focus attention on setting the distance. - As shown in
FIG. 84 , theheight screen 8400 shows in its current-screen region 5822 a height icon and a textual representation “Height”, indicating to a user that the current screen is in a height mode. As shown, theheight screen 8400 has in its available-option region 5826 fivetabs FIG. 58 . Thetab 6302 has a “home” icon unfilled with color representing an option of “returning to home directly” and is correlated to thebutton 5806 directly below. When thebutton 5806 is pushed, thedistance screen 6300 is replaced with thehome screen 5816 shown inFIG. 58 . Thetab 6304 represents an option of “fine adjustment” and is correlated to thebutton 5808 directly below. Thetab 6306 represents an option of “recall” and is correlated to thebutton 5810 directly below. Thetab 6308 has a “diskette” icon representing an option of “save” and is correlated to thebutton 5812 directly below. Thetab 6310 has a “back arrow” icon representing an option of “back one level” and is correlated to thebutton 5814 directly below. That is, when thebutton 5814 is pushed, theinterface 5800 goes back one level and thedistance screen 8400 is replaced with thehome screen 5816 shown inFIG. 58 . - From the
height screen 8400 shown inFIG. 84 , when thebutton 5808 is pushed, theheight screen 8400 is replaced with a heightfine adjustment screen 8500 shown inFIG. 85 . As shown, thescreen 8500 shows in its current-screen region 5822 a height icon and a textual representation “Fine Adjust”, indicating to a user that the current screen is for fine adjustment of a height. Thescreen 8500 has five tabs: thetabs 6302 and 6310 (as shown inFIG. 84 ), atab 8502 for a “Zero” option correlated to thebutton 5808, atab 8504 for “Units” option correlated to thebutton 5810, and atab 8506 for “Offset” option correlated to thebutton 5812. When thetab 6302 is chosen (e.g., by pushing the button 5806) from thescreen 8500, theinterface 5800 directly returns to home and thescreen 8500 is replaced with thehome screen 5816 shown inFIG. 58 . When thetab 6310 is chosen (e.g., by pushing the button 5814) from thescreen 8500, theinterface 5800 goes back one level and thescreen 8500 is replaced with theheight screen 8400 shown inFIG. 84 . - When the “Zero” option is chosen (e.g., by pushing the button 5808) from the
screen 8500, thescreen 8500 is replaced with a height absolute zeroscreen 8600 shown inFIG. 86 . As shown inFIG. 86 , thescreen 8600 has in its current-screen region 5822 a height icon and a word “Zero”, indicating thecurrent screen 8600 is a height zero screen. Additionally, thescreen 8600 has in its settings region 5824 a letter “A”, indicating that thecurrent screen 8600 is a height absolute zero screen. This is further shown by different representations of twonew tabs screen 8600, where thetab 8602 representing a height absolute zero option does not have a horizontal line above the word “Absolute”, indicating the height absolute zero option is chosen. Using thebuttons screen 8500 shown inFIG. 85 and a height relative zero screen (not shown). - When the “Units” option is chosen (e.g., by pushing the button 5810) from the
screen 8500, thescreen 8500 is replaced with a default height units screen 8700 shown inFIG. 87 . As shown inFIG. 87 , thescreen 8700 has in its current-screen region 5822 a height icon and a word “Units”, indicating thecurrent screen 8700 is a height units screen. Thescreen 8700 includes three new tabs 8702 (Frac), 8704 (Dec) and 8706 (mm), which represent a fraction unit option, a decimal unit option, and a metric unit option, respectively. Thetab 8702 representing a fraction unit option does not have a horizontal line above “Frac”, indicating the fraction unit option is chosen. As a result of this option, the number in theheight value 5846 is displayed in a format of “integer+fraction” (see, e.g., “2 1/16” inFIG. 87 ). - From the
screen 8700 shown inFIG. 87 , when thebutton 5810 is pushed, thescreen 8700 may be replaced with a heightdecimal unit screen 8800 shown inFIG. 88 . As shown inFIG. 88 , thetab 8704 representing a decimal unit option does not have a horizontal line above “Dec”, indicating the decimal unit option is chosen. As a result of this option, the number in thedistance value 5838 is displayed in a format of a decimal expansion (see, e.g., “5.25” inFIG. 88 ). Using thebuttons screen 8700 shown inFIG. 87 , the height decimal units screen 8800 shown inFIG. 88 , and a height metric unit screen (not shown). - When the “Offset” option is chosen (e.g., by pushing the button 5812) from the
screen 8500 shown inFIG. 85 , thescreen 8500 is replaced with a height offsetscreen 8900 shown inFIG. 89 . As shown inFIG. 89 , thescreen 8900 has in its current-screen region 5822 a height icon and a word “Offset”, indicating thecurrent screen 8900 is a height offset screen. Through thescreen 8900, a user may add an offset height. - From the
height screen 8400 shown inFIG. 84 , when thebutton 5810 is pushed (and possibly after some other manipulations of the user interface controls 5804), theheight screen 8400 may be replaced with aheight recall screen 9000 shown inFIG. 90 . As shown, thescreen 9000 shows in its current-screen region 5822 a height icon and a textual representation “Recall”, indicating to a user that the current screen is for recalling a saved height. There may exist at least one saved height value in a memory of theuser interface 5800 or a memory of the laser measurement and alignment device communicatively coupled to theuser interface 5800. Each saved height value may have a label number such as 1, 2, 3, etc. For example, thescreen 9000 shows a value 5846 (“2 1/16″”) in itssettings region 5824. The number “16” to the left of “2 1/16″” indicates that the label number for “2 1/16″” is “16”. Thescreen 9000 includes two new tabs: atab 9002 for a “+” option of moving to a saved height value with a higher label number than that shown on the current screen, and atab 9004 for a “−” option of moving to a saved height value with a lower label number than that shown on the current screen. For example, from thescreen 9000 shown inFIG. 90 , when the “−” option (the tab 9004) is chosen repeatedly, thescreen 9000 may be replaced with ascreen 9100 shown inFIG. 91 , where a saved height value with a lower label number “5” (“2¾″”) is shown. Additionally, from thescreen 9000 shown inFIG. 90 , when the “+” option (the tab 9002) is chosen repeatedly, thescreen 9000 may be replaced with ascreen 9200 shown inFIG. 92 , where a saved height value with a higher label number “21” (“1 1/64″”) is shown. - From the
height screen 8400 shown inFIG. 84 , when thebutton 5812 is pushed, theheight screen 8400 may be replaced with a height savescreen 9300 shown inFIG. 93 . As shown, thescreen 9300 shows in its current-screen region 5822 a height icon and a textual representation “Save”, indicating to a user that the current screen is for saving a height value. Thescreen 9300 includes a “diskette”tab 9302, representing an option of saving the current value 5846 (“2 1/16″”). When thetab 9302 is chosen from thescreen 9300, the current value “2 1/16″” may be given a label number and may be saved into a memory of theuser interface 5800 or a memory of the laser measurement and alignment device communicatively coupled to theuser interface 5800. As mentioned previously, it is contemplated that other removable memory media may be employed with the present invention, such as a DVD, CDR, flash media device, and the like. Therefore, the “diskette” icon may be altered to provide an alternative image more directly reflecting the current memory media being employed. Further, it is understood that the user interface may incorporate the usage of more than one type of memory media and thus include multiple memory media drives. -
FIG. 94 shows another exemplary height savescreen 9400, where a current value “⅝″” is given a label number (“12”) and may be saved into a memory of theuser interface 5800 or a memory of the laser measurement and alignment device communicatively coupled to theuser interface 5800. - It is contemplated that an operator of the user interface may input changes to the height settings directly. For example, under the height fine adjustment screen an alternative user input control mode may be included which allows the user to directly affect changes in the height settings. The user may be enabled to make corrections to the height in incremental amounts, such as ½ inch or ¼ inch, 0.1″ or 0.01,5 mm or 10 mm. The user interface may provide “+” and “−” tabs correlated to user input control buttons which allow for this type of adjustment. The direct change of height setting may be configured in a variety of ways and be within various locations of the height mode as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art.
- Referring generally now to
FIGS. 95 through 101 , variousexemplary screens 9500 through 10100 of thedisplay 5802 of theuser interface 5800 in a settings mode are shown. Referring toFIG. 95 , the settings screen 9500 shows in its current-screen region 5822 a settings icon and a textual representation “Settings”, indicating to a user that the current screen is in a settings mode. As shown, the settings screen 9500 has in its available-option region 5826 fivetabs FIG. 58 . Thetab 6302 has a “home” icon unfilled with color representing an option of “returning to home directly” and is correlated to thebutton 5806 directly below. When thebutton 5806 is pushed, the settings screen 9500 is replaced with thehome screen 5816 shown inFIG. 58 . Thetab 9502 represents an option of “(global) Units” and is correlated to thebutton 5808 directly below. Thetab 9504 represents an option of “Calibration” and is correlated to thebutton 5810 directly below. Thetab 9506 represents an option of “System” and is correlated to thebutton 5812 directly below. Thetab 6310 has a “back arrow” icon representing an option of “back one level” and is correlated to thebutton 5814 directly below. That is, when thebutton 5814 is pushed, theinterface 5800 goes back one level and the settings screen 9500 may be replaced with thehome screen 5816 shown inFIG. 58 . - From the settings screen 9500 shown in
FIG. 95 , when the “Units” option is chosen (e.g., by pushing the button 5808), thescreen 9500 may be replaced with a default global units screen (see, e.g., 9600 shown inFIG. 96 ). As shown inFIG. 96 , thescreen 9600 has in its current-screen region 5822 a settings icon and a textual representation “Global Units”, indicating thecurrent screen 9600 is a global units screen. Thescreen 9600 includes three new tabs 9602 (Frac), 9604 (Dec) and 9606 (mm), which represent a global fraction unit option, a global decimal unit option, and a global metric unit option, respectively, for both adistance value 5838 and aheight value 5846. Thetab 9602 representing a global fraction unit option does not have a horizontal line above “Frac”, indicating the fraction unit option is chosen. As a result of choosing this option, the number in a distance value 5838 (and/or a height value 5846) is displayed in a format of “integer+fraction” (see, e.g., “ 1/16” for adistance value 5838 inFIG. 96 , where the integer is not shown because the integer is zero). - From the
screen 9600 shown inFIG. 96 , when thebutton 5812 is pushed, thescreen 9600 may be replaced with a global metric units screen (see, e.g., 9700 shown inFIG. 97 ). As shown inFIG. 97 , thetab 9606 representing a global metric unit option does not have a horizontal line above “mm”, indicating the global metric unit option is chosen. As a result of this option, a distance value 5838 (and/or a height value 5846) is displayed in a metric unit (see, e.g., “1.58 mm” inFIG. 97 , where mm is millimeter). Using thebuttons FIG. 96 ), a global metric units screen (see, e.g., 9700 shown inFIG. 97 ), and a global decimal units screen (not shown). - When the “Calibration” option is chosen (e.g., by pushing the button 5810) from the
screen 9500 shown inFIG. 95 , thescreen 9500 may be replaced with a calibration screen (see, e.g., 5600 shown inFIG. 56 , and 5700 shownFIG. 57 ). Through a calibration screen, a user may perform all kinds of calibrations to a height, an angle, and a distance. Additionally, theuser interface 5800 may have a drop-down menu (not shown) on thedisplay 5802 to enable a user to select a calibration parameter from the drop-down menu. For example, a drop-down menu may provide kerf information for various kinds of saw blades, fence orientation information (horizontal or vertical), fence type (Unifense, Biesemeyer fence, or the like). Additionally, a saw blade may have a bar code or a RFID (Radio Frequency Identification) number attached to the saw blade body. When a saw blade is scanned by a bar code scanner or a RFID scanner, as the laser source employed by the present invention may be (shown and described previously inFIGS. 15 through 19 ), the relevant information (e.g., kerf, and the like) may be automatically entered into theuser interface 5800 to enable theuser interface 5800 to perform the calibration automatically. - From the settings screen 9500 shown in
FIG. 95 , when the “System” option is chosen (e.g., by pushing the button 5812), thescreen 9500 may be replaced with a system screen (see, e.g., 9800 shown inFIG. 98 ). As shown inFIG. 98 , thescreen 9800 has in its current-screen region 5822 a settings icon and a textual representation “System”, indicating thecurrent screen 9800 is a system screen. Thescreen 9800 includes threenew tabs - From the
system screen 9800 shown inFIG. 98 , when thetab 9802 is chosen (e.g., by pushing the button 5808), thescreen 9800 may be replaced with a sound screen (see, e.g., 9900 shown inFIG. 99 ). As shown inFIG. 99 , thescreen 9900 has in its current-screen region 5822 a sound icon and a textual representation “Sound”, indicating thecurrent screen 9900 is a sound screen. Thescreen 9900 includes two new tabs 9902 (“+”) and 9904 (“−”), which represent an option of increasing a sound volume and an option of decreasing a sound volume, respectively. Thescreen 9900 includes a bar-type scale 9906 showing the current scale of the volume being ”5”. By pushing thebutton 5808 from thescreen 9900, thetab 9902 is chosen and the sound volume is increased to a scale larger than “5”. By pushing thebutton 5810 from thescreen 9900, thetab 9904 is chosen and the sound volume is decreased to a scale smaller than “5”. When the scale is decreased to zero (“0”), the sound is turned off. - The sound feedback mechanism provided by the
user interface 5800 presents an audible signal to a user when a tool is in the selected position (e.g., when a saw blade has a desired height or angle, when a fence is in a desired distance from a saw blade, or the like). In a variation of this mechanism, the sound feedback mechanism may emit via a microphone/speaker a series of beeps or other noises to a user that guide the user in the positioning of the tool. For example, the beeps may become louder, more frequent, and/or change in pitch the closer the tool is to the desired position. - Alternatively, the
user interface 5800 may provide visual feedback mechanism (not shown) which presents a visual signal on itsdisplay 5802. For example, this visual signal may be as simple as a light or other symbol being displayed on thedisplay 5802 when the tool is in the desired position. In a variation of the visual feedback mechanism, arrows or other visual direction-guiding signals may be presented on thedisplay 5802 to guide the user to the desired position of the tool. - From the
system screen 9800 shown inFIG. 98 , when thetab 9804 is chosen (e.g., by pushing the button 5810), thescreen 9800 may be replaced with a brightness screen (see, e.g., 10000 shown inFIG. 100 ). As shown inFIG. 100 , thescreen 10000 has in its current-screen region 5822 a brightness icon and a textual representation “Brightness”, indicating thecurrent screen 10000 is a brightness screen. Thescreen 10000 includes two new tabs 10002 (“+”) and 10004 (“−”), which represent an option of increasing screen brightness and an option of decreasing screen brightness, respectively. Thescreen 10000 includes a bar-type scale 10006 showing the current brightness scale being “8”. By pushing thebutton 5808 from thescreen 10000, thetab 10002 is chosen and the screen brightness is increased to a scale larger than “8”. By pushing thebutton 5810 from thescreen 10000, thetab 10004 is chosen and the screen brightness is decreased to a scale smaller than “8”. - From the
system screen 9800 shown inFIG. 98 , when thetab 9806 is chosen (e.g., by pushing the button 5812), thescreen 9800 may be replaced with a laser time out screen (see, e.g., 10100 shown inFIG. 101 ). As shown inFIG. 101 , thescreen 10100 has in its current-screen region 5822 a laser time out icon and a textual representation “Laser Time Out”, indicating thecurrent screen 10100 is a laser time out screen. Thescreen 10100 includes two new tabs 10102 (“+”) and 10104 (“−”), which represent an option of increasing a time period for laser time out and an option of decreasing a time period for laser time out, respectively. Thescreen 10100 includes a bar-type scale 10106 showing three time periods for laser time out: 10 seconds, 30 seconds, and 60 seconds. The current time period for laser time out is shown to be “30 seconds” inFIG. 101 . That is, the laser measurement and alignment device will be turned off after it is on for 30 seconds. By pushing thebutton 5808 from thescreen 10100, thetab 10102 is chosen and the time period for laser time out is increased to “60 seconds”. By pushing thebutton 5810 from thescreen 10100, thetab 10104 is chosen and the time period for laser time out is decreased to “10 seconds”. An alternative embodiment of the bar-type scale 10106 is shown in 10100 ofFIG. 62 , where the current time period for laser time out is shown to be “10 seconds”, and a user may use thebutton 5808 to increase this time period and may use thebutton 5810 to decrease this time period. - It is understood that the foregoing-described screens shown in
FIGS. 55 through 101 are intended as exemplary only and not as a limitation to the present invention. Those of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that various combinations and arrangements may be employed without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention. - Referring generally to
FIGS. 102 through 143 , exemplary embodiments of the present invention are shown. Anail gun 100 including a stud finderlaser indicator assembly 102, is shown inFIGS. 102 through 104 . In the preferred embodiment, the stud finderlaser indicator assembly 102 includes ahousing 104 which encompasses alaser indicator assembly 106 and a studfinder detector assembly 108. Thehousing 104 is enabled to couple with anose casting assembly 110. The nose casting assembly 110 couples with anail magazine 103 and acasing 105, thecasing 105 housing a nail driving assembly. Thecasing 105 further couples with ahandle 107 which couples with thenail magazine 103. Atrigger 109 is operationally coupled with the nail driving assembly. In the present embodiment, the coupling of the stud finderlaser indicator assembly 102 with thenose casing assembly 110 occurs through a mounting member 111 coupled with thehousing 104. The mounting member is a slide and latch mechanism although it is understood that the coupling may occur by various mechanisms as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art. The stud finderlaser indicator assembly 102 is enabled to detect the presence of a stud behind a first surface and then indicate its location by establishing a laser indicator/marker upon the first surface. The laser indicator may take a variety of forms, such as a point of light, a cross-hair configuration, a line configuration, and the like. - In
FIG. 104 , an alternative embodiment of the stud finderlaser indicator assembly 102, is shown. In this embodiment theassembly 102 further comprises asecond indicator assembly 112, which is a light emitting diode that provides a secondary visual indicator to the user of the present invention when a stud has been detected and located. It is understood that the second indicator assembly may take a variety of forms without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention. For example, the second indicator assembly may be a series of light emitting diodes. Alternatively, the second indicator assembly may provide an audio signal when the stud is detected and/or located. Further, the stud finderlaser indicator assembly 102 ofFIG. 104 includes aselector assembly 114. Theselector assembly 114 comprises amultiple position switch 116. Theselector assembly 114 enables the user of theassembly 102 to selectively determine its operation. For instance, the user may prefer not to use theassembly 102 for a particular task and may position theselector assembly 114 in a position which disables theassembly 102. Theselector assembly 114 may enable themultiple position switch 116 with two or more positions for enabling theassembly 102 to accomplish a variety of tasks. The mounting member 111 has been reconfigured as a slide adapter for coupling with thenose casting assembly 110 which includes aslide 118 - Referring now to
FIG. 105 , anail gun 1050, similar to that shown and described inFIGS. 102 through 104 , comprises alaser indicator assembly 1052 coupled with anose casting assembly 1054. In this preferred embodiment, thelaser indicator assembly 1052 is employed by the user of thenail gun 1050 to establish a visual indicator/marker on afirst surface 1056. The visual marker is used by the operator of thenail gun 1050 to establish where the next nail is to be driven. In the present embodiment, this is accomplished by thelaser indicator assembly 1052 establishing a laser line on thefirst surface 1056. The laser line coincides with the position of astud 1058 behind thefirst surface 1056. It is understood that the operator of thenail gun 1050 may employ thenail gun 1050 simply as a tool to provide a point of reference for where the next nail will be driven. - In
FIGS. 106 through 110 , anail gun 1060, similar to that shown and described inFIGS. 102 through 104 , includes a studfinder detector assembly 1061 coupled with anose casting assembly 1062. The studfinder detector assembly 1061 establishes the presence and location of astud 1063 behind afirst surface 1064. In the present embodiment, the studfinder detector assembly 1061 further includes avisual indication assembly 1065, which is a light emitting diode. The light emitting diode provides a visually detectable signal for the user of thenail gun 1060 when thestud 1063 is found. - It is contemplated that the stud finder laser indicator assembly and stud finder detector assembly, referred to in
FIGS. 102 through 143 , may use various technologies for determining the presence and location of a stud behind a first surface. Relevant technologies may include, radar, sonar, radio frequency, electrical sensing devices, and the like. -
FIG. 107 indicates the use of a slide and latch mechanism for coupling a studfinder detector assembly 1070, similar to that shown and described inFIG. 106 , to anose casting assembly 1071. Aslide mounting member 1072 is coupled with the studfinder detector assembly 1070 and engages with a slideadapter receiver assembly 1073. Alatch 1074, disposed on thenose casting assembly 1071 engages with the studfinder detector assembly 1070 when proper engagement has been established. Alternative coupling mechanisms may be employed, such as a compression lock system, to affix the stud finder detector assembly to the nose casting assembly. Powering a studfinder detector assembly 1080 may be accomplished through a variety of ways as shown inFIGS. 108 and 109 .FIG. 108 shows the studfinder detector assembly 1080 including abattery cavity 1081 which is capable of receiving abattery 1082. Thebattery cavity 1081 may be configured to receive various types of batteries. In the present embodiment, thebattery 1082 is a lithium ion battery which may be rechargeable. Alternatively, thebattery cavity 1081 may be configured to receive standard batteries, such as triple AAA, double AA, C, and D type batteries. Thebattery cavity 1081 operably engages with acover 1083 which protects thebattery cavity 1081 and secures thebattery 1082 in place.FIG. 109 shows a studfinder detector assembly 1090 including anAC adapter 1092 for receiving AC power through astandard AC cord 1094. The stud finder detector assembly may be configured to include a rechargeable battery with theAC adapter 1092 providing the means through which the battery is recharged. It is also contemplated that the stud finder detector assembly may be configured to require a coupling with an AC source in order to operate. In the alternative, the stud finder detector assembly may be powered by a fuel cell coupled within a receiving cavity of the stud finder detector assembly. The fuel cell may be a variety of types as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art., - The stud finder detector assembly, shown in
FIG. 109 , further includes aport 1096. Theport 1096 enables communicative coupling of the stud finder detector assembly with a peripheral device. The peripheral device may include a variety of computing systems as may be contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art. Theport 1096 may allow the user of the stud finder detector assembly to perform diagnostic operations upon the system to determine if it is functioning properly. Theport 1096 may be a serial cable connector port, infrared port, radio frequency port, and the like. Use of wireless communication technology is contemplated to establish a network including the stud finder detector assembly of the present invention. - In an alternative embodiment, the coupling of the stud finder detector assembly with the nose casting assembly of the nail gun may provide a power coupling. The power coupling may direct an energy source being employed to power the nail gun into the stud finder detector assembly. This power coupling may be configured to provide power in a continuous manner or may be enabled to provide power upon an action taken by the operator of the nail gun. For example, the stud finder detector assembly may be provided power when the trigger of the nail gun is at least partially depressed by the operator of the nail gun. The trigger may employ a multiple stage system allowing the operator to proceed through different trigger positions before actually firing the nail gun. In the present example, the trigger may have a first and a second position. The first position may complete the power coupling with the stud finder detector assembly allowing the operator to locate a stud. The operator may be required to hold the trigger in this position during operation of the stud finder detector assembly. The second position engages the nail driving assembly of the nail gun and drives the nail. It is contemplated that the multiple stage trigger system may allow an operator to engage the trigger into a position and then physically release the trigger. The trigger system, once engaged, may continue to allow operation of the additional features, such as the stud finder detector assembly.
- Referring to
FIG. 110 , a studfinder detector assembly 1100 including alight emitting diode 1102, is shown. The studfinder detector assembly 1100 detects the presence of astud 1104 behind asurface 1106. When thestud 1104 is detected the light emitting diode lights up providing a visual indication to a user that thestud 1104 has been detected. - A
laser indication assembly 1110 is shown inFIGS. 111 through 114 . Thelaser indication assembly 1110 includes a housing 1111 coupled with alens 1112. The housing 1111 encompasses a laser source which operationally engages thelens 1112 for establishing alaser line 1142 and avisual indicator 1144 on a first surface. It is understood that the laser source employed with the current embodiment of the present invention may comprise a variety of configurations as previously described throughout the specification. The housing 1111 further includes aslide mounting member 1114 which engages aslide adapter receiver 1115 disposed upon anose casting assembly 1116 of a nail gun. As described above with respect to the stud finder detector assembly the housing 1111 is coupled with thenose casting assembly 1116 by the slide properly engaging alatch 1113 mechanism. However, alternative coupling assemblies may be employed without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention. - Powering the laser source of the
laser indication assembly 1110 may be accomplished through a variety of mechanisms. In the embodiment ofFIG. 112 , thelaser indication assembly 1110, similar to the stud finder detector assembly, may be powered by abattery 1122 received within abattery cavity 1123. Acover 1124 may engage thebattery 1122 and thebattery cavity 1123 to affix the position of thebattery 1122. Thelaser indication assembly 1110 may further include a selector assembly comprising aswitch 1125 operationally coupled with the power source. Theswitch 1125 is a two position switch allowing the operator of thelaser indication assembly 1110 to determine its usage. It is understood that theswitch 1125 may be enabled to achieve a plurality of positions. Further, theswitch 1125 may be configured in various forms, such as a button, slide switch, toggle switch, and the like.FIG. 113 illustrates thelaser indication assembly 1110 employing anAC adapter 1132 for receiving AC power through the use of anAC cord 1134. It is contemplated that the laser indication assembly may be configured to include a rechargeable battery with theAC adapter 1132 providing the means through which the battery is recharged. It is also contemplated that the laser indication assembly may be configured to require a coupling with an AC source in order to operate. The laser indication assembly may be powered by a fuel cell coupled within a receiving cavity of the laser indication assembly. The fuel cell may be a variety of types as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art. Similar to the system described above for powering the stud finder detector assembly, the laser indication assembly may receive power through a power coupling interface located on the nose casting assembly. - The laser indication assembly, shown in
FIG. 113 , further includes aport 1136. Theport 1136 enables communicative coupling of the stud finder detector assembly with a peripheral device. The peripheral device may include a variety of computing systems as may be contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art. Theport 1136 may allow the user of the stud finder detector assembly to perform diagnostic operations upon the system to determine if it is functioning properly. Theport 1136 may be a serial cable connector port, infrared port, radio frequency port, and the like. Use of wireless communication technology is contemplated to establish a network including the stud finder detector assembly of the present invention. - The laser source of the laser indication assembly establishes a
visual indicator 1144 on asurface 1146, inFIG. 114 . Thevisual indicator 1144 is a cross configuration, however, it is contemplated that the visual indicator may take a variety of forms, such as a point of light, a continuous line, and the like. In the present embodiment, thevisual indicator 1144 is located on thesurface 1146 in relation to the location of astud 1148 located behind thesurface 1146. Thevisual indicator 1144 establishes, for the operator of the nail gun, the location where a nail may be driven. Thus, the correlation between the location of thestud 1148 and thevisual indicator 1144 may be direct, as shown, or thevisual indicator 1144 may be established at any location upon thesurface 1146. - A
laser indication assembly 1150 may be coupled with a studfinder detector assembly 1151, as shown inFIGS. 115 through 122 . Ahousing 1152 of the laser indication assembly is coupled with afirst latch member 1153 and asecond latch member 1154. The first andsecond latch member first receiving mount 1155 and asecond receiving mount 1156, respectively. The first and second receiving mounts 1155 and 1156 are included in ahousing 1157 of the studfinder detector assembly 1151. The number, location, and type of assemblies used to couple thelaser indication assembly 1150 to the studfinder detector assembly 1151 may vary as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art. - Also included in the
housing 1157 of the studfinder detector assembly 1151 is acommunications port 1158. Thecommunications port 1158 enables thelaser indication assembly 1150 to communicatively couple with the studfinder detector assembly 1151. The communicative coupling allows the studfinder detector assembly 1151 and thelaser indication assembly 1150 to operationally engage in a co-operative manner. For example, the studfinder detector assembly 1151 may communicate to thelaser indication assembly 1150 the detection of a stud behind a surface. In response, thelaser indication assembly 1150 may initiate operation and provide a visual indicator upon the surface identifying for a user the location of the stud. - It is understood from previous description that both the
laser indication assembly 1150 and the studfinder detection assembly 1151 may include independent power sources. The exemplary embodiment shown inFIGS. 115 through 122 may provide a system which is operational from a single power source. For example, thecommunications port 1158 may be adapted to provide a power coupling, thereby, enabling thelaser indication assembly 1150 to receive power through the studfinder detection assembly 1151. A flow of power in the opposite direction, through thelaser indication assembly 1150 to the studfinder detector assembly 1151, is also contemplated by the present invention. A power coupling, independent of thecommunication port 1158, between the two assemblies may be established in a variety of locations upon both housings. - The stud
finder detector assembly 1151 further includes alight emitting diode 1159. Thelight emitting diode 1159 provides a visual indicator to a user when a stud has been detected. When thelaser indication assembly 1150 is coupled with the studfinder detector assembly 1151 thelight emitting diode 1159 may be temporarily disabled. When thelaser indication assembly 1150 is un-coupled from the studfinder detector assembly 1151 the light emitting diode becomes operational again. In an alternative embodiment, thelight emitting diode 1159 may continue in operation even when thelaser indication assembly 1150 is coupled with the studfinder detector assembly 1151. As can be seen inFIG. 116 , the combination stud finder detector and laser indication assembly (SFDLIA) 1165, is coupled with anail gun 1160. TheSFDLIA 1165 detects the location of astud 1161 behind asurface 1162 and then visually identifies that location to a user of the nail gun. InFIG. 116 , the visual indicator is across hairs marker 1163. - Alternatively, the
SFDLIA 1165 may establish a visual indication field which identifies the location and approximate width of the stud detected. As can be seen inFIG. 117 , theSFDLIA 1165 projects a pair of dashedlines 1172 for establishing the approximate outer boundaries of the stud detected behind the surface. InFIG. 118 , the stud is located and then a pair ofindicator markers 1182 establishes the approximate outer boundaries of the stud for the user of the nail gun. In the present embodiment, the markers consist of alternating line-dash-line configurations. Referring now toFIG. 119 , a pair ofcontinuous laser lines 1192 establishes the approximate outer boundaries of a stud. - Additionally, the
SFDLIA 1165 may be used to establish the width of a stud and provide a visual marker to a user of a nail gun where to drive the next nail. As seen inFIG. 120 , theSFDLIA 1165 establishes the approximate outer boundaries by using a pair ofvisual markers 1202, which are points of light, and then establishes across-hairs marker 1204 for indicating the approximate center of the stud. The center marker provides the user of the nail gun with a visual indication of where to drive the nail in order to engage the stud behind the surface. Other embodiments, such as that shown inFIG. 121 , may include establishing the approximate stud width using avisual marker 1212 which establishes a pair of points of light and then establishing a dashedcenter line 1214 for the user to follow for driving the nail. Still further, the present invention may provide dashed linevisual markers 1222 for identifying stud width and a line-dash-linevisual marker 1224 for the center line, as may be seen inFIG. 122 . - A stud finder
laser indicator assembly 1230, similar to that shown and described inFIGS. 102 through 104 , is pivotally coupled with anose casting assembly 1231 of anail gun 1232, inFIG. 123 . The pivotal coupling of the stud finderlaser indicator assembly 1230 is accomplished by use of a swivel assembly coupled to thenose casting assembly 1231 and the stud finderlaser indicator assembly 1230. It is contemplated that various assemblies may be used to provide pivotal movement. InFIG. 124 , a studfinder detector assembly 1240 is coupled with alaser indication assembly 1241. The studfinder detector assembly 1240 is further coupled to anose casting assembly 1242 of anail gun 1243. In this embodiment, thelaser indication assembly 1241 is pivotally coupled with the studfinder detector assembly 1240. A swivel assembly provides the pivotal movement of thelaser indication assembly 1241, however, alternative assemblies may be employed. Further, thelaser indication assembly 1241 is communicatively coupled with the studfinder detector assembly 1240 through the use of acable 1244. Thecable 1244 couples with the studfinder detector assembly 1240 and thelaser indication assembly 1241 through communication ports individually located on the rear side of each assembly. - The pivotal motion provided in
FIGS. 123 and 124 to the assemblies allows the laser to maintain a visual marker on a stud, once the location of the stud is detected. For example, an initial position of a stud behind a surface is detected. The laser establishes avisual indicator FIGS. 123 and 124 , the laser is enabled to maintain the visual marker in position on the surface relative to the location of the detected stud. - Referring now to
FIGS. 125 and 126 a horseshoe stud finderlaser indicator assembly 1250, is shown. The stud finderlaser indicator assembly 1250 comprises ahousing 1250A including afirst side 1250B, asecond side 1250C, athird side 1250D, afourth side 1250E, afifth side 1250F, and asixth side 1250G. Thethird side 1250D is configured to include afirst arm 1250H and thefourth side 1250E is configured to include asecond arm 1250I. Thefifth side 1250F further includes a mountingmember 1250J which enables the coupling of the horseshoe stud finderlaser indicator assembly 1250 with anose casting assembly 1251 of anail gun 1252, as shown inFIG. 125 . - In
FIG. 126 , the horseshoe stud finderlaser indicator assembly 1250 is shown to include a plurality of lens located about the circumference of a first side of the assembly. Each of the lenses is enabled to emit a laser beam provided from a laser source. Each lens may be individually set to emit the laser beam in a specific pattern. For instance, afirst lens 1253, asecond lens 1254, athird lens 1255, and afourth lens 1256 may be set to establish a first visual marker indicating a first approximate outer boundary of the width of a stud detected behind a surface. Afifth lens 1257, asixth lens 1258, aseventh lens 1259, and aneighth lens 1260 may be set to establish a second visual marker indicating a second approximate outer boundary of the width of the stud detected behind the surface. Aninth lens 1261, atenth lens 1262, aneleventh lens 1263, atwelfth lens 1264, and athirteenth lens 1265 may be set to establish a visual marker indicating a location which is the approximate center of the stud and/or indicating the location where the next nail may be driven by the user. - Using a single laser source to establish the pattern provided by the horseshoe stud finder
laser indicator assembly 1250 may require that optical technologies, such as beam splitters and reflectors be employed within thehousing 1250A to direct the laser beam through each of the individual lenses. The visual marker may be established as a continuous visual pattern or may be a non-continuous pattern. A non-continuous pattern may be a progression of visual markers alternating between an on and off state to provide a virtual visual field. Alternatively, some of the lenses may emit a laser beam and establish a visual marker in a continuous pattern while other lenses may emit a laser beam in a non-continuous pattern. The configuration of the pattern established may vary without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention. - Alternatively, the horseshoe stud finder
laser indicator assembly 1250 may employ a plurality of laser sources. Preferably, the number of laser sources is between two and thirteen. Thus, the present invention may provide an individual laser source operably coupled with each of the lenses disposed on thehousing 1250A. When fewer laser sources are employed within thehousing 1250A than there are lenses disposed on thehousing 1250A various forms of optical technologies may be required to be employed in order to establish a visual field on a surface. As stated previously, these optical technologies may include beam splitters, reflectors, light signal enhancing instruments, and the like. - The light signal enhancing instruments may be photomultipliers comprising a variety of designs, such as photomultiplier end-on tubes, photomultiplier side-on tubes, or the like. The photomultipliers may accept an incident laser beam and intensify the light signal by increasing the number of electrons in order to maintain sufficient light signal strength as the laser beam is being passed down from one optical splitter to the next. Further, the light signal enhancing instruments may be positioned in front of the laser sources in order to provide optimum light signal output.
- Alternatively, the light signal enhancing instruments may include a secondary laser source, such that the incident laser beam received has its signal strength increased. For example, a low power laser source may be included within the light signal enhancing instrument which contributes a second light signal to the existing laser beam in order to make up for a loss of light signal intensity. Such a system of multiple light signal enhancing instruments may decrease production costs by substituting low power laser sources for separate and independent laser sources located throughout the laser apparatus. It is understood that the configuration and numbers of light signal enhancing instruments may vary as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art.
- The horseshoe stud finder
laser indicator assembly 1250 further includes astud sensor assembly 1266 for detecting the stud. Thestud sensor assembly 1266 may employ various technologies, as described previously, for detecting the location of a stud behind a surface. In the preferred embodiment, thestud sensor assembly 1266 uses a single lens 1267 through which the stud sensing technology is employed. It is understood that thestud sensor assembly 1266 may comprise a plurality of lenses through which the stud sensing technology may be employed. The lenses may be distributed in various locations on thefirst side 1250B of thehousing 1250A without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention. - Referring now to
FIG. 127 , a third embodiment of an integrated stud finderlaser indicator assembly 1270, is shown. The integrated stud finderlaser indicator assembly 1270 is coupled with anose casting assembly 1271 of anail gun 1272. The visual marker establishes avisual marker 1273 which indicates the approximate width of astud 1275 and anindicator 1274 which approximates the center line of thestud 1275. The integrated stud finderlaser indicator assembly 1270 comprises ahousing 1273 which encompasses a laser assembly for emitting a laser beam and a stud sensor assembly for detecting the location of a stud. - It is contemplated that the stud finder detector assembly, the laser indication assembly, or any one of the stud finder laser indicator assemblies may be integrated with the nose casting assembly of a nail gun. Further, it is contemplated that the laser assemblies used within any of the previously mentioned embodiments of
FIGS. 102 through 127 may include multiple laser sources for establishing the visual marker upon a surface. The number and type of laser sources employed may vary as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art. For example, a laser indication assembly may employ two laser sources, one being a high powered laser emitter and the other being a low powered laser emitter. The two laser sources may emit their incident laser beams through a single lens assembly or two or more lens assemblies disposed upon the housing of the laser indication assembly. Similarly, one of the embodiments of the combination stud finder laser indicator assembly may employ similar laser technology. - Referring generally now to
FIGS. 128 through 138 , a trackernail gun assembly 1280 is shown. The trackernail gun assembly 1280 comprises anail magazine 1281 coupled with anose casting assembly 1282. Thenose casting assembly 1282 couples with acasing 1283, which houses a nail driving assembly operationally coupled with atrigger 1285. Thecasing 1283 couples with ahandle 1284 which is coupled with thenail magazine 1281. It is understood that thenail magazine 1281 may be enabled to angularly adjust relative to thenose casting assembly 1282 and thehandle 1284. Disposed on thecasing 1283 is atracker assembly 1286. Thetracker assembly 1286 comprises auser interface assembly 1287 operationally coupled with a stud finderlaser indicator assembly 1288. - The
user interface assembly 1287 comprises a computing assembly including adisplay screen 1289 operationally coupled with afirst selector 1290, asecond selector 1291, athird selector 1292, and afourth selector 1293. Thedisplay screen 1289 is enabled to display information, such as menu screens and directional capabilities which are then accessed through use of the selectors. For example, thedisplay screen 1289 may prompt a user to determine the status of the stud finder and the laser, such as whether they are on or off. Further, the display screen may provide laser configuration options as seen inFIG. 130 allowing the user to select the type of visual field they wish to establish on a surface. When the stud finder is being used the computing assembly may provide a monitoring function that is displayed to the user ondisplay screen 1289. As seen inFIGS. 131 and 132 , as the user of the nail gun tries to locate the stud a visual display is provided showing the user where the stud is in relation to the trackernail gun assembly 1280. InFIG. 131 thedisplay screen 1289 provides information that the trackernail gun assembly 1280 is positioned on the right edge of the stud. This allows the user to make any necessary corrections in order to center the position of the trackernail gun assembly 1280, as shown inFIG. 132 . It is also noted that thedisplay screen 1289 includes a “Centered” readout which provides a secondary verification to the user of the positioning of the trackernail gun assembly 1280. While the screens shown in the preferred embodiments ofFIGS. 129 through 132 are exemplary, they should not be read as limiting. It is contemplated that the user interface of the current embodiment may be enabled with similar capabilities and configurations as those shown and described inFIGS. 1 through 101 . In particular, thegraphical user interface 5800 described inFIGS. 54 through 101 may be employed with the current embodiment of the present invention. - Referring now to
FIGS. 133 through 135 , the trackernail gun assembly 1280 is shown, detecting the location of a stud behind a surface and identifying the location of that stud. In the current embodiment, theuser interface assembly 1287 indicates to the user that the stud finder assembly is operational and has detected the presence of a stud behind the surface. This is shown byicon 1294 on thedisplay screen 1289. The trackernail gun assembly 1280 may then use the laser indication assembly to establish a visual marker on the surface, such as the line-dash-line configuration shown inFIG. 134 , to indicate the position of the stud to the user. - It is often the case in construction that items, such as
electrical wiring 1332,plumbing pipe 1334, heating and air conditioning ducts, may be located in close proximity to astud 1336. The importance of not damaging such items is clear as it may result in lost time, increased costs, damage to surrounding materials, and injury. Therefore, it is contemplated that thetracker assembly 1286 may be enabled to determine the difference between thestud 1336 located behind asurface 1338 and other items, such as those mentioned above. Thetracker assembly 1286 may further be able to display to the user of the tracker nail gun assembly 1280 a warning indication when the nail gun is positioned to drive a nail into one of these items.FIG. 135 shows thedisplay screen 1289 with a “Warning” display being given to the user, informing the user that driving a nail in this position may result in damage to various items. Thus, thetracker assembly 1286 may use various technologies for determining the substance of an item detected behind a surface. The technologies may include radar, sonar, electrical resistance detection, and the like as contemplated by one of ordinary skill in the art. Further, it is contemplated that the assemblies shown and described previously inFIGS. 102 through 132 may employ such technological capability. - In
FIGS. 136 through 138 , a trackernail gun assembly 1360 is shown. The trackernail gun assembly 1360 comprises anail magazine 1361 coupled with anose casting assembly 1362. Acasing 1363 is coupled with thenose casting assembly 1362 and ahandle 1364. Thecasing 1363 houses a nail driving assembly which is operationally coupled with atrigger 1365. Thehandle 1364 is coupled with thenail magazine 1361 and it is understood that thenail magazine 1361 may be adjustably coupled with thehandle 1364 and thenose casting assembly 1362. Disposed on thecasing 1363 is auser interface assembly 1366. Theuser interface assembly 1366 is communicatively coupled with a studfinder detector assembly 1367 and alaser indication assembly 1368. Thelaser indication assembly 1368 is communicatively coupled with the studfinder detector assembly 1367. Theuser interface assembly 1366 comprises a computing assembly with adisplay screen 1375 andselectors FIG. 137 shows a display of thedisplay screen 1375 querying a user of the nail gun as to the types of studs being searched for at the work site. The user may enter the configuration of the stud, indicating such features as size and shape or whether the stud is composed of wood or steel. It is understood that the display shown inFIG. 137 ondisplay screen 1375 is exemplary and may be displayed in any of the configurations of the tracker nail gun assembly shown inFIGS. 128 through 138 . Afirst adapter 1370 may be communicatively coupled with the computing system of theuser interface assembly 1366 and allow acable 1369 to couple with it. Thecable 1369 may couple with asecond adapter 1371 located on the studfinder detector assembly 1367, thereby establishing a communicative link between theuser interface assembly 1366 and the studfinder detector assembly 1367. In the embodiment ofFIG. 136 , thelaser indication assembly 1368 is communicatively coupled with the studfinder detector assembly 1367 through a coupling assembly (not shown). The coupling assembly allows thelaser indication assembly 1368 to be removed from the studfinder detector assembly 1367. Alternatively, inFIG. 137 thelaser indication assembly 1368 is communicatively coupled with the studfinder detector assembly 1367 by acable 1372. Thecable 1372 couples with athird port 1373 disposed on the studfinder detector assembly 1367 and afourth port 1374 disposed on thelaser indication assembly 1368. It is contemplated that the communicative link between theuser interface assembly 1366 and the studfinder detector assembly 1367 and thelaser indication assembly 1368 may be established using wireless technologies, such as infrared, radio frequency, Bluetooth, and the like. - In an alternate embodiment of the tracker
nail gun assembly 1360,FIG. 138 shows auser interface assembly 1381, including alaser indication assembly 1382, communicatively coupled with a studfinder detector assembly 1383. Acable 1386 establishes the communicative link between theuser interface assembly 1381 and the studfinder detector assembly 1383. Thecable 1386 couples with afirst port 1387 and asecond port 1388. Theuser interface assembly 1381 includes a display screen and selectors as previously described inFIGS. 128 through 137 . The user interface is coupled with acasing 1384 and the studfinder detector assembly 1383 is coupled to anose casting assembly 1385. - Referring now to
FIGS. 139 and 140 , atracker drill assembly 1390 is shown in two embodiments.FIG. 139 shows thetracker drill assembly 1390 coupled with a stud finderlaser indicator assembly 1391.FIG. 140 shows thetracker drill assembly 1390 coupled with a studfinder detector assembly 1401 which is coupled with alaser indication assembly 1402. The coupling of the stud finderlaser indicator assembly 1391 and/or the studfinder detector assembly 1401 may occur using any of the variety of assemblies described previously inFIGS. 102 through 138 . Thelaser indication assembly 1402 may be pivotally coupled with the studfinder detector assembly 1401. Thetracker drill assembly 1390 comprises acasing 1392, surrounding a motor assembly, coupled with anarbor assembly 1393 which is operationally coupled with abit 1394. Thebit 1394 may be either a screwdriver bit or a drill bit. Atrigger 1395 is operationally coupled with the motor assembly. Ahandle 1396 couples with thecasing 1392 and apower cord 1397 runs through thehandle 1396 to supply power to the motor assembly. It is contemplated that thetracker drill assembly 1390 may include a motor assembly that provides a clutch to prevent over drilling. For example, drywallers use a clutched drywall gun to avoid drilling the screws through the drywall. Thetracker drill assembly 1390 with a clutched motor assembly of the present invention may be used by drywallers and provide assistance in establishing and indicating the location of a stud behind a piece of drywall. Further, it is contemplated that thetracker drill assembly 1390 may use a variety of power sources, such as batteries, rechargeable batteries, fuel cells, and the like, without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention. - It is believed that the present invention and many of its attendant advantages will be understood by the forgoing description. It is also believed that it will be apparent that various changes may be made in the form, construction and arrangement of the components thereof without departing from the scope and spirit of the invention or without sacrificing all of its material advantages. The form herein before described being merely an explanatory embodiment thereof. It is the intention of the following claims to encompass and include such changes.
Claims (27)
Priority Applications (9)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US10/463,206 US20060076385A1 (en) | 2002-04-18 | 2003-06-16 | Power tool control system |
US10/632,559 US7346847B2 (en) | 2002-04-18 | 2003-07-31 | Power tool control system user interface |
US10/744,907 US7073268B1 (en) | 2002-04-18 | 2003-12-23 | Level apparatus |
US10/744,612 US8004664B2 (en) | 2002-04-18 | 2003-12-23 | Power tool control system |
US10/767,214 US20060116787A1 (en) | 2002-04-18 | 2004-01-27 | Power tool control system |
US10/831,693 US7359762B2 (en) | 2002-04-18 | 2004-04-23 | Measurement and alignment device including a display system |
US10/925,220 US20060101961A1 (en) | 2002-04-18 | 2004-08-23 | Power tool control system |
US10/956,619 US7369916B2 (en) | 2002-04-18 | 2004-10-01 | Drill press |
US13/215,556 US20120048090A1 (en) | 2002-04-18 | 2011-08-23 | Power Tool Control System and Table Saw Assembly |
Applications Claiming Priority (6)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US37375202P | 2002-04-18 | 2002-04-18 | |
US41420002P | 2002-09-27 | 2002-09-27 | |
US42984002P | 2002-11-27 | 2002-11-27 | |
US10/413,455 US20030202091A1 (en) | 2002-04-18 | 2003-04-14 | Modular assisted visualization system |
US10/445,290 US20060075867A1 (en) | 2002-11-27 | 2003-05-21 | Laser apparatus |
US10/463,206 US20060076385A1 (en) | 2002-04-18 | 2003-06-16 | Power tool control system |
Related Parent Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US10/413,455 Continuation-In-Part US20030202091A1 (en) | 2002-04-18 | 2003-04-14 | Modular assisted visualization system |
US10/445,290 Continuation-In-Part US20060075867A1 (en) | 2002-04-18 | 2003-05-21 | Laser apparatus |
Related Child Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US10/632,559 Continuation US7346847B2 (en) | 2002-04-18 | 2003-07-31 | Power tool control system user interface |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20060076385A1 true US20060076385A1 (en) | 2006-04-13 |
Family
ID=36144262
Family Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US10/463,206 Abandoned US20060076385A1 (en) | 2002-04-18 | 2003-06-16 | Power tool control system |
US10/632,559 Expired - Fee Related US7346847B2 (en) | 2002-04-18 | 2003-07-31 | Power tool control system user interface |
Family Applications After (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US10/632,559 Expired - Fee Related US7346847B2 (en) | 2002-04-18 | 2003-07-31 | Power tool control system user interface |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (2) | US20060076385A1 (en) |
Cited By (56)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20070256036A1 (en) * | 2006-04-28 | 2007-11-01 | Johnson Eric S | User interface having integer and fraction display |
US20070277571A1 (en) * | 2006-05-31 | 2007-12-06 | Gokcebay Asil T | Cam lock with retractable bolt |
WO2008080686A1 (en) * | 2006-12-27 | 2008-07-10 | Robert Bosch Gmbh | Power tool device |
US20090019717A1 (en) * | 2007-07-18 | 2009-01-22 | Bernhard Nortmann | Digital Measurement System |
US20090210294A1 (en) * | 2005-02-18 | 2009-08-20 | Max Co., Ltd. | Air Compressor and Work Management Data Collection System |
WO2009111743A1 (en) * | 2008-03-07 | 2009-09-11 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Battery pack for use with a power tool and a non-motorized sensing tool |
US20090249846A1 (en) * | 2006-05-31 | 2009-10-08 | Gokcebay Asil T | Electronic lock for cabinet doors, drawers and other applications |
US20090308115A1 (en) * | 2008-06-17 | 2009-12-17 | Gokcebay Asil T | Electronic locker lock |
WO2010072588A2 (en) * | 2008-12-22 | 2010-07-01 | Robert Bosch Gmbh | Guiding system for power tools |
US20100225299A1 (en) * | 2009-03-06 | 2010-09-09 | Nguyen Evans H | Wall scanner |
US20110107890A1 (en) * | 2008-07-02 | 2011-05-12 | Thilo Koeder | Machine Tool, especially Handheld Machine Tool |
US8253619B2 (en) | 2005-02-15 | 2012-08-28 | Techtronic Power Tools Technology Limited | Electromagnetic scanning imager |
WO2013014336A2 (en) * | 2011-07-22 | 2013-01-31 | Kinetricks Oy | Method, system and intelligent construction device for constructing an architectural object |
CN104647041A (en) * | 2015-02-14 | 2015-05-27 | 安徽金义得机械有限公司 | Small-scale numerically-controlled milling and drilling machine and correction and tool alignment method thereof |
US9208628B2 (en) | 2007-05-30 | 2015-12-08 | Security People, Inc. | Electronic locks particularly for office furniture |
US9222284B2 (en) | 2007-05-30 | 2015-12-29 | Security People, Inc. | Electronic locks particularly for office furniture |
US9273492B2 (en) | 2006-05-31 | 2016-03-01 | Security People, Inc. | Electronic cam lock for cabinet doors, drawers and other applications |
US20160175920A1 (en) * | 2014-12-17 | 2016-06-23 | Robert Bosch Gmbh | Tool and Method for Processing a Workpiece with a Tool Element of a Tool |
WO2016096452A1 (en) * | 2014-12-16 | 2016-06-23 | Robert Bosch Gmbh | Optical display device unit for use in an external application unit |
US20160209836A1 (en) * | 2011-06-06 | 2016-07-21 | Paramit Corporation | Verification methods and systems for use in computer directed assembly and manufacture |
US20160265763A1 (en) * | 2015-03-12 | 2016-09-15 | Robert Bosch Tool Corporation | User Interface System in a Table Saw |
US9536359B1 (en) | 2006-05-31 | 2017-01-03 | Digilock Asia Ltd. | Delivery system via electronic lockboxes |
EP3007862A4 (en) * | 2013-06-13 | 2017-03-01 | Stanley Black & Decker, Inc. | Wireless tool system |
US9756402B2 (en) | 2015-05-04 | 2017-09-05 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Power tool and method for wireless communication |
US9900967B2 (en) | 2015-10-30 | 2018-02-20 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Remote light control, configuration, and monitoring |
WO2018075029A1 (en) * | 2016-10-19 | 2018-04-26 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Screen casting |
US10131043B2 (en) | 2013-10-21 | 2018-11-20 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Adapter for power tool devices |
US10149142B2 (en) | 2016-06-06 | 2018-12-04 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | System and method for establishing a wireless connection between power tool and mobile device |
US10272550B2 (en) | 2016-02-25 | 2019-04-30 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Power tool including an output position sensor |
US10295990B2 (en) | 2015-05-18 | 2019-05-21 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | User interface for tool configuration and data capture |
US10339496B2 (en) | 2015-06-15 | 2019-07-02 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Power tool communication system |
US10345797B2 (en) | 2015-09-18 | 2019-07-09 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Power tool operation recording and playback |
US20190217460A1 (en) * | 2018-01-18 | 2019-07-18 | Ingersoll-Rand Company | Add-on user interface module for precision power tools |
US10380883B2 (en) | 2015-06-16 | 2019-08-13 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Power tool profile sharing and permissions |
US10531656B2 (en) * | 2013-06-03 | 2020-01-14 | Biolife Solutions, Inc. | Cryogenic workstation using nitrogen |
US10562116B2 (en) | 2016-02-03 | 2020-02-18 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | System and methods for configuring a reciprocating saw |
US10603770B2 (en) | 2015-05-04 | 2020-03-31 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Adaptive impact blow detection |
US10618151B2 (en) | 2015-06-15 | 2020-04-14 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Hydraulic crimper tool |
US10646982B2 (en) | 2015-12-17 | 2020-05-12 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | System and method for configuring a power tool with an impact mechanism |
US10850380B2 (en) | 2015-06-02 | 2020-12-01 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Multi-speed power tool with electronic clutch |
US10909789B2 (en) | 2006-05-31 | 2021-02-02 | Digilock Asia Ltd. | Electronic cam lock for cabinet doors, drawers and other applications |
US20210107121A1 (en) * | 2018-05-15 | 2021-04-15 | STAHLWILLE Eduard Wille GmbH & Co. KG | Tool and method for actuating a tool |
US11014224B2 (en) | 2016-01-05 | 2021-05-25 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Vibration reduction system and method for power tools |
US11229913B2 (en) | 2013-06-03 | 2022-01-25 | Biolife Solutions, Inc. | Cryogenic systems |
US20220057785A1 (en) * | 2018-12-17 | 2022-02-24 | Atlas Copco Industrial Technique Ab | A method, a tool controller and computer program to enable different functionality sets for at least a first and a second tool associated with a tool controller |
US20220104806A1 (en) * | 2020-10-02 | 2022-04-07 | Ethicon Llc | Surgical instrument with adaptive configuration control |
US11424601B2 (en) | 2015-11-02 | 2022-08-23 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Externally configurable worksite power distribution box |
US20220276638A1 (en) * | 2019-06-27 | 2022-09-01 | Hilti Aktiengesellschaft | System and Method for Controlling a Core Drill and an Auto Feed Device with a Human Machine Interface Arranged on the Core Drill |
US11622392B2 (en) | 2016-06-06 | 2023-04-04 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | System and method for establishing a wireless connection between power tool and mobile device |
US11672534B2 (en) | 2020-10-02 | 2023-06-13 | Cilag Gmbh International | Communication capability of a smart stapler |
US11748924B2 (en) | 2020-10-02 | 2023-09-05 | Cilag Gmbh International | Tiered system display control based on capacity and user operation |
US11830602B2 (en) | 2020-10-02 | 2023-11-28 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical hub having variable interconnectivity capabilities |
US11877897B2 (en) | 2020-10-02 | 2024-01-23 | Cilag Gmbh International | Situational awareness of instruments location and individualization of users to control displays |
US11963683B2 (en) | 2020-10-02 | 2024-04-23 | Cilag Gmbh International | Method for operating tiered operation modes in a surgical system |
US12016566B2 (en) | 2020-10-02 | 2024-06-25 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument with adaptive function controls |
US12064293B2 (en) | 2020-10-02 | 2024-08-20 | Cilag Gmbh International | Field programmable surgical visualization system |
Families Citing this family (29)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US7265494B2 (en) | 1998-10-09 | 2007-09-04 | Azoteq Pty Ltd. | Intelligent user interface with touch sensor technology |
US7528508B2 (en) | 1998-10-09 | 2009-05-05 | Azoteq Pty Ltd. | Touch sensor user interface with compressible material construction |
WO2006066259A2 (en) * | 2004-12-17 | 2006-06-22 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Smart acessories for power tools |
DE102008001631A1 (en) * | 2008-05-07 | 2009-11-12 | Robert Bosch Gmbh | Sawing device and distance determination method |
US8269612B2 (en) | 2008-07-10 | 2012-09-18 | Black & Decker Inc. | Communication protocol for remotely controlled laser devices |
KR101542744B1 (en) * | 2009-03-18 | 2015-08-10 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and apparatus for controlling controlled device |
US8763720B2 (en) * | 2010-05-18 | 2014-07-01 | Jason Lee Moore | Interactive tools |
EP2502712A1 (en) * | 2011-03-23 | 2012-09-26 | Hexagon Technology Center GmbH | Working tool positioning system |
US9908182B2 (en) | 2012-01-30 | 2018-03-06 | Black & Decker Inc. | Remote programming of a power tool |
US8991806B2 (en) | 2012-04-19 | 2015-03-31 | John Matthew Meyer | Extension table assembly for power tools |
EP2656984B1 (en) * | 2012-04-27 | 2015-02-25 | Adolf Mohr Maschinenfabrik GmbH & Co. KG | Cutting system with cutting machine and an alignment device |
US20140107853A1 (en) * | 2012-06-26 | 2014-04-17 | Black & Decker Inc. | System for enhancing power tools |
US9046351B2 (en) * | 2013-08-16 | 2015-06-02 | Shimano Inc. | Laser spotting device for bicycle fitting and bicycle fitting system |
USD757794S1 (en) * | 2013-12-20 | 2016-05-31 | Microsoft Corporation | Display screen with icon |
USD758428S1 (en) * | 2013-12-20 | 2016-06-07 | Microsoft Corporation | Display screen with icons |
USD757793S1 (en) | 2013-12-20 | 2016-05-31 | Microsoft Corporation | Display screen with icons |
USD753713S1 (en) | 2013-12-20 | 2016-04-12 | Microsoft Corporation | Display screen with icons |
USD761305S1 (en) | 2013-12-20 | 2016-07-12 | Microsoft Corporation | Display screen with icons |
US9846034B2 (en) | 2014-01-23 | 2017-12-19 | Sure Hang, Llc | Adjustable laser leveling device with distance measuring lasers and self-leveling lasers and related method |
AU2015209315B2 (en) | 2014-01-23 | 2019-05-30 | Jayson HILL | Adjustable laser leveling device and method |
DE102014206289A1 (en) * | 2014-04-02 | 2015-10-08 | Robert Bosch Gmbh | Hand tool system, method of operation |
EP3180160A4 (en) | 2014-08-15 | 2018-04-18 | Baron Investments LLC | Data collection, transfer and feedback in working tools |
FR3039450B1 (en) * | 2015-07-29 | 2017-08-11 | Airbus Operations Sas | TOOL SUPPORT SYSTEM |
CN106092063A (en) * | 2016-05-26 | 2016-11-09 | 淮南市宜留机械科技有限公司 | A kind of portable measurement and positioning assembly of wall saw |
US10508916B2 (en) * | 2018-03-22 | 2019-12-17 | Cheng-Hsiung Huang | Laser level |
EP3560657A1 (en) * | 2018-04-27 | 2019-10-30 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Surface modifying apparatus with light source for illumination of the workpiece surface |
US11193766B2 (en) * | 2019-04-09 | 2021-12-07 | Ruslan Pozhidayev | Apparatus and methods in installation of objects |
US11590670B2 (en) * | 2019-05-31 | 2023-02-28 | The Boeing Company | Methods and apparatus to align applique cutters |
WO2021237066A1 (en) * | 2020-05-22 | 2021-11-25 | Petts Dale | Bandsaw blade angle adjustment assembly |
Citations (98)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US299619A (en) * | 1884-06-03 | Shingle-jointing machine | ||
US1804764A (en) * | 1928-12-01 | 1931-05-12 | Edwin J Grant | Apparatus for and method of cutting material |
US2109976A (en) * | 1936-11-23 | 1938-03-01 | Jr Winslow S Pierce | Center finding device |
US2121069A (en) * | 1937-06-14 | 1938-06-21 | Atlas Press Company | Circular saw |
US2146906A (en) * | 1937-03-20 | 1939-02-14 | Herbert Lindner | Device for adjusting a rotatably and tiltably mounted table with respect to the axis of a drilling spindle |
US2307820A (en) * | 1940-02-20 | 1943-01-12 | Charles M Butters | Shadow-line indicator for trimming saws |
US2465000A (en) * | 1946-09-03 | 1949-03-22 | Norbert O Turner | Adjustable sawing machine table |
US2557029A (en) * | 1945-03-24 | 1951-06-12 | Griffin Richard Stanley | Optical centering gauge |
US3124178A (en) * | 1964-03-10 | Circular saw version of a multi-purpose | ||
US3179458A (en) * | 1962-01-16 | 1965-04-20 | Thomas G Sconzo | Strike plate |
US3572937A (en) * | 1968-11-04 | 1971-03-30 | Atomic Energy Commission | Method and apparatus for interferometric measurement of machine slide roll |
US3635108A (en) * | 1970-03-09 | 1972-01-18 | Us Navy | Laser-guided boring tool for deep hole boring |
US3713746A (en) * | 1969-12-24 | 1973-01-30 | Oerlikon Buehrle Ag | Guiding apparatus for controlling rectilinearly movable part of a machine tool |
US3728027A (en) * | 1970-01-13 | 1973-04-17 | Nitto Giken Kk | Portable magnetic boring machine having light beam centering device |
US3891039A (en) * | 1973-05-15 | 1975-06-24 | Atlas Copco Ab | Method and device for drilling to a predetermined surface |
US3970359A (en) * | 1975-02-03 | 1976-07-20 | Xerox Corporation | Flying spot flat field scanner |
US4002094A (en) * | 1975-08-11 | 1977-01-11 | Quick Rip Corporation | Metal saw |
US4078869A (en) * | 1977-01-17 | 1978-03-14 | Honeycutt Damon P | Two-way right angle drill |
US4184394A (en) * | 1977-04-01 | 1980-01-22 | A/S Norcem | Motor-driven saw having a circular saw blade |
US4255056A (en) * | 1979-03-30 | 1981-03-10 | Hardinge Brothers, Inc. | Pre-setter for positioning tooling on turrets |
US4257297A (en) * | 1979-01-31 | 1981-03-24 | Peter Nidbella | Circular saw with visual cut line indicator |
US4308777A (en) * | 1979-05-21 | 1982-01-05 | Rockwell Do Brasil Ind. E Com. Ltda. | Panel scoring table saw |
US4319403A (en) * | 1980-09-29 | 1982-03-16 | Stearns Eugene R | Power drill position indicator |
US4338723A (en) * | 1977-10-19 | 1982-07-13 | Centro Cororation | Angle measuring device |
US4383373A (en) * | 1980-10-08 | 1983-05-17 | Alain Couturier | Method of and apparatus for calibrating an adjustable jig |
US4386532A (en) * | 1980-01-04 | 1983-06-07 | Centro Corporation | Instrumented tool |
US4438567A (en) * | 1981-12-07 | 1984-03-27 | Raiha A P | Center locator for alignment of work to machine spindle |
US4447956A (en) * | 1982-08-26 | 1984-05-15 | Chung Hun H | Centering device |
US4450627A (en) * | 1981-07-06 | 1984-05-29 | Shindaiwa Kogyo Co., Ltd. | Device for determining a correct sawing position for a portable rotary sawing machine |
US4503740A (en) * | 1982-01-18 | 1985-03-12 | Capital Machine Company, Inc. | Optical cutting edge locator for a cutting apparatus |
US4566202A (en) * | 1983-12-06 | 1986-01-28 | Hamar M R | Laser apparatus for effectively projecting the axis of rotation of a rotating tool holder |
US4581808A (en) * | 1982-02-04 | 1986-04-15 | The Charles Stark Draper Laboratory | Adjustable machining system and implement therefore |
US4589208A (en) * | 1983-08-13 | 1986-05-20 | Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd. | Portable electric circular saw |
US4598481A (en) * | 1985-08-12 | 1986-07-08 | Hein-Werner Corporation | Intersecting laser alignment apparatus and method |
US4599927A (en) * | 1985-05-08 | 1986-07-15 | Emerson Electric Co. | Tool elevation and bevel adjustment for direct drive power tool |
US4651732A (en) * | 1983-03-17 | 1987-03-24 | Frederick Philip R | Three-dimensional light guidance system for invasive procedures |
US4676130A (en) * | 1986-02-25 | 1987-06-30 | Filer & Stowell Co., Inc. | Lumber edger |
US4723911A (en) * | 1985-11-13 | 1988-02-09 | University Of Pittsburgh | Intelligent dental drill |
US4725933A (en) * | 1986-09-11 | 1988-02-16 | Fairway International, Inc. | Line guide projector |
US4803976A (en) * | 1985-10-03 | 1989-02-14 | Synthes | Sighting instrument |
US4805500A (en) * | 1985-06-29 | 1989-02-21 | Amada Company, Limited | Horizontal band saw machine |
US4817839A (en) * | 1987-02-13 | 1989-04-04 | Ipco Corporation | Rotary saw and method for sectioning dental models |
US4820911A (en) * | 1986-07-11 | 1989-04-11 | Photographic Sciences Corporation | Apparatus for scanning and reading bar codes |
US4833782A (en) * | 1987-06-01 | 1989-05-30 | Robert E. Strauss | Saber saw tracing light |
US4836671A (en) * | 1985-04-08 | 1989-06-06 | Charles Lescrenier | Locating device |
US4934233A (en) * | 1988-06-29 | 1990-06-19 | Emerson Electric Co. | Compound miter saw |
US5013317A (en) * | 1990-02-07 | 1991-05-07 | Smith & Nephew Richards Inc. | Medical drill assembly transparent to X-rays and targeting drill bit |
US5031203A (en) * | 1990-02-09 | 1991-07-09 | Trecha Randal R | Coaxial laser targeting device for use with x-ray equipment and surgical drill equipment during surgical procedures |
US5115403A (en) * | 1988-02-04 | 1992-05-19 | Amada Company, Limited | Workpiece workability detection method and a method for cutting a workpiece by means of a cutting machine utilizing that method |
US5203650A (en) * | 1992-01-09 | 1993-04-20 | Everett D. Hougen | Method and apparatus for drilling holes |
US5207007A (en) * | 1991-11-25 | 1993-05-04 | Cucinotta Anthony J | Set-up tool |
US5212720A (en) * | 1992-01-29 | 1993-05-18 | Research Foundation-State University Of N.Y. | Dual radiation targeting system |
US5283808A (en) * | 1992-07-01 | 1994-02-01 | Diasonics, Inc. | X-ray device having a co-axial laser aiming system in an opposed configuration |
US5285708A (en) * | 1992-05-18 | 1994-02-15 | Porter-Cable Corporation | Miter saw alignment system |
US5316014A (en) * | 1992-02-07 | 1994-05-31 | Livingston Products, Inc. | Biopsy locator and guide |
US5320111A (en) * | 1992-02-07 | 1994-06-14 | Livingston Products, Inc. | Light beam locator and guide for a biopsy needle |
US5387969A (en) * | 1993-06-22 | 1995-02-07 | Optima Industries, Inc. | Machine tool position measurement employing multiple laser distance measurements |
US5426687A (en) * | 1992-07-07 | 1995-06-20 | Innovative Care Ltd. | Laser targeting device for use with image intensifiers in surgery |
US5481466A (en) * | 1992-04-23 | 1996-01-02 | Townsend Engineering Company | Meat slicing machine and method of use thereof |
US5488781A (en) * | 1994-12-13 | 1996-02-06 | Av Flexologic B.V. | Positioning apparatus for printing plates |
US5495784A (en) * | 1994-09-29 | 1996-03-05 | Chen; Ruey-Zon | Cutting depth setting device for a saw machine |
US5522683A (en) * | 1993-12-27 | 1996-06-04 | Uht Corporation | Drilling apparatus |
US5529441A (en) * | 1994-02-28 | 1996-06-25 | Cybernetics Products, Inc. | Drill coordinate optimization for multi-layer printed circuit board |
US5593606A (en) * | 1994-07-18 | 1997-01-14 | Electro Scientific Industries, Inc. | Ultraviolet laser system and method for forming vias in multi-layered targets |
US5720213A (en) * | 1994-12-12 | 1998-02-24 | Black & Decker Inc. | Bevel table saw adjustment |
US5741096A (en) * | 1995-11-30 | 1998-04-21 | The Boeing Company | Line-laser assisted alignment apparatus |
US5777562A (en) * | 1996-08-19 | 1998-07-07 | Hoffman; David J. | Centering device and method for centering |
US5782842A (en) * | 1995-01-16 | 1998-07-21 | Daum Gmbh | Medical instrument guidance apparatus and method |
US5862727A (en) * | 1996-03-11 | 1999-01-26 | Kelly; Robert R. | Laser arbor |
US5911482A (en) * | 1996-05-31 | 1999-06-15 | Black & Decker, Inc. | Window assembly and lower saw guard |
US5917523A (en) * | 1990-01-12 | 1999-06-29 | Hewlett-Packard Company | Refill method for ink-jet print cartridge |
US6023071A (en) * | 1996-06-18 | 2000-02-08 | Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. | Image reading apparatus |
US6035757A (en) * | 1997-12-15 | 2000-03-14 | Caluori; Raymond | Rotary saw cut alignment device |
US6076445A (en) * | 1998-09-10 | 2000-06-20 | Black & Decker Inc. | Throat plate for a tool |
US6209597B1 (en) * | 1999-09-08 | 2001-04-03 | Hal Calcote | Power tool mounting stand |
US6223794B1 (en) * | 2000-02-05 | 2001-05-01 | James Jones | Woodworking station |
US6239913B1 (en) * | 1997-03-10 | 2001-05-29 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Laser optical apparatus |
US20020000148A1 (en) * | 2000-04-14 | 2002-01-03 | Brun Georges L. | Device for trimming wane-affected planks |
US20020004712A1 (en) * | 1997-08-18 | 2002-01-10 | Kodosky Jeffrey L. | System and method for configuring a device to perform measurement functions utilizing conversion of graphical programs into hardware implementations |
US6375395B1 (en) * | 1999-07-30 | 2002-04-23 | Michael G. Heintzeman | Laser guide for hand held power drill |
US20020054491A1 (en) * | 2000-11-03 | 2002-05-09 | Iram Casas | Lighting apparatus for tools |
US20020059871A1 (en) * | 2000-11-22 | 2002-05-23 | Hannstar Display Corp. | Position adjustment in laser-assisted pressing |
US20030000355A1 (en) * | 2001-02-22 | 2003-01-02 | Butler Andrew G. | Tools with orientation detection |
US20030010173A1 (en) * | 2001-07-13 | 2003-01-16 | Hayden James Alan | Precision laser cutting guide |
US20030027353A1 (en) * | 1999-07-28 | 2003-02-06 | Bright Frank V. | Microsensor arrays and method of using same for detecting analytes |
US20030029050A1 (en) * | 2001-07-26 | 2003-02-13 | Fung George Ch | Drill level indicator |
US6530303B1 (en) * | 1999-06-10 | 2003-03-11 | Black & Decker Inc. | Table saw |
US6536536B1 (en) * | 1999-04-29 | 2003-03-25 | Stephen F. Gass | Power tools |
US6546835B2 (en) * | 2001-01-25 | 2003-04-15 | Tian Wang Wang | Saw blade adjusting device for table saw |
US6550118B2 (en) * | 2001-02-02 | 2003-04-22 | Electroimpact, Inc. | Apparatus and method for accurate countersinking and rivet shaving for mechanical assembly operations |
US6565227B1 (en) * | 2001-11-13 | 2003-05-20 | Greg Davis | Method and device for tool alignment |
US20030101857A1 (en) * | 2001-12-05 | 2003-06-05 | Chuang Bor Yann | Transmission device of a table saw |
US6684750B2 (en) * | 2002-04-29 | 2004-02-03 | Shi-Hui Yu | Structure of a connection seat and a suspension seat of the connection seat for a suspension round saw |
US6688203B2 (en) * | 2001-11-27 | 2004-02-10 | Rexon Co., Ltd. | Circular sawing machine having indication device |
US20040032587A1 (en) * | 2002-08-15 | 2004-02-19 | Garcia Jaime E. | Optical alignment system for power tool |
US6736044B2 (en) * | 2002-10-07 | 2004-05-18 | Chin-Chin Chang | Table saw having a blade suspension structure |
US6736042B2 (en) * | 2001-03-01 | 2004-05-18 | Porter-Cable Corporation | Work piece guiding system for a table saw |
US6739042B2 (en) * | 2000-12-15 | 2004-05-25 | Siemens Vdo Automotive Corporation | Method for assembling a mechatronics sensor |
Family Cites Families (69)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US28025A (en) * | 1860-04-24 | Improved apparatus for heating ore | ||
US408790A (en) | 1889-08-13 | Gang circular sawing machine | ||
US411925A (en) | 1889-10-01 | Cut-off sawing-machine | ||
US640768A (en) * | 1898-10-06 | 1900-01-09 | Charles H Pope | Cap for cutting apparatus for mowers and reapers. |
US714098A (en) | 1902-01-06 | 1902-11-18 | John David Caldwell | Shingle-edging machine. |
US1476238A (en) | 1922-02-20 | 1923-12-04 | Sumner M Bump | Indicator for edging saws |
US2089209A (en) | 1933-09-19 | 1937-08-10 | Keuffel & Esser Co | Measuring tape |
US2077828A (en) | 1935-03-19 | 1937-04-20 | Westcott Rule Company Inc | Ruler |
US2299262A (en) | 1940-04-29 | 1942-10-20 | Uremovich Mark | Power-driven bench saw |
US2357194A (en) | 1942-01-13 | 1944-08-29 | Cincinnati Shaper Co | Gauging device |
US2407845A (en) | 1943-01-16 | 1946-09-17 | California Inst Res Found | Aligning device for tools |
US2488947A (en) | 1945-05-28 | 1949-11-22 | American Floor Surfacing Mach | Rotary power handsaw |
US2518684A (en) | 1949-04-21 | 1950-08-15 | Hyman M Harris | Duplex bench saw |
CH323681A (en) | 1954-04-23 | 1957-08-15 | Raimann Gmbh B | Directional lighting system on woodworking machines, e.g. B. gang saws, circular saws or the like |
US2855679A (en) | 1955-11-08 | 1958-10-14 | Howard G Gibble | Gage attachment for drills |
US2850054A (en) | 1956-07-09 | 1958-09-02 | Yates American Machine Co | Tilting arbor saw |
US3005477A (en) | 1957-12-23 | 1961-10-24 | Horstmann & Sherwen Ltd | Rotary tool wood working machines |
US3013592A (en) | 1959-03-23 | 1961-12-19 | Theodore G Ambrosio | Tilting table saw |
US3011529A (en) | 1959-09-08 | 1961-12-05 | Rockwell Mfg Co | Tilt and elevating mechanism for tilting arbor saws |
US3344819A (en) | 1965-10-20 | 1967-10-03 | Donald H Benson | Table saw |
US3597091A (en) | 1968-01-18 | 1971-08-03 | Itek Corp | Interferometer |
US3780777A (en) | 1971-10-06 | 1973-12-25 | Oliver Machinery Co | Defecting saw |
US3837757A (en) | 1973-05-29 | 1974-09-24 | A Levine | Drill press |
US3854386A (en) | 1973-07-02 | 1974-12-17 | Allied Thermal Corp | Air diffusers |
DE2340751C2 (en) | 1973-08-11 | 1974-09-26 | Tracto-Technik Paul Schmidt, 5940 Lennestadt | Control device for the forward and reverse flow of ram drilling rigs |
JPS5845003B2 (en) | 1973-09-07 | 1983-10-06 | 富士写真フイルム株式会社 | laser beam |
GB1488841A (en) | 1974-01-18 | 1977-10-12 | Plessey Co Ltd | Optical detection apparatus |
US4046985A (en) | 1974-11-25 | 1977-09-06 | International Business Machines Corporation | Semiconductor wafer alignment apparatus |
CH635769A5 (en) * | 1980-03-10 | 1983-04-29 | Far Fab Assortiments Reunies | INSTALLATION FOR SAWING PLATES AND HANDLING DEVICE FOR SUCH AN INSTALLATION. |
US4413662A (en) | 1981-06-08 | 1983-11-08 | Forest Industries Machine Corp. | Edging system |
JPS5876810A (en) | 1981-10-31 | 1983-05-10 | Konishiroku Photo Ind Co Ltd | Light beam scanner |
US4469318A (en) | 1982-04-22 | 1984-09-04 | Slavic Fred M | Work piece guide for table saws and the like |
US4534093A (en) | 1982-09-07 | 1985-08-13 | Textron Inc. | Beo-type machining system |
US4469931A (en) | 1982-09-13 | 1984-09-04 | Macken John A | Laser assisted saw device |
US4468992A (en) | 1982-12-13 | 1984-09-04 | Mcgeehee Ronald W | Automatic sawing system |
FR2559707B1 (en) | 1984-02-20 | 1986-07-25 | Smid Sa | GUIDING DEVICE FOR SAWING MACHINE TROLLEY |
US4885965A (en) | 1987-02-13 | 1989-12-12 | Ipco Corporation | Rotary saw for sectioning dental models |
JPS63229250A (en) | 1987-03-13 | 1988-09-26 | Kitamura Mach Co Ltd | Machining center |
US4887193A (en) | 1987-12-15 | 1989-12-12 | Dieckmann Ralf E | Mounting apparatus for a lamp or similar device |
DE3808119A1 (en) | 1988-03-11 | 1989-09-21 | Grecon Greten Gmbh & Co Kg | MARKING STATION BY LASER TURN LIGHT |
US4945797A (en) | 1988-05-06 | 1990-08-07 | Buss Automation, Inc. | Automated multiple rip saw feeding apparatus |
US4885967A (en) | 1988-08-25 | 1989-12-12 | J. Gibson Mcilvain Company | Laser alignment device for sawmills |
CA1327284C (en) | 1989-02-21 | 1994-03-01 | Stewart F. Macdonald | Drill guide and support therefor |
US5012590A (en) | 1989-05-25 | 1991-05-07 | Wagner G Anthony | Disposable layout tape |
US4978246A (en) | 1989-07-18 | 1990-12-18 | Quenzi Philip J | Apparatus and method for controlling laser guided machines |
IT221285Z2 (en) | 1989-10-18 | 1994-02-25 | Selco Srl | CUTTING STATION OF A PANEL CUTTING MACHINE. |
US4964449A (en) | 1990-03-27 | 1990-10-23 | Conners John M | Miter saw track |
US5038481A (en) | 1990-05-04 | 1991-08-13 | Lonnie Smith | Saber saw tracking light |
US5161922A (en) | 1990-12-11 | 1992-11-10 | The Boeing Company | Electronic micro-stop/tool failure monitor |
US5148232A (en) | 1991-01-28 | 1992-09-15 | Intra Corporation | Laser apparatus and method for aligning a crankpin grinding machine |
US5159864A (en) | 1991-09-23 | 1992-11-03 | Wedemeyer Arlan B | Insert for a table saw |
US5996460A (en) * | 1992-03-13 | 1999-12-07 | Waite; Lance H. | Cut line indicator for power cutting material |
JP2963652B2 (en) * | 1995-02-07 | 1999-10-18 | 株式会社椿本チエイン | Rolled product for chain and manufacturing method |
US5699161A (en) * | 1995-07-26 | 1997-12-16 | Psc, Inc. | Method and apparatus for measuring dimensions of objects on a conveyor |
JP2001500987A (en) * | 1996-09-23 | 2001-01-23 | ピーエスシー・スキャニング・インコーポレイテッド | Dithering mechanism for barcode scanner |
IT1292923B1 (en) * | 1997-05-15 | 1999-02-11 | Massimo Moretti | LEVEL LASER WIRE. |
US6263584B1 (en) * | 1997-08-08 | 2001-07-24 | Barry S. Owens | Alignment apparatus and method of using same |
DE19843162C2 (en) * | 1998-09-21 | 2001-02-22 | Alfing Montagetechnik Gmbh | Machining device with a machining tool for machining a workpiece |
IT1313279B1 (en) * | 1999-07-30 | 2002-07-17 | Makita S P A | LIGHTING DEVICE FOR ELECTRIC MACHINE TOOLS AND MACHINE TOOL INCLUDING SUCH DEVICE. |
US6283002B1 (en) * | 2000-01-28 | 2001-09-04 | Pei-Lieh Chiang | Table saw apparatus |
US6593587B2 (en) * | 2000-03-10 | 2003-07-15 | Perceptron, Inc. | Non-contact measurement device for quickly and accurately obtaining dimensional measurement data |
US6328505B1 (en) * | 2000-03-27 | 2001-12-11 | Howard Gibble | Drill guiding device |
US6419426B1 (en) * | 2000-07-05 | 2002-07-16 | Advanced Integration Technology, Inc. | Numeric controlled drilling jig-multiple-axis aerospace drilling machine |
US6301997B1 (en) * | 2000-09-11 | 2001-10-16 | Gregory A. Welte | Positioning device for power-driven fastener |
US6413022B1 (en) * | 2000-09-18 | 2002-07-02 | The Boeing Company | Vacuum clamp device |
JP2002141310A (en) * | 2000-11-06 | 2002-05-17 | Tokyo Seimitsu Co Ltd | Dicing apparatus |
USD465165S1 (en) * | 2001-06-27 | 2002-11-05 | Victor J. Shideler | Laser alignment device |
WO2003037090A1 (en) * | 2001-11-01 | 2003-05-08 | Stein Grov Eilertsen | Apparatus and method for trimming of fish fillets |
US6584695B1 (en) * | 2002-01-02 | 2003-07-01 | Chin-Chin Chang | Laser alignment device of a circular saw |
-
2003
- 2003-06-16 US US10/463,206 patent/US20060076385A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2003-07-31 US US10/632,559 patent/US7346847B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
Patent Citations (100)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US299619A (en) * | 1884-06-03 | Shingle-jointing machine | ||
US3124178A (en) * | 1964-03-10 | Circular saw version of a multi-purpose | ||
US1804764A (en) * | 1928-12-01 | 1931-05-12 | Edwin J Grant | Apparatus for and method of cutting material |
US2109976A (en) * | 1936-11-23 | 1938-03-01 | Jr Winslow S Pierce | Center finding device |
US2146906A (en) * | 1937-03-20 | 1939-02-14 | Herbert Lindner | Device for adjusting a rotatably and tiltably mounted table with respect to the axis of a drilling spindle |
US2121069A (en) * | 1937-06-14 | 1938-06-21 | Atlas Press Company | Circular saw |
US2307820A (en) * | 1940-02-20 | 1943-01-12 | Charles M Butters | Shadow-line indicator for trimming saws |
US2557029A (en) * | 1945-03-24 | 1951-06-12 | Griffin Richard Stanley | Optical centering gauge |
US2465000A (en) * | 1946-09-03 | 1949-03-22 | Norbert O Turner | Adjustable sawing machine table |
US3179458A (en) * | 1962-01-16 | 1965-04-20 | Thomas G Sconzo | Strike plate |
US3572937A (en) * | 1968-11-04 | 1971-03-30 | Atomic Energy Commission | Method and apparatus for interferometric measurement of machine slide roll |
US3713746A (en) * | 1969-12-24 | 1973-01-30 | Oerlikon Buehrle Ag | Guiding apparatus for controlling rectilinearly movable part of a machine tool |
US3728027A (en) * | 1970-01-13 | 1973-04-17 | Nitto Giken Kk | Portable magnetic boring machine having light beam centering device |
US3635108A (en) * | 1970-03-09 | 1972-01-18 | Us Navy | Laser-guided boring tool for deep hole boring |
US3891039A (en) * | 1973-05-15 | 1975-06-24 | Atlas Copco Ab | Method and device for drilling to a predetermined surface |
US3970359A (en) * | 1975-02-03 | 1976-07-20 | Xerox Corporation | Flying spot flat field scanner |
US4002094A (en) * | 1975-08-11 | 1977-01-11 | Quick Rip Corporation | Metal saw |
US4078869A (en) * | 1977-01-17 | 1978-03-14 | Honeycutt Damon P | Two-way right angle drill |
US4184394A (en) * | 1977-04-01 | 1980-01-22 | A/S Norcem | Motor-driven saw having a circular saw blade |
US4338723A (en) * | 1977-10-19 | 1982-07-13 | Centro Cororation | Angle measuring device |
US4257297A (en) * | 1979-01-31 | 1981-03-24 | Peter Nidbella | Circular saw with visual cut line indicator |
US4255056A (en) * | 1979-03-30 | 1981-03-10 | Hardinge Brothers, Inc. | Pre-setter for positioning tooling on turrets |
US4308777A (en) * | 1979-05-21 | 1982-01-05 | Rockwell Do Brasil Ind. E Com. Ltda. | Panel scoring table saw |
US4386532A (en) * | 1980-01-04 | 1983-06-07 | Centro Corporation | Instrumented tool |
US4319403A (en) * | 1980-09-29 | 1982-03-16 | Stearns Eugene R | Power drill position indicator |
US4383373A (en) * | 1980-10-08 | 1983-05-17 | Alain Couturier | Method of and apparatus for calibrating an adjustable jig |
US4450627A (en) * | 1981-07-06 | 1984-05-29 | Shindaiwa Kogyo Co., Ltd. | Device for determining a correct sawing position for a portable rotary sawing machine |
US4438567A (en) * | 1981-12-07 | 1984-03-27 | Raiha A P | Center locator for alignment of work to machine spindle |
US4503740A (en) * | 1982-01-18 | 1985-03-12 | Capital Machine Company, Inc. | Optical cutting edge locator for a cutting apparatus |
US4581808A (en) * | 1982-02-04 | 1986-04-15 | The Charles Stark Draper Laboratory | Adjustable machining system and implement therefore |
US4447956A (en) * | 1982-08-26 | 1984-05-15 | Chung Hun H | Centering device |
US4651732A (en) * | 1983-03-17 | 1987-03-24 | Frederick Philip R | Three-dimensional light guidance system for invasive procedures |
US4589208A (en) * | 1983-08-13 | 1986-05-20 | Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd. | Portable electric circular saw |
US4566202A (en) * | 1983-12-06 | 1986-01-28 | Hamar M R | Laser apparatus for effectively projecting the axis of rotation of a rotating tool holder |
US4836671A (en) * | 1985-04-08 | 1989-06-06 | Charles Lescrenier | Locating device |
US4599927A (en) * | 1985-05-08 | 1986-07-15 | Emerson Electric Co. | Tool elevation and bevel adjustment for direct drive power tool |
US4805500A (en) * | 1985-06-29 | 1989-02-21 | Amada Company, Limited | Horizontal band saw machine |
US4598481A (en) * | 1985-08-12 | 1986-07-08 | Hein-Werner Corporation | Intersecting laser alignment apparatus and method |
US4803976A (en) * | 1985-10-03 | 1989-02-14 | Synthes | Sighting instrument |
US4723911A (en) * | 1985-11-13 | 1988-02-09 | University Of Pittsburgh | Intelligent dental drill |
US4676130A (en) * | 1986-02-25 | 1987-06-30 | Filer & Stowell Co., Inc. | Lumber edger |
US4820911A (en) * | 1986-07-11 | 1989-04-11 | Photographic Sciences Corporation | Apparatus for scanning and reading bar codes |
US4725933A (en) * | 1986-09-11 | 1988-02-16 | Fairway International, Inc. | Line guide projector |
US4817839A (en) * | 1987-02-13 | 1989-04-04 | Ipco Corporation | Rotary saw and method for sectioning dental models |
US4833782A (en) * | 1987-06-01 | 1989-05-30 | Robert E. Strauss | Saber saw tracing light |
US5115403A (en) * | 1988-02-04 | 1992-05-19 | Amada Company, Limited | Workpiece workability detection method and a method for cutting a workpiece by means of a cutting machine utilizing that method |
US4934233A (en) * | 1988-06-29 | 1990-06-19 | Emerson Electric Co. | Compound miter saw |
US4934233B1 (en) * | 1988-06-29 | 1994-08-23 | Emerson Electric Co | Compound miter saw |
US5917523A (en) * | 1990-01-12 | 1999-06-29 | Hewlett-Packard Company | Refill method for ink-jet print cartridge |
US5013317A (en) * | 1990-02-07 | 1991-05-07 | Smith & Nephew Richards Inc. | Medical drill assembly transparent to X-rays and targeting drill bit |
US5031203A (en) * | 1990-02-09 | 1991-07-09 | Trecha Randal R | Coaxial laser targeting device for use with x-ray equipment and surgical drill equipment during surgical procedures |
US5207007A (en) * | 1991-11-25 | 1993-05-04 | Cucinotta Anthony J | Set-up tool |
US5203650A (en) * | 1992-01-09 | 1993-04-20 | Everett D. Hougen | Method and apparatus for drilling holes |
US5644616A (en) * | 1992-01-29 | 1997-07-01 | The Research Foundation Of State University Of New York | Dual radiation targeting system |
US5212720A (en) * | 1992-01-29 | 1993-05-18 | Research Foundation-State University Of N.Y. | Dual radiation targeting system |
US5316014A (en) * | 1992-02-07 | 1994-05-31 | Livingston Products, Inc. | Biopsy locator and guide |
US5320111A (en) * | 1992-02-07 | 1994-06-14 | Livingston Products, Inc. | Light beam locator and guide for a biopsy needle |
US5481466A (en) * | 1992-04-23 | 1996-01-02 | Townsend Engineering Company | Meat slicing machine and method of use thereof |
US5285708A (en) * | 1992-05-18 | 1994-02-15 | Porter-Cable Corporation | Miter saw alignment system |
US5283808A (en) * | 1992-07-01 | 1994-02-01 | Diasonics, Inc. | X-ray device having a co-axial laser aiming system in an opposed configuration |
US5426687A (en) * | 1992-07-07 | 1995-06-20 | Innovative Care Ltd. | Laser targeting device for use with image intensifiers in surgery |
US5387969A (en) * | 1993-06-22 | 1995-02-07 | Optima Industries, Inc. | Machine tool position measurement employing multiple laser distance measurements |
US5522683A (en) * | 1993-12-27 | 1996-06-04 | Uht Corporation | Drilling apparatus |
US5529441A (en) * | 1994-02-28 | 1996-06-25 | Cybernetics Products, Inc. | Drill coordinate optimization for multi-layer printed circuit board |
US5593606A (en) * | 1994-07-18 | 1997-01-14 | Electro Scientific Industries, Inc. | Ultraviolet laser system and method for forming vias in multi-layered targets |
US5495784A (en) * | 1994-09-29 | 1996-03-05 | Chen; Ruey-Zon | Cutting depth setting device for a saw machine |
US5720213A (en) * | 1994-12-12 | 1998-02-24 | Black & Decker Inc. | Bevel table saw adjustment |
US5488781A (en) * | 1994-12-13 | 1996-02-06 | Av Flexologic B.V. | Positioning apparatus for printing plates |
US5782842A (en) * | 1995-01-16 | 1998-07-21 | Daum Gmbh | Medical instrument guidance apparatus and method |
US5741096A (en) * | 1995-11-30 | 1998-04-21 | The Boeing Company | Line-laser assisted alignment apparatus |
US5862727A (en) * | 1996-03-11 | 1999-01-26 | Kelly; Robert R. | Laser arbor |
US5911482A (en) * | 1996-05-31 | 1999-06-15 | Black & Decker, Inc. | Window assembly and lower saw guard |
US6023071A (en) * | 1996-06-18 | 2000-02-08 | Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. | Image reading apparatus |
US5777562A (en) * | 1996-08-19 | 1998-07-07 | Hoffman; David J. | Centering device and method for centering |
US6239913B1 (en) * | 1997-03-10 | 2001-05-29 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Laser optical apparatus |
US20020004712A1 (en) * | 1997-08-18 | 2002-01-10 | Kodosky Jeffrey L. | System and method for configuring a device to perform measurement functions utilizing conversion of graphical programs into hardware implementations |
US6035757A (en) * | 1997-12-15 | 2000-03-14 | Caluori; Raymond | Rotary saw cut alignment device |
US6076445A (en) * | 1998-09-10 | 2000-06-20 | Black & Decker Inc. | Throat plate for a tool |
US6536536B1 (en) * | 1999-04-29 | 2003-03-25 | Stephen F. Gass | Power tools |
US6530303B1 (en) * | 1999-06-10 | 2003-03-11 | Black & Decker Inc. | Table saw |
US20030027353A1 (en) * | 1999-07-28 | 2003-02-06 | Bright Frank V. | Microsensor arrays and method of using same for detecting analytes |
US6375395B1 (en) * | 1999-07-30 | 2002-04-23 | Michael G. Heintzeman | Laser guide for hand held power drill |
US6209597B1 (en) * | 1999-09-08 | 2001-04-03 | Hal Calcote | Power tool mounting stand |
US6223794B1 (en) * | 2000-02-05 | 2001-05-01 | James Jones | Woodworking station |
US20020000148A1 (en) * | 2000-04-14 | 2002-01-03 | Brun Georges L. | Device for trimming wane-affected planks |
US20020054491A1 (en) * | 2000-11-03 | 2002-05-09 | Iram Casas | Lighting apparatus for tools |
US20020059871A1 (en) * | 2000-11-22 | 2002-05-23 | Hannstar Display Corp. | Position adjustment in laser-assisted pressing |
US6739042B2 (en) * | 2000-12-15 | 2004-05-25 | Siemens Vdo Automotive Corporation | Method for assembling a mechatronics sensor |
US6546835B2 (en) * | 2001-01-25 | 2003-04-15 | Tian Wang Wang | Saw blade adjusting device for table saw |
US6550118B2 (en) * | 2001-02-02 | 2003-04-22 | Electroimpact, Inc. | Apparatus and method for accurate countersinking and rivet shaving for mechanical assembly operations |
US20030000355A1 (en) * | 2001-02-22 | 2003-01-02 | Butler Andrew G. | Tools with orientation detection |
US6736042B2 (en) * | 2001-03-01 | 2004-05-18 | Porter-Cable Corporation | Work piece guiding system for a table saw |
US20030010173A1 (en) * | 2001-07-13 | 2003-01-16 | Hayden James Alan | Precision laser cutting guide |
US20030029050A1 (en) * | 2001-07-26 | 2003-02-13 | Fung George Ch | Drill level indicator |
US6565227B1 (en) * | 2001-11-13 | 2003-05-20 | Greg Davis | Method and device for tool alignment |
US6688203B2 (en) * | 2001-11-27 | 2004-02-10 | Rexon Co., Ltd. | Circular sawing machine having indication device |
US20030101857A1 (en) * | 2001-12-05 | 2003-06-05 | Chuang Bor Yann | Transmission device of a table saw |
US6684750B2 (en) * | 2002-04-29 | 2004-02-03 | Shi-Hui Yu | Structure of a connection seat and a suspension seat of the connection seat for a suspension round saw |
US20040032587A1 (en) * | 2002-08-15 | 2004-02-19 | Garcia Jaime E. | Optical alignment system for power tool |
US6736044B2 (en) * | 2002-10-07 | 2004-05-18 | Chin-Chin Chang | Table saw having a blade suspension structure |
Cited By (133)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US8253619B2 (en) | 2005-02-15 | 2012-08-28 | Techtronic Power Tools Technology Limited | Electromagnetic scanning imager |
US20090210294A1 (en) * | 2005-02-18 | 2009-08-20 | Max Co., Ltd. | Air Compressor and Work Management Data Collection System |
US7925359B2 (en) * | 2005-02-18 | 2011-04-12 | Max Co., Ltd. | Air compressor and work management data collection system |
US20070256036A1 (en) * | 2006-04-28 | 2007-11-01 | Johnson Eric S | User interface having integer and fraction display |
US10930099B2 (en) | 2006-05-31 | 2021-02-23 | Digilock Asia Ltd. | Electronic cam lock for cabinet doors, drawers and other applications |
GB2451988B (en) * | 2006-05-31 | 2011-06-15 | Security People Inc | Cam lock with retractable bolt |
GB2451988A (en) * | 2006-05-31 | 2009-02-18 | Security People Inc | Cam lock with retractable bolt |
US20070277571A1 (en) * | 2006-05-31 | 2007-12-06 | Gokcebay Asil T | Cam lock with retractable bolt |
US9273492B2 (en) | 2006-05-31 | 2016-03-01 | Security People, Inc. | Electronic cam lock for cabinet doors, drawers and other applications |
US8495898B2 (en) | 2006-05-31 | 2013-07-30 | Security People, Inc. | Cam lock with retractable bolt |
US20090249846A1 (en) * | 2006-05-31 | 2009-10-08 | Gokcebay Asil T | Electronic lock for cabinet doors, drawers and other applications |
US8490443B2 (en) | 2006-05-31 | 2013-07-23 | Security People, Inc. | Electronic lock for cabinet doors, drawers and other applications |
ES2333637A1 (en) * | 2006-05-31 | 2010-02-24 | Security People, Inc. | Cam lock with retractable bolt |
WO2007143142A3 (en) * | 2006-05-31 | 2008-08-14 | Security People Inc | Cam lock with retractable bolt |
WO2007143142A2 (en) * | 2006-05-31 | 2007-12-13 | Security People, Inc. | Cam lock with retractable bolt |
US10909789B2 (en) | 2006-05-31 | 2021-02-02 | Digilock Asia Ltd. | Electronic cam lock for cabinet doors, drawers and other applications |
US9536359B1 (en) | 2006-05-31 | 2017-01-03 | Digilock Asia Ltd. | Delivery system via electronic lockboxes |
WO2008080686A1 (en) * | 2006-12-27 | 2008-07-10 | Robert Bosch Gmbh | Power tool device |
US9208628B2 (en) | 2007-05-30 | 2015-12-08 | Security People, Inc. | Electronic locks particularly for office furniture |
US9222284B2 (en) | 2007-05-30 | 2015-12-29 | Security People, Inc. | Electronic locks particularly for office furniture |
US20090019717A1 (en) * | 2007-07-18 | 2009-01-22 | Bernhard Nortmann | Digital Measurement System |
WO2009111743A1 (en) * | 2008-03-07 | 2009-09-11 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Battery pack for use with a power tool and a non-motorized sensing tool |
US20110169481A1 (en) * | 2008-03-07 | 2011-07-14 | Nguyen Evans H | Test and measurement device with a pistol-grip handle |
US8251157B2 (en) | 2008-03-07 | 2012-08-28 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Battery pack for use with a power tool and a non-motorized sensing tool |
US8274273B2 (en) | 2008-03-07 | 2012-09-25 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Test and measurement device with a pistol-grip handle |
US9385352B2 (en) | 2008-03-07 | 2016-07-05 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Test and measurement device with a pistol-grip handle |
US9696362B2 (en) | 2008-03-07 | 2017-07-04 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Test and measurement device with a pistol-grip handle |
US9196881B2 (en) | 2008-03-07 | 2015-11-24 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Battery pack for use with a power tool and a non-motorized sensing tool |
US20090229842A1 (en) * | 2008-03-07 | 2009-09-17 | Rick Gray | Battery pack for use with a power tool and a non-motorized sensing tool |
US8851200B2 (en) | 2008-03-07 | 2014-10-07 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Battery pack for use with a power tool and a non-motorized sensing tool |
US8161781B2 (en) | 2008-06-17 | 2012-04-24 | Security People, Inc. | Electronic locker lock |
US20090308115A1 (en) * | 2008-06-17 | 2009-12-17 | Gokcebay Asil T | Electronic locker lock |
US20110107890A1 (en) * | 2008-07-02 | 2011-05-12 | Thilo Koeder | Machine Tool, especially Handheld Machine Tool |
WO2010072588A3 (en) * | 2008-12-22 | 2010-09-23 | Robert Bosch Gmbh | Guiding system for power tools |
CN102256730A (en) * | 2008-12-22 | 2011-11-23 | 罗伯特·博世有限公司 | Guiding system for power tools |
WO2010072588A2 (en) * | 2008-12-22 | 2010-07-01 | Robert Bosch Gmbh | Guiding system for power tools |
US20100225299A1 (en) * | 2009-03-06 | 2010-09-09 | Nguyen Evans H | Wall scanner |
US12007526B2 (en) | 2009-03-06 | 2024-06-11 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Wall scanner |
US9664808B2 (en) | 2009-03-06 | 2017-05-30 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Wall scanner |
US11169296B2 (en) | 2009-03-06 | 2021-11-09 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Wall scanner |
US20160209836A1 (en) * | 2011-06-06 | 2016-07-21 | Paramit Corporation | Verification methods and systems for use in computer directed assembly and manufacture |
WO2013014336A3 (en) * | 2011-07-22 | 2013-03-28 | Kinetricks Oy | Method, system and intelligent construction device for constructing an architectural object |
WO2013014336A2 (en) * | 2011-07-22 | 2013-01-31 | Kinetricks Oy | Method, system and intelligent construction device for constructing an architectural object |
US11229913B2 (en) | 2013-06-03 | 2022-01-25 | Biolife Solutions, Inc. | Cryogenic systems |
US10531656B2 (en) * | 2013-06-03 | 2020-01-14 | Biolife Solutions, Inc. | Cryogenic workstation using nitrogen |
US11813614B2 (en) | 2013-06-03 | 2023-11-14 | Biolife Solutions, Inc. | Cryogenic systems |
EP3007862A4 (en) * | 2013-06-13 | 2017-03-01 | Stanley Black & Decker, Inc. | Wireless tool system |
US9878428B2 (en) | 2013-06-13 | 2018-01-30 | Stanley Black & Decker, Inc. | Wireless tool system |
US12059779B2 (en) | 2013-10-21 | 2024-08-13 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Power tool communication system |
US11738426B2 (en) | 2013-10-21 | 2023-08-29 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Power tool communication system |
US11541521B2 (en) | 2013-10-21 | 2023-01-03 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Power tool communication system |
US10967489B2 (en) | 2013-10-21 | 2021-04-06 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Power tool communication system |
US10569398B2 (en) | 2013-10-21 | 2020-02-25 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Adaptor for power tool devices |
US10213908B2 (en) | 2013-10-21 | 2019-02-26 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Adapter for power tool devices |
US10131043B2 (en) | 2013-10-21 | 2018-11-20 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Adapter for power tool devices |
US10131042B2 (en) | 2013-10-21 | 2018-11-20 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Adapter for power tool devices |
JP2017538590A (en) * | 2014-12-16 | 2017-12-28 | ローベルト ボッシュ ゲゼルシャフト ミット ベシュレンクテル ハフツング | Optical display unit for use in an external application unit and hand-held machine tool |
US10799997B2 (en) | 2014-12-16 | 2020-10-13 | Robert Bosch Gmbh | Optical display device unit for use in an external application unit |
WO2016096452A1 (en) * | 2014-12-16 | 2016-06-23 | Robert Bosch Gmbh | Optical display device unit for use in an external application unit |
US20170348815A1 (en) * | 2014-12-16 | 2017-12-07 | Robert Bosch Gmbh | Optical Display Device Unit for Use in an External Application Unit |
US20160175920A1 (en) * | 2014-12-17 | 2016-06-23 | Robert Bosch Gmbh | Tool and Method for Processing a Workpiece with a Tool Element of a Tool |
US10071414B2 (en) * | 2014-12-17 | 2018-09-11 | Robert Bosch Gmbh | Tool and method for processing a workpiece with a tool element of a tool |
CN104647041A (en) * | 2015-02-14 | 2015-05-27 | 安徽金义得机械有限公司 | Small-scale numerically-controlled milling and drilling machine and correction and tool alignment method thereof |
US9914239B2 (en) * | 2015-03-12 | 2018-03-13 | Robert Bosch Tool Corporation | User interface system in a table saw |
US20160265763A1 (en) * | 2015-03-12 | 2016-09-15 | Robert Bosch Tool Corporation | User Interface System in a Table Saw |
US9888300B2 (en) | 2015-05-04 | 2018-02-06 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Power tool and method for wireless communication |
US11919129B2 (en) | 2015-05-04 | 2024-03-05 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Adaptive impact blow detection |
US11871167B2 (en) | 2015-05-04 | 2024-01-09 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Power tool and method for wireless communication |
US10516920B2 (en) | 2015-05-04 | 2019-12-24 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Power tool and method for wireless communication |
US9756402B2 (en) | 2015-05-04 | 2017-09-05 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Power tool and method for wireless communication |
US10979786B2 (en) | 2015-05-04 | 2021-04-13 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Power tool and method for wireless communication |
US10136198B2 (en) | 2015-05-04 | 2018-11-20 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Power tool and method for wireless communication |
US11483633B2 (en) | 2015-05-04 | 2022-10-25 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Power tool and method for wireless communication |
US10735833B2 (en) | 2015-05-04 | 2020-08-04 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Power tool and method for wireless communication |
US11485000B2 (en) | 2015-05-04 | 2022-11-01 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Adaptive impact blow detection |
US10277964B2 (en) | 2015-05-04 | 2019-04-30 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Power tool and method for wireless communication |
US10603770B2 (en) | 2015-05-04 | 2020-03-31 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Adaptive impact blow detection |
US10295990B2 (en) | 2015-05-18 | 2019-05-21 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | User interface for tool configuration and data capture |
US11599093B2 (en) | 2015-05-18 | 2023-03-07 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | User interface for tool configuration and data capture |
US11886168B2 (en) | 2015-05-18 | 2024-01-30 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | User interface for tool configuration and data capture |
US10976726B2 (en) | 2015-05-18 | 2021-04-13 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | User interface for tool configuration and data capture |
US10838407B2 (en) | 2015-05-18 | 2020-11-17 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | User interface for tool configuration and data capture |
US11256234B2 (en) | 2015-05-18 | 2022-02-22 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | User interface for tool configuration and data capture |
US10850380B2 (en) | 2015-06-02 | 2020-12-01 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Multi-speed power tool with electronic clutch |
US10618151B2 (en) | 2015-06-15 | 2020-04-14 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Hydraulic crimper tool |
US11685028B2 (en) | 2015-06-15 | 2023-06-27 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Hydraulic crimper tool |
US11810063B2 (en) | 2015-06-15 | 2023-11-07 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Power tool communication system |
US10977610B2 (en) | 2015-06-15 | 2021-04-13 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Power tool communication system |
US10339496B2 (en) | 2015-06-15 | 2019-07-02 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Power tool communication system |
US10380883B2 (en) | 2015-06-16 | 2019-08-13 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Power tool profile sharing and permissions |
US11423768B2 (en) | 2015-06-16 | 2022-08-23 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Power tool profile sharing and permissions |
US11565393B2 (en) | 2015-09-18 | 2023-01-31 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Power tool operation recording and playback |
US10556330B2 (en) | 2015-09-18 | 2020-02-11 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Power tool operation recording and playback |
US10345797B2 (en) | 2015-09-18 | 2019-07-09 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Power tool operation recording and playback |
US11084147B2 (en) | 2015-09-18 | 2021-08-10 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Power tool operation recording and playback |
US11909548B2 (en) | 2015-09-18 | 2024-02-20 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Power tool operation recording and playback |
US10433405B2 (en) | 2015-10-30 | 2019-10-01 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Remote light control, configuration, and monitoring |
US9900967B2 (en) | 2015-10-30 | 2018-02-20 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Remote light control, configuration, and monitoring |
US11064596B2 (en) | 2015-10-30 | 2021-07-13 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Remote light control, configuration, and monitoring |
US10349498B2 (en) | 2015-10-30 | 2019-07-09 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Remote light control, configuration, and monitoring |
US10595384B2 (en) | 2015-10-30 | 2020-03-17 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Remote light control, configuration, and monitoring |
US11583990B2 (en) | 2015-10-30 | 2023-02-21 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Remote light control, configuration, and monitoring |
US11424601B2 (en) | 2015-11-02 | 2022-08-23 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Externally configurable worksite power distribution box |
US10646982B2 (en) | 2015-12-17 | 2020-05-12 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | System and method for configuring a power tool with an impact mechanism |
US11691256B2 (en) | 2015-12-17 | 2023-07-04 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | System and method for configuring a power tool with an impact mechanism |
US11014224B2 (en) | 2016-01-05 | 2021-05-25 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Vibration reduction system and method for power tools |
US11433466B2 (en) | 2016-02-03 | 2022-09-06 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | System and methods for configuring a reciprocating saw |
US10562116B2 (en) | 2016-02-03 | 2020-02-18 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | System and methods for configuring a reciprocating saw |
US11813722B2 (en) | 2016-02-25 | 2023-11-14 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Power tool including an output position sensor |
US11484999B2 (en) | 2016-02-25 | 2022-11-01 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Power tool including an output position sensor |
US10583545B2 (en) | 2016-02-25 | 2020-03-10 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Power tool including an output position sensor |
US10272550B2 (en) | 2016-02-25 | 2019-04-30 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Power tool including an output position sensor |
US10582368B2 (en) | 2016-06-06 | 2020-03-03 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | System and method for establishing a wireless connection between power tool and mobile device |
US10382942B2 (en) | 2016-06-06 | 2019-08-13 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | System and method for establishing a wireless connection between power tool and mobile device |
US11622392B2 (en) | 2016-06-06 | 2023-04-04 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | System and method for establishing a wireless connection between power tool and mobile device |
US12048030B2 (en) | 2016-06-06 | 2024-07-23 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | System and method for establishing a wireless connection between power tool and mobile device |
US10149142B2 (en) | 2016-06-06 | 2018-12-04 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | System and method for establishing a wireless connection between power tool and mobile device |
US10932117B2 (en) | 2016-06-06 | 2021-02-23 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | System and method for establishing a wireless connection between power tool and mobile device |
WO2018075029A1 (en) * | 2016-10-19 | 2018-04-26 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Screen casting |
US11314313B2 (en) | 2016-10-19 | 2022-04-26 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Screen casting |
US20190217460A1 (en) * | 2018-01-18 | 2019-07-18 | Ingersoll-Rand Company | Add-on user interface module for precision power tools |
US20210107121A1 (en) * | 2018-05-15 | 2021-04-15 | STAHLWILLE Eduard Wille GmbH & Co. KG | Tool and method for actuating a tool |
US20220057785A1 (en) * | 2018-12-17 | 2022-02-24 | Atlas Copco Industrial Technique Ab | A method, a tool controller and computer program to enable different functionality sets for at least a first and a second tool associated with a tool controller |
US11994841B2 (en) * | 2019-06-27 | 2024-05-28 | Hilti Aktiengesellschaft | System and method for controlling a core drill and an auto feed device with a human machine interface arranged on the core drill |
US20220276638A1 (en) * | 2019-06-27 | 2022-09-01 | Hilti Aktiengesellschaft | System and Method for Controlling a Core Drill and an Auto Feed Device with a Human Machine Interface Arranged on the Core Drill |
US11748924B2 (en) | 2020-10-02 | 2023-09-05 | Cilag Gmbh International | Tiered system display control based on capacity and user operation |
US11963683B2 (en) | 2020-10-02 | 2024-04-23 | Cilag Gmbh International | Method for operating tiered operation modes in a surgical system |
US11877897B2 (en) | 2020-10-02 | 2024-01-23 | Cilag Gmbh International | Situational awareness of instruments location and individualization of users to control displays |
US11672534B2 (en) | 2020-10-02 | 2023-06-13 | Cilag Gmbh International | Communication capability of a smart stapler |
US12016566B2 (en) | 2020-10-02 | 2024-06-25 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument with adaptive function controls |
US11830602B2 (en) | 2020-10-02 | 2023-11-28 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical hub having variable interconnectivity capabilities |
US20220104806A1 (en) * | 2020-10-02 | 2022-04-07 | Ethicon Llc | Surgical instrument with adaptive configuration control |
US12064293B2 (en) | 2020-10-02 | 2024-08-20 | Cilag Gmbh International | Field programmable surgical visualization system |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
US20060102682A1 (en) | 2006-05-18 |
US7346847B2 (en) | 2008-03-18 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US20060076385A1 (en) | Power tool control system | |
US8004664B2 (en) | Power tool control system | |
US7359762B2 (en) | Measurement and alignment device including a display system | |
US7073268B1 (en) | Level apparatus | |
EP1384091B1 (en) | Detecting tool orientation, alignment, depth and leveling | |
EP1698418B1 (en) | Angle sensor and display device for a miter saw | |
US20060101961A1 (en) | Power tool control system | |
EP3162479B1 (en) | Position feedback control method and power tool | |
US20060116787A1 (en) | Power tool control system | |
US7375361B2 (en) | Optical alignment device for machine tool | |
US20020164217A1 (en) | Alignment system for hand-held tools | |
EP1693136A1 (en) | Alignment guide for a saw | |
WO2006020571A2 (en) | Tool with motion and orientation indicators | |
US11787005B2 (en) | Power tool angle assist | |
US20060075867A1 (en) | Laser apparatus | |
JP5366013B2 (en) | Portable cutting machine | |
JP4656377B2 (en) | Tabletop cutting machine | |
WO2000037743A1 (en) | Method and apparatus for accurately positioning a tool on a mobile machine using on-board positioning system and off-board adjustable laser reference | |
WO2011078838A1 (en) | Non-contact measurement device | |
JP5295645B2 (en) | Cutting equipment | |
EP1566240B1 (en) | Alignment Device | |
US20240001527A1 (en) | Stud finding drill method and apparatus | |
EP4312075A1 (en) | Augmented reality device to indicate a plan for tool usage | |
KR20170127891A (en) | Electric drill depth measurement device | |
AU2006203743A1 (en) | An electric drill |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: DELTA INTERNATIONAL MACHINERY CORP., TENNESSEE Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:ETTER, MARK A.;GARCIA, JAIME E.;DEKEYSER, KATHY;AND OTHERS;REEL/FRAME:014558/0780;SIGNING DATES FROM 20030902 TO 20030908 |
|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: BLACK & DECKER INC., DELAWARE Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:DELTA INTERNATIONAL MACHINERY CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:016069/0180 Effective date: 20041002 |
|
STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |